JP7248639B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine capable of playing games.

As a pachinko game machine in which setting values can be set, for example, one described in Patent Document 1 has been proposed. In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when the setting change process is performed, the stored contents other than the set values are cleared.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902

In the gaming machine as described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improvement regarding handling of information held when settings are changed.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that preferably retains information when settings are changed and makes it difficult to determine whether settings have been changed.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine according to means 1 of the present invention,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player by performing variable display of specific identification information and deriving a specific display result as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
a game control means for controlling a game;
production control means;
display means;
a setting means capable of controlling a setting permission state for setting a setting value;
a plurality of light-emitting means controlled by the game control means and showing the display result of the variable display of the specific identification information according to the light-emitting mode;
a movable body;
and a movable body control means for controlling the movement of the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of controlling a confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally,
The plurality of light emitting means are
When the power failure is restored, the lighting mode becomes a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information that was shown before the power failure restoration,
In the setting permission state, it becomes a first light emission mode that is not used during a normal game,
After the end of the setting permission state, the plurality of light-emitting means becomes a light-emitting mode showing the same content as the display result of the variable display of the specific identification information shown after the restoration of the power failure, and the control of the confirming operation of the movable body is performed. done,
The game control means, when the backup of the set value is not normally performed in the setting permission state, the plurality of light emitting means in a light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode is used during the normal game Control in the second light emission mode without
The game control means is
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium enters the starting area,
Variable display of specific identification information,
Based on the result of the determination, any one of a first variation pattern, which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern, which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, is selected. decide and
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means is
The variable display of the decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed using the display means,
When receiving the first command, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state with a predetermined reach,
When receiving the second command, it is possible to notify that the predetermined reach is not controlled to the advantageous state,
When the first command is received, the title notification corresponding to the predetermined reach can be executed in either a normal mode or a variation mode with a higher degree of expectation than the normal mode, and the title notification corresponding to the predetermined reach can be executed. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation by changing the performance mode of the predetermined reach at a plurality of timings after the title notification is completed,
When the second command is received, the title notification corresponding to the predetermined reach can be executed in either a normal mode or a variation mode with a higher degree of expectation than the normal mode, and the notification corresponding to the predetermined reach can be performed. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation by changing the performance mode of the predetermined reach at a plurality of timings after the title notification is completed,
When the first command is received, it is possible to display the decoration identification information in a reach mode during execution of the predetermined reach,
When the second command is received, it is possible to display the decoration identification information in a reach mode during execution of the predetermined reach,
When receiving the first command,
displaying a character display in a predetermined area of the display means for indicating that the control is in the advantageous state;
After that, the decoration identification information is displayed in an area including the predetermined area of the display means in a predetermined size larger than that displayed in the reach mode and in a mode indicating that the information is controlled to the advantageous state. It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the setting has been changed, to appropriately notify that the setting is in the permitted state, and to suitably confirm the operation of the movable body after the setting permitted state.
Also, in order to solve the above problems, another game machine
A gaming machine capable of playing games (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A game value giving means (for example, A part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing shown in FIG. 10-7),
A game value totalizing means capable of totaling the given game value (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize ball number display process shown in FIGS. 10-14 to 10-17);
A tally game capable of displaying the tallyed tally game value, and updating the display of the tally game value with a predetermined operation display (for example, a first addition effect or a second addition effect) based on the occurrence of the specific event. Value display means (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the number of prize balls display processing shown in FIGS. 10-14 to 10-17),
with
After the total playing value reaches a predetermined value, the total playing value display means performs a predetermined operation display based on the occurrence of the specific event, but does not update the display of the total playing value (for example, FIG. As shown in 10-21, when the value 141SG005A of the first winning ball number counter and the value 141SG005B of the second winning ball number counter displayed on the image display device 5 reach the upper limit value that can be tallied. Also, the first addition effect and the second addition effect are executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered one of the winning holes. The part where the value of 141SG005B does not change from the upper limit),
moreover,
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that the player is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state);
A title notification means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of informing the title corresponding to the suggested effect,
The title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggestive effect when a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the suggestive effect (for example, FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to improve interest when the total game value reaches a predetermined value. Also, the performance effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The game value totaling means uses, as the total game value, a first total game value (for example, a value of a first prize ball number counter 141SG005A) and a second total game value whose total period is shorter than the first total game value. (For example, the value of the second prize ball counter 141SG005B) can be distinguished and aggregated,
The aggregated game value display means can distinguish between the first aggregated game value and the second aggregated game value (for example, as shown in FIG. Part where the number counter value 141SG005A and the second prize ball counter value 141SG005B are displayed separately)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first aggregated game value and the second aggregated game value with different aggregation periods can be displayed separately.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
Effect execution means capable of executing a special effect (for example, the number of prize balls notification effect) (for example, a part for executing the processing for executing the number of prize balls notification effect shown in FIG. 10-22 by the effect control CPU 120)
The effect execution means executes the special effect based on the fact that the first total game value reaches a specific value regardless of whether the second total game value reaches a predetermined value. possible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-27 (E) and 10-27 (F), regardless of whether the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter has reached the upper limit value that can be aggregated) , the part that executes the prize ball number notification effect based on the fact that the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball number counter has reached the notification start threshold value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the special effect corresponding to the first aggregated game value with a long aggregation period can be executed even after the second aggregated game value with a short aggregation period reaches a predetermined size.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means to means 3,
A gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games using gaming media (eg, game balls),
A variable device (for example, a variable winning ball device 141SG006B or a special variable winning ball device 141SG006B) is provided in a special path (for example, the right game area 141SG002R) among the paths through which the game medium can move and can be changed to an enterable state where the game medium can enter. device 141SG007);
Among the paths through which the game medium can move, a predetermined path (for example, the left game area 141SG002L) different from the special path is provided, and a predetermined area into which the game medium can enter (for example, the general winning opening 141SG010A, the general winning opening 141SG010B, the third 1 start winning opening) and a region forming member that forms,
The variable device has a higher frequency of being controlled to an enterable state in a special state advantageous to the player (for example, a high base state or a jackpot game state) than in a non-special state,
The game value imparting means can impart a game value as occurrence of the specific event when the game medium enters the predetermined area and when the game medium enters the variable device (for example, , the part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing shown in FIG.
The game value totaling means is capable of totaling the game value corresponding to the period during which the special state is controlled, and does not total the game value imparted by the game value imparting means upon entry into the predetermined area ( For example, as shown in Modified Example 141SG-1, regarding prize balls when a game ball wins a winning prize opening (second starting winning opening, big winning opening, general winning opening 141SG010C) provided in the right gaming area 141SG002R While totaling, the part that does not tally the prize balls when the game ball wins the winning hole provided in the left game area 141SG002L (general winning hole 141SG010A, general winning hole 141SG010B, first start winning hole))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, appropriate aggregation can be performed.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The predetermined operation display is executed in an area updated by the addition of game value by the game value imparting means among the total game value display areas, and is not executed in other areas (for example, FIG. 10-20). As shown in the part where the first addition effect and the second addition effect are executed for different digits depending on the presence or absence of carry)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to easily grasp the correspondence relationship between the given game value and the total game value.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include inventions according to means 6 to 13 below. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-101428, at the start of a ready-to-win effect, there has been a title display that notifies the type of the ready-to-win effect. In the conventional gaming machine described above, it is desired to enhance the performance effect, and in view of this point, provision of a gaming machine capable of enhancing the performance effect is desired.
In order to achieve the above object, the game machine of means 6 according to another aspect,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state;
A title notification means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of informing the title corresponding to the suggested effect,
The title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggestive effect when a predetermined period of time has passed since the suggestive effect was started (eg, FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

The gaming machine of means 7 is the gaming machine according to means 6,
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing a plurality of types of the suggestive effects,
Among the plurality of types of suggestive effects, at least part of the effects within the predetermined period may be executable in a common mode (eg, FIG. 8-2(C)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which suggestive effect is to be executed, thereby improving interest.

The gaming machine of means 8 is the gaming machine according to means 6 or 7,
At a plurality of execution timings during execution of the suggestive effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a notice effect) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state,
The execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation even after the title is announced.

The gaming machine of means 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 6 to 8,
The suggestive effect executing means executes at least a first suggestive effect (for example, a ready-to-reach effect of super reach A and super reach B) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a ready-to-reach effect of super reach D and super reach E) as the suggestive effect. is possible and
In the second suggestive effect, the title notifying means may notify the title corresponding to the second suggestive effect from the start of the second suggestive effect.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the notification of the title according to the suggestive effect, so the effect of the effect is improved.

The gaming machine of means 10 is the gaming machine according to means 9,
A ratio of control to the advantageous state may be higher when the first suggestive effect is executed than when the second suggestive effect is executed.
According to such a configuration, the performance effect is improved.

The gaming machine of means 11 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 6 to 10,
The suggestive effect executing means may be capable of executing the suggestive effect in an effect mode related to the title notified during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the performance effect is improved.

The gaming machine of means 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 6 to 11,
detection means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting the action of the player;
Specific display execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) that performs specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection means,
The specific display execution means is
As the specific displays, a first specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047 and a stick image 31AK051) that are more advantageous to the player than the first specific display are displayed. is possible and
In the non-effective period of detection by the detection means, after displaying the first specific display, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 8-10 (E), FIG. 8-11 (I) )),
During the effective period of detection by the detection means, an action effect using the changed second specific display may be executed (for example, FIGS. 8-11 (J) and (K)).
According to such a configuration, the performance effect is improved.

The gaming machine of means 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 6 to 12,
As a suggestive display suggesting the degree of expectation of the control to the advantageous state, a first suggestive display whose display size is the first size (shutter image 31AK061 of the first size displayed during the shutter effect shown in FIG. 8-12(a) display, etc.) and a second suggestive display whose display size is the second size (the second size reach title image 31AK062, etc. displayed during the reach title effect shown in FIG. 8-12 (d)). Means (for example, image display device 5, effect control CPU 120) is further provided,
The display means is
Multiple types of elements with different aspects (element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry) shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d)) etc.) (such as fruit patterns shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d)) can be displayed,
A plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestive display and the second suggestive display when both the first suggestive display and the second suggestive display are displayed in the pattern including the specific image. (the shutter image 31AK061 and reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 8-12(a) and 8-12(d) may be displayed such that the elements E1 to E5 are included).
According to such a configuration, the specific image can be preferably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestive display. This makes it possible to accurately convey that the specific image has been displayed.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. can be anything.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure for demonstrating a variation pattern and the kind of reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of an advance notice effect determination process; FIG. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in an advance notice production|presentation determination process. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of a modification. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big win A), (B) is an explanatory view showing a big win variation pattern determination table (for big win B and big win C), and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a change pattern determination table for losing. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. 9 is a flowchart showing setting value confirmation processing; (A) is a flowchart showing RAM clear processing, and (B) is a schematic diagram of the RAM. 4 is a flowchart showing setting change processing; 4 is a flowchart showing a part of timer interrupt processing; 7 is a flowchart showing power failure detection processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing information stored in a RAM and a cleared state; It is an explanatory diagram showing an initial pattern for each received command. It is an explanatory diagram showing a notification mode when the pachinko game machine is started. 7 is a flowchart showing power failure detection processing; It is a flow chart which shows a part of production|presentation control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows setting change processing in a modification. It is a flow chart which shows a part of production control main processing in a modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which illustrates a production|presentation control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing of the determination example of the variation pattern in a special zone. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of a part of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of prize ball display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of prize ball display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of prize ball display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of prize ball display processing. It is explanatory drawing of the 1st prize ball number counter and the 2nd prize ball number counter. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prize-winning notification production|presentation execution process. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in addition effect|action and winning notification effect|action. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in addition effect|action and winning notification effect|action. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the number-of-prize-balls notification effect execution process. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; It is a flow chart which shows an example of special zone end information production execution processing. 4 is a timing chart of variable display in the special zone; It is a figure showing the display mode of the image display device during the jackpot game and during the special zone. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in a special zone and in a non-special zone. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in a special zone in a modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in a special zone in a modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in a state in which the gaming machine frame is opened. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a losing variation pattern determination table; It is an explanatory view showing a non-reach loss variation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in characterizing part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in characterizing part 112IW. 4 is a flowchart showing setting confirmation processing and setting change processing; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing processing executed when power is turned on; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode of a display monitor in setting change processing; It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the specification in each setting value. It is a timing chart showing the flow of various effects. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a continuation rate suggestion effect determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of the continuation rate suggestion effect processing. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a holding consecutive effect determination table and a holding consecutive effect effect determination table; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a holding continuous effect process; FIG. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of setting suggestion production|presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a setting suggestion effect determination table; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of setting suggestion effect processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a setting suggestion effect determination table of a modified example; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of setting suggestion production|presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a setting suggestion effect determination table; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of setting suggestion effect processing; It is a figure which shows the information display apparatus based on the characteristic part 109AK. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a RAM clearing state at startup related to the characteristic part 109AK; It is a figure which shows the display operation example of the information display apparatus based on the characteristic part 109AK. It is a figure which shows the display operation example of the information display apparatus based on the characteristic part 109AK. It is a figure which shows the display operation example of the information display apparatus based on the characteristic part 109AK. It is a figure which shows the display operation example of the information display apparatus based on the characteristic part 109AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the counting effect|presentation setting process based on characteristic part 110AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in the counting effect|presentation setting process based on characteristic part 110AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in the counting effect|presentation setting process based on characteristic part 110AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation content of the counting production|presentation based on characteristic part 110AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 110AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 110AK.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the probability variable state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is finished.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Portion 31AK)
Next, the characteristic portion 31AK of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-1 is a diagram for explaining variation patterns and types of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8-1(A), in the present embodiment, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the display result is "losing". -2, The variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, and the display result is "losing". are prepared.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1(B), in the present embodiment, ready-to-win effects such as normal reach and super-to-reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the ready-to-win effect is also referred to as a suggestive effect suggesting that the jackpot state is controlled. The reliability (jackpot reliability) when each reach is executed is normal reach < super reach E < super reach D < super reach C < super, as represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 8-1 (B) The reach B is higher than the super reach A. In addition, you may provide the reach which confirms that it will become a big hit.

In this embodiment, super reach is performed via normal reach. Further, during the ready-to-win effect of the super reach, there is a case where a developing effect to develop (promote) to a more reliable reach is executed. Variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc. and variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4, etc. shown in FIG. 8-1(A) are variation patterns corresponding to execution of the development effect. Note that FIG. 8-1(A) shows a variation pattern in which the reliability level develops to super reach, which is one level higher, but a variation pattern in which the reliability level develops by two levels or more is also provided. Also, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed multiple times may be provided.

In this embodiment, except for the normal reach which has the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is announced at a predetermined timing after establishment of the reach. As shown in FIG. 8-1(B), the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, for the super reach E, which has the lowest reliability among the super reach, the title of the reach is notified only by display, and for the other super reach, the title is notified by display and sound. In this way, the title notification is executed by more production devices for reach with a high degree of reliability than for reach with a low degree of reliability. As a result, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of anticipation, thereby improving the performance effect. Note that the notification mode of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or not depending on the reliability. Also, even in the same ready-to-win effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Also, the font (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) and typeface (line script, square script, etc.) of the title characters may be changed according to the type of reach.

The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to indicating the title itself such as the name of the reach, but may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the content of the reach effect, and the like.

(Example of production operation of characteristic portion 31AK)
Next, an example of an effect operation in this embodiment will be described. The following production operations are executed by the production control CPU 120 executing the production control process based on the production control command transmitted from the main board 11 . FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of super ready-to-win in this embodiment. FIG. 8-2(A) shows that variable display of decorative patterns is performed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5. ing. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-2(B), the decorative symbols showing the numbers 7 on the "left" and "right" stop and enter the ready-to-win state. After that, the production branches according to the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of super reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-2(C), the character 31AK001, which is an ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the ready reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. After a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the super ready-to-win effect, such as when the introductory part of the ready-to-reach effect (also referred to as super ready-to-win effect) ends, the image display device 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-2 (D). The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the characters "SP Reach A") is displayed on the entire screen, and a voice corresponding to the Reach title name (here, "Super Reach A") is output from the speaker 8. Thus, the title of Super Reach A is announced. After that, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, and as shown in FIG. The succeeding part of the ready-to-reach performance of super ready-to-reach A is executed. A production in which characters confront each other is also called a battle production. In the battle production, if an ally character wins, it becomes a big hit, and if the ally character is defeated, it becomes a loss.

It should be noted that when the lines are displayed on the image display device 5 during the super ready-to-win effect, a sound corresponding to the lines may be output from the speaker 8 . In addition, the words are not limited to being displayed in balloons as shown in FIG.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of super reach B, as shown in FIG. 8-2(C), the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the ready reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time elapses after the start of the super ready-to-win effect, such as when the introductory part of the super ready-to-win effect ends, the title 31AK005 of super ready-to-win B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-2(F). (Here, the characters “SP reach B”) are displayed, and a voice corresponding to the reach title name (here, “super reach B”) is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of super reach B is displayed. be notified. After that, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. The succeeding part of the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win B in which .

In this way, in super ready-to-win A and super ready-to-win B, the title of ready-to-win is reported when a predetermined period has passed since the start of the super ready-to-win effect. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction part of the super ready-to-win effect is shown to the player, so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

In addition, Super Reach A (Fig. 8-2 (C) → (D) → (E) ...) and Super Reach B (Fig. 8-2 (C) → (F) → (G) ...) Then, in the introductory part until the title is announced, the super ready-to-win effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 8-2(C)). By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super reach will be achieved after the start of the super reach effect and which title will be announced. In super reach A and super reach B, it is not limited to making the production mode until the title is announced completely common, but at least one You may make it make the part into a common production mode. For example, in the introductory portion of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a Super Reach production (for example, a production that displays an enemy character or suggests an enemy character) is executed in a manner related to the title notified after that. can be By doing so, the performance effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the performance. In this way, the title notification may be executed after making it possible to specify which super reach is to be achieved.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of super reach D, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the title 31AK007 of super reach D (here, the characters "SP reach D") are displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5 At the same time, the title of Super Reach D is notified by outputting a voice corresponding to the title name of Reach from the speaker 8 (here, "Kill the enemy"). In this way, in super reach D, the title is announced at the start of the super reach effect. Further, under the title 31AK007, an expectation level suggestion display 31AK008 that suggests the level of expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars as shown in FIG. 8-2(H). Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation for a big hit, but it does not have to be completely consistent with the degree of reliability of the reach.

It should be noted that the voice notification of Super Reach D is not to notify the title name as it is, but to notify the contents of Reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of title notification by sound is varied depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

After the title is announced in Super Reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-2(I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation suggestive display 31AK008 continue to be displayed in a reduced size in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of the reach even during the reach performance. Incidentally, FIG. 8-2 (I) shows the same effect content as FIG. 8-2 (C) (super reach A, super reach B), but a super reach effect dedicated to super reach D is executed. may

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-2(J), the character 31AK009, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the line 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is performed. executed.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of super reach E, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (A), the title 31AK010 of super reach E (here, the characters "SP reach E") are displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 5. By doing so, the title of Super Reach E is announced. Note that in Super Reach E, the title is not announced by voice. Along with the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011, which is an enemy character, are displayed, the line 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other is performed. executed. In this way, in Super Ready-to-Wear E, titles are announced together with the progress of the ready-to-win effect. In super reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach effect.

In the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win E with low reliability of big hit, the title is notified without stopping the progress of the ready-to-win performance, thereby preventing the player from having excessive expectations. On the other hand, in the reach effects of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the progress of the reach effect is stopped and the title is notified (Fig. 8-2 (D), (F) , (H)). By doing so, the title notification can be executed in accordance with the super ready-to-win effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach even in the super reach performance such as the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach D. Contrary to this embodiment, in the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win with high reliability of big win, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the ready-to-win effect. In the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win with low reliability of big win, the progress of the ready-to-win performance may be stopped and the title may be announced.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in super ready-to-reach A and super ready-to-reach B, the title is announced after a predetermined period of time has passed after the start of the super ready-to-win effect, and in super ready-to-win D and super ready-to-E, the super ready to play effect is announced. The title is announced at the start. By doing so, the title notification can be executed according to the ready-to-win effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in super reach A and super reach B with high reliability of big hit, the title is notified after a predetermined period has passed after the start of super reach performance, and super reach D and super reach D with low reliability of big hit are announced. In E, the title is notified at the start of super reach production, but in the case of reach with high reliability of big hit, the title is notified at the start of super reach production, and in the case of reach with low reliability of big hit, super. The title may be announced after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the ready-to-win effect.

(title display area)
In addition, in this embodiment, in super reach A and super reach B, the title is announced on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in super reach D and super reach E, the image display device 5 A title is announced in a part (second area) of the screen of . By doing so, the title notification can be executed according to the ready-to-win effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, when the hit reliability is high, title notification is performed in a wider display area than when the reliability is low, so effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be displayed in a size that fits in the entire screen, or the title may be displayed on the entire background as a background for title notification. It may be a thing (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. In addition, the display areas for title notification may be differentiated between super reach A and super reach B, and the display areas for title notification may be differentiated between super reach D and super reach E.

The method of differentiating the display area for title notification according to the ready-to-win effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for title notification may be arbitrarily changed according to the ready-to-win effect. For example, when the hit reliability is high, the title notification may be performed in a narrower display area than when the reliability is low. Further, when the display area for title notification is changed according to the ready-to-win effect, the display area may be changed as in this embodiment, or the display location may be changed.

(Expectation indication)
In this embodiment, in the title announcement in super reach A and super reach B with high reliability of big hit, super reach D with lower reliability of big hit than super reach A and super reach B is displayed without displaying expectation indication. In the title notification in , the expectation level suggestion display was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming repetitive. In addition, in the title announcement in the super reach E, which has a lower hit reliability than the super reach D, the expectation suggestive display is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing his sense of expectation due to the display of the expectation suggesting display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with the low reliability. At least a part of the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach E may display the expectation level suggestion display.

The indication of the level of expectation is not limited to the number of black stars as shown in Fig. 8-2 (H). You may make it display the numerical value corresponding to . In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), etc., in the case of showing by the number of black stars, the number of stages of expectations may be increased by enabling display of black stars equivalent to half (half). .

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in super reach A and super reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and the super reach effect is executed. As a result, in the super reach A and the super reach B, attention can be paid to the reach effect. Also, in super reach D and super reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until a final effect, which will be described later, is executed. As a result, in super reach D and super reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during the super reach performance. Further, by doing so, the title notification can be executed according to the ready-to-win effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the display end timing of the title can be changed arbitrarily because the effect can be improved regardless of the timing.

In addition, although the production operation of the reach production of the super reach C is omitted here, for example, title notification and expectation suggestive display according to the reliability of the big hit may be executed.

(Decision production)
After each ready-to-win performance is executed, at the timing of deriving the display result (final stage of the variable display), the decision performance for informing whether or not the display result will be a ``jackpot'' is executed. The fixed effects include a fixed effect indicating that the display result is a "big win" and a fixed effect indicating that the display result is a "loss". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-3(B), an effect of displaying an image 31AK012 on the image display device 5 is executed. Thereafter, if the display result is "big hit", an image 31AK013 indicating that the friendly character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-3(C), and as shown in FIG. 8-3(D), A fixed decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination is derived. If the display result is "losing", an image indicating that the friendly character has been defeated is displayed, and a final decorative pattern that is a reach-losing combination is derived.

In this embodiment, even if the title is continuously notified during the ready-to-win effect, the title notification is finished before the final effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the decided effect, and to perform a well-balanced title notification.

In the production operation examples shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, during the ready-to-win production of super reach, the decoration pattern is reduced in the lower right portion of the image display device 5 to perform variable display. , How to display the decorative pattern during the ready-to-win production may be arbitrary. For example, the decoration pattern may not be displayed during the ready-to-win effect, or the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of ready-to-win effect.

In addition, when displaying characters permanently displayed during pending display, active display, variable display, and display related to cellphone interlocking on the image display device 5, they are not displayed appropriately during the ready-to-win effect of super reach in order to draw attention to the ready-to-win effect. may be At that time, during low-reliability ready-to-win effects such as super ready-to-win E, these displays may remain displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations due to the low-reliability ready-to-win effect, and to make the player pay attention to the ready-to-win effect in the highly-reliable ready-to-win effect.

(development production)
Next, an example of the effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when the development effect is executed when the ready-to-reach effect of super reach D is being executed (title notification of super reach D is being executed), FIG. As shown in (B), the ready-to-win effect is interrupted and an effect is executed in which the screen is torn. After that, when it develops to super reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-4(C), the title of super reach A is announced, and the reach performance of super reach A is executed. In the case of developing into super reach B, as shown in FIG. 8-4(D), the title of super reach B is announced, and the reach effect of super reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source reach is switched to the development target reach title notification, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has developed. As shown in FIG. 8-4, when the destination reach is a reach in which title notification is performed by display and sound, the title notification is performed again by display and sound.

The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-4(B). You may make it display. By setting it as such production|presentation, an unexpected production|presentation can be performed. It should be noted that there may be a fake development production such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion performance)
In the production operation example shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the expectation suggestive display 31AK008 was designed to display black stars indicating the degree of expectation from the beginning, but five white stars are displayed first, and the stage It is also possible to execute an expectation level suggesting effect in which an expectation level is suggested by becoming a black star.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-5(A), when announcing the title of Super Reach D, an expectation suggestive display 31AK021 of five white stars is displayed first. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-5(B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation indication indication 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. An effect is executed to fit in one of the white stars of the degree suggestive display 31AK021. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (D) and (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, tone quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise each time it is repeated (every number of stars). At the stage where the number of black stars corresponding to the expectation level is contained in the expectation level indication display 31AK021, the black stars are highlighted by shining as shown in FIG. 8-5(F). By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation level suggesting effect has ended.

In the example shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) to (F), black stars are displayed one by one and the expectation level indicated by the expectation level suggestion display is raised one step at a time, but two black stars are displayed. One or more may be displayed so that the degree of expectation is raised by two or more stages. Alternatively, a half black star may be displayed to raise the expectation level by half. In this case, different sounds or the same sound may be output according to the number of stars displayed (the number of levels of rising expectations). For example, the same sound may be output when half black stars are displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Moreover, there may be a case where the sound is not output. By doing so, the expectation degree suggesting effects are diversified, and the effects of the effects are improved. In addition, the same black star image will be displayed regardless of the number of stages of expectations that increase at once, and the black stars will increase according to the number of stages of expectations that will increase. You may make it perform the production|presentation which does.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even when the same command (for example, a command specifying a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main substrate 11, the effect based on the command is executed in different effect modes. In each production mode, the background displayed on the image display device 5, the character, the motif, the sound output from the speaker 8, etc. may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or the game state, or may be changed by the player's operation.

FIGS. 8-5(G) to (L) show an example of the effect operation of the title notification and the expectation suggesting effect in the special mode when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes. In the normal mode, the title notification and expectation suggesting effects are executed as shown in FIGS. 8-5(A) to (F). In the special mode, the ready-to-reach performance based on the variation pattern of super ready-to-reach D is the ready-to-reach performance of super ready-to-reach D2 that is different from the ready-to-reach performance of super ready-to-win D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of super reach D is designated, the title 31AK023 of super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-5(G). At this time, a sound corresponding to the title name of READY is output from the speaker 8, but a sound different from that in the normal mode (for example, a sound with a different tone) is output. Also, the expectation level suggestion display 31AK024 in super reach D2 is not star-shaped but diamond-shaped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-5(H), a black rhombus 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation indication display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. An effect is executed to fit in one of the white rhombuses of the degree suggestion display 31AK024. At this time, a sound "pong" is output from the speaker 8 indicating that the black rhombus indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (J) and (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation has settled in the expectation suggestive display 31AK024, the black rhombuses are highlighted by shining as shown in FIG. 8-5(L). In this way, by varying the notification mode of the title according to the effect mode (state when the ready-to-win effect is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the game state, etc., the effect is diversified and the effect is enhanced. improves.

FIG. 8-5 shows an example of the effect operation when the variation pattern of Super Reach D is specified, but other reach effects (title notification, expectation degree) depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) (including suggestive effects) may be made different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the ready-to-win effect is executed), whether or not to report the title of ready-to-win, and the execution ratio of the title to be reported may be varied. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the title of ready-to-win may not be announced. By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect according to the taste of the player, thereby improving the effect of the effect.

In this embodiment, the expectation level is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation level indication display, and the expectation level suggestion effect is executed to gradually increase the number of black stars. It is also possible to execute an expectation level suggesting effect in which the number of displays suggesting is gradually reduced. Such an expectation level suggesting effect may be executed in addition to the expectation level suggesting effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Another example of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation degree suggesting effect in which the display indicating the degree of expectation of the expectation degree suggesting display is increased in stages, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the degree of expectation. In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed all at once instead of step by step. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), the title of Super Reach D is announced, and after completing the effect of gradually increasing black stars, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (B), the image display A development effect is executed in which the button image 31AK031 is displayed on the device 5 . Here, when an operation to the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. , Super Reach C titles are announced. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source reach is switched to the development target reach title notification, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has developed. Under the title 31AK032, an expectation suggestive display 31AK033 with three black stars is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. It should be noted that after the movable body 32 has moved, it is also possible to execute a development effect in which the title and the expectation suggestive display are changed.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as the advance notice effect, a title advance notice for giving notice of the degree of reliability of a big hit is executed according to the title notification mode (for example, the display color of the title, etc.). For example, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), the title 31AK036 of Super Reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach A is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of Super Reach A is displayed. is announced, the title announcement is executed in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red as shown in FIG. 8-7(B). Thus, the title is displayed in black when the title announcement is not performed, and the title is displayed in a color other than black when the title announcement is performed. In the title announcement shown in FIG. 8-7, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is announced by voice. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. Note that the timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display of the title.

Further, when a title announcement is executed in which the display mode (display color) of the title is changed, after the display mode of the title is changed, a sound corresponding to the display mode after the change may be output. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. Also, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, the sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the changed title.

(Execution timing of title notification)
It is preferable that the notification of the title in reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) such as the advance effect and the development effect, which increases the expectation of being controlled to the big hit advantage state. By doing so, once the title is announced, an effect that raises the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

FIG. 8-8 is a flow chart showing an example of the announcement effect determination process for determining whether or not the announcement effect is to be executed and the mode of effect. The advance notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 within the variable display start setting process of step S171 in FIG. In the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is the super reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001).

If it is a super reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the super reach title (whether or not to execute a title announcement) is determined (step 31AKS002).

In step 31AKS002, the display color of the super ready-to-win title is determined according to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "losing", for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9(A). As shown in Figure 8-9 (A), the display colors of the Super Reach titles are "black", "red", "black" to "red", and "black" to "fruit pattern". Those that change, those that change from "red" to "fruit pattern" are provided, and the reliability of the big hit increases in this order (ascending order). That is, the reliability of the big win differs depending on the timing of changing the display color of the title. By doing so, the player will pay attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the presentation effect will be improved.

In addition, the "fruit pattern" may be displayed in bold and the characters themselves may be "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the title display area may be "fruit pattern". . There may be a pattern displayed as a “fruit pattern” from the beginning. As for the display color that changes, it is sufficient that the display color changes after the title notification is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-7. For the object whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the big win reliability may be varied according to the timing at which the display color changes. Also, since the title display period differs depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may differ depending on the type of super reach. In the case of a super reach that has a long title display period (for example, super reach D or super reach E), a plurality of change timings may be provided and one of the change timings may be determined. In the case of super reach with a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or less than in super reach with a long title display period.

If there are a normal mode and a special mode as production modes, the display color of the title is determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A) in the normal mode, and as shown in FIG. Determines the display color of the title at a rate different from that in the normal mode. In the special mode, the pattern of display colors and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by varying the manner of execution of the title announcement (display color and display color change timing) depending on the presentation mode, the presentation is diversified and the presentation effect is improved.

In this embodiment, as the advance notice effect, the advance notice of the big hit reliability is executed according to the display mode of the character's words (for example, the display color of the words, etc.) in the ready-to-win effect of the super reach.

After determining the display color of the title of super ready-to-win, the display color of the character's words in the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win (whether or not to execute advance notice of the words) is decided (step 31AKS003).

In step 31AKS003, depending on whether the display result is "big win" or "losing", the display color of the lines in the ready-to-win effect is determined, for example, by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9(C). As shown in FIG. 8-9(C), the display colors of the lines in the ready-to-win effect are "white", "red", and those that change from "white" to "red". ), the reliability of the big win is high. That is, the reliability of the big win differs depending on the timing of changing the display color of the words. By doing so, the player will pay attention to the change timing of the display color of the words, and the production effect will be improved. As for the display color changing, the display color may be changed after the words are displayed. For the object whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the big win reliability may be varied according to the timing at which the display color changes.

Also, the reliability of the big win may be different depending on the combination of the effect modes of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the same effect mode (display color) is included in the title notice and the dialogue notice, the reliability of the big win may be increased when the same effect mode is used. Also, the reliability of the big win may differ depending on the combination of the change timings of the presentation modes of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the change timing is the same, the big win reliability may be higher than when the change timing is different, or the big win reliability may be different depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

If there are a normal mode and a special mode as production modes, the special mode may determine the display color of the words at a rate different from that in the normal mode. In the special mode, the pattern of display colors and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

It should be noted that, in place of the speech notice, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit may be executed by a change in the effect mode of the ready-to-win effect. In that case, in the advance notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the reliability of the big win differs according to the change timing.

After determining the display color of the lines in the ready-to-win effect, or when it is determined that the change pattern is not super-ready-to-win (step AK31S001; No), the presence or absence of other advance notice effects and the effect mode are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the decision results in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the advance notice effect decision processing is terminated.

In this embodiment, it is possible to execute the title notice and the dialogue notice in the case of super reach. and at least one of the speech announcement may be made executable. Also, the title notice and dialogue notice are explained as being determined by the decision ratio shown in FIG. 8-9, but the decision ratio is arbitrary. good. By doing so, it is possible to execute the notice effect according to the type of ready-to-win, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the title notice and the dialogue notice differ in the number of executable rendering modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed). By doing so, the presentation becomes diverse and the presentation effect is enhanced. In the title announcement and the dialogue announcement, the number of executable effects may be changed arbitrarily, and the number and types of executable effects may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to execute a notice effect with a sense of unity, and the player can easily grasp the reliability of the big win.

(Effect production)
When the effect mode between the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect mode will change may be executed. For example, an action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and an effect effect in which the image affects at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. After the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or lines may be changed. The effect mode of effect effect (effect effect image, etc.) may be common to both the title and the dialogue. It should be noted that there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or lines does not change even though the action effect is executed. When the action effect is to be executed, whether or not to execute the effect effect, the execution timing, and the mode of effect may be determined based on the determination results relating to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such determination may be performed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, depending on the presentation mode of the action presentation, the rate at which the presentation mode of at least one of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes (the rate at which the presentation mode changes due to the action presentation) may be different. It is possible to make the ratio of the dialogue notice and the change of which production mode (the ratio of which effect is applied) different, or the ratio of what color (how many stages) the change is made to be. . By executing such an action effect, the player will pay attention to which of the title or the words will be affected when the action effect image is displayed, thereby improving the effect. In addition, when there are a plurality of production modes, whether or not to execute the action production and the production mode may be determined at different ratios according to the production modes. By doing so, it is possible to execute an action effect corresponding to the effect mode, and the effect of the effect is improved.

As another example of such an action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of either the title or the dialogue is selected according to the effect content of the ready-to-win effect (for example, the action of the character, the effect content in the battle effect, etc.). may change. By doing so, the player will pay attention to the contents of the ready-to-win effect.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the characteristic portion 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. For example, all of the features described in the above embodiments are not essential components, and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5 , a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3 . Although expressed as a sub-liquid crystal here, the sub-display device may be composed of an organic EL or a dot-matrix LED. The sub-liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be movable or retractable. The sub-liquid crystal executes various effects such as a notice effect and display of a pending display. For example, title notification may be performed in the sub-liquid crystal. When the title is continuously displayed after the title notification as in the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, the sub liquid crystal may display the title and the degree of expectation suggestive display. In this case, after announcing the title on the image display device 5, the sub liquid crystal may display the title and the degree of expectation suggestive display. By doing so, the title and the expectation level suggesting display can be displayed without interfering with the super reach effect on the image display device 5, and the title and the expectation level suggesting display become easy to understand.

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to notification of the title of the ready-to-win effect as a suggestive effect has been described. may For example, as a preview effect (for example, a pre-read preview effect), when executing a pre-read zone effect that shifts to a plurality of zones (stages, effect modes, etc.) with different background images and effect modes on the image display device 5, the transitioned zone The present invention may be applied to the title notification of. In the case of presenting a mission ("reach with 7", "annihilate the enemy using a stick controller", etc.) and executing a mission effect that gives the player an advantage when the mission is accomplished, The present invention may be applied to mission title notification.

(Modified example 31AK-1 of characteristic portion 31AK)
In the above embodiment, at the timing of deriving the display result, a decided effect is executed to notify whether the display result will be a "big hit", and then the display result is shown ( Figure 8-3 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and if a predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the win or loss of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, the display result is displayed according to the player's operation, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, and the amusement is improved.

FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11 are diagrams showing an example of a super ready-to-win effect operation in modification 31AK-1 in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is displayed according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 8-10(A), after the image display device 5 enters the reach state, for example, as shown in FIG. 31AK042 is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 8-10(C) to (F) and FIGS. 8-11(G) to (I), a ready-to-win effect is executed in which characters 31AK041 and 31AK042 face each other.

As shown in FIG. 8-10(C), a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5 along with the ready-to-win effect. As a result, an operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

In this modified example 31AK-1, a plurality of types of operation effect images are prepared to indicate that an operation effect is to be executed. The reliability of the big win differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, the image indicating that the operation effect will be executed during the ready-to-win effect may change to a more reliable mode.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-10(D), a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. It changes to the large button image 31AK047.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-11(H), a cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. Effect 31AK050 that the bullet hits is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

As described above, in the modified example 31AK-1, when the operation effect image changes, an action effect is executed to indicate that the operation effect image changes. It should be noted that the operation effect image may change without accompanying the effect effect. Further, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the effect effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

8-11(J), the restriction line 31AK044 is erased, and the stick image 31AK051 is displayed at the center portion as shown in FIG. 8-11(K). , and a display prompting an operation to pull the stick controller 31A is displayed. Further, at this time, the operation valid period during which the operation to the stick controller 31A is valid.

Here, when an operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-11(L). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (M), the determined decorative symbols that will be the big winning combination are derived. If no operation is detected within a predetermined operation valid period, the image shown in FIG. 8-11(L) is automatically displayed.

In this modified example 31AK-1, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as operation effect images, and operation effects using these images are executed in the order of small button image<large button image<stick image. The reliability of the jackpot is high when it is done. Even when an operation performance image with low reliability is displayed, it may change to an operation performance image with high reliability during ready-to-win performance, so that the performance effect is improved and the expectation of the player is increased. can be maintained.

In addition, in the production operation examples shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11, the reach title notification and the expectation level suggestion display are omitted, but the reach production shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11 or in parallel with the operation effect. Decisions related to operation effects and operation effect images (whether there is an operation effect, whether to display an operation effect image, whether there is an effect effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 8-8.

(Modified example 31AK-2 of characteristic portion 31AK)
A suggestive display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state may be performed. For example, a shutter effect in which the first suggestive display is performed and a reach title effect in which the second suggestive display is performed may be executed. In the shutter effect, the effect of covering the screen with the shutter display is executed after the start of the variable display. In addition, in the ready-to-win effect, after the ready-to-win effect, an effect to display a ready-to-win title indicating the development destination of the ready-to-win effect is executed. A specific image may be included and displayed when either the shutter display or the reach title display is displayed. The ready-to-win title effect may be the same as the title announcement in the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

A specific image is an image with a high degree of reliability of a big hit that is displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The multiple types of elements include a banana image as element E1, a melon image as element E2, an apple image as element E3, a watermelon image as element E4, and a strawberry image as element E5. A fruit pattern image composed of these elements E1 to E5 is the specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Also, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 forming the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Also, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit within the shutter display and the reach title display.

When the shutter performance is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the reliability of the big win is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. In addition, when the ready-to-win title is displayed during execution of the ready-to-win effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the reliability of the big win is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. It should be noted that an image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as the image indicating the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the ready-to-win title effect are executed. For example, white image<blue image<red image<fruit pattern image may be prepared in order of the degree of reliability of the big hit (for example, a red shutter or a reach title with red characters). Then, one of the image patterns may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big win.

When performing the shutter display and the ready-to-win title display, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and the game effect lamp 9 emits light to notify. The common sound and light emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When such shutter display and reach title display are performed, common notification for fruit patterns is executed. Also, in the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. Note that the common sound and the specific sound may be partially overlapped in their output periods.

FIG. 8-12 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 8-12(a), when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of the variable display. The shutter image 31AK061 displays a fruit pattern image including all of the elements E1 to E5. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and the game effect lamp 9 emits a notification. When the closed shutter is opened, the variable display of decorative patterns is started as shown in FIG. 8-12(b). Downward arrows indicate variable display of left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left pattern and the right pattern temporarily stops, as shown in FIG. 8-12(c), the reach state is entered.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-12(d), the super ready-to-win effect is started. For example, the variable display is displayed in a small size on the upper right side of the screen, and the character is displayed on the left side of the screen. A reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the contents of the super reach to be executed from now on are displayed as a reach title display. The ready-to-win title image 31AK062 displays a fruit pattern image including all of the elements E1 to E5. Also, in the ready-to-win title image 31AK062, characters of "battle ready-to-win" are displayed to indicate that a ready-to-win effect accompanied by a battle effect is to be executed.

Further, when the ready-to-win title effect is executed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and the game effect lamp 9 emits a notification. Furthermore, after outputting the common sound, an effect is executed in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) such as "Hot", which indicates that the reliability of the big win is high. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestive display to be displayed is smaller than in the shutter effect. However, in the ready-to-win title effect, by outputting the specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image has been displayed. In addition, although the common sound and the specific sound have been explained in the case where the output periods are completely separated, the output periods may partially overlap.

After that, a battle ready-to-win effect is executed as shown in FIG. 8-12(e). An enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character, the characters "Battle Victory!" are displayed on the upper left of the screen. It is reported that the jackpot has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle production ends, the screen returns to the variable display screen with the original number patterns. As shown in FIG. 8-12(f), all the symbols are stopped and the jackpot symbol of "777" is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 8-12(a) and (d), both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 forming the fruit pattern image. In this way, the fruit pattern image can be preferably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the ready-to-win title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. As a result, it is possible to accurately convey that a fruit pattern image with a high degree of reliability for big wins has been displayed.

Also, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12(a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12(d). Therefore, attention can be paid to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

Also, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12(a) and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12(d) are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is the specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

The determination of the shutter effect (whether or not to use the shutter effect and the mode of effect) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 8-8. In that case, the shutter performance may be determined based on the determination result of the title display color in step 31AKS002 of FIG. 8-8. For example, when the display color of the title is determined to be a fruit pattern, the fruit pattern shutter effect may be executed more easily. Further, the determination relating to the ready-to-win title effect may also be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8 together with the determination relating to the shutter effect.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 122SG of the Present Embodiment)
Next, the characteristic portion 122SG of this embodiment will be described. A front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characterizing portion 122SG of the present embodiment is the same as that of the characterizing portion 31AK described above, and is therefore omitted. As shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, the main substrate 11 in the characterizing portion 122SG of the present embodiment is accommodated in a substrate case 122SG201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this state. The main board 11 also has a lock switch 122SG051 for switching to a setting change state in which the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, or a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed. , a setting changeover switch 122SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the odds of winning a big win (percentage of winning balls) to be described later in the setting change state, and an open sensor 122SG090 that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3. is provided.

A setting-switching main body provided with an operation unit that can be operated by a player, such as the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting-switching switch 122SG052, is housed in the board case 122SG201 together with the main board 11. The lock switch 122SG051 and the setting-switching switch 122SG052 are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear left portion of the substrate case 122SG201 so that operation can be performed without opening the substrate case 122SG201.

Since the substrate case 122SG201 having the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting switch 122SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the game machine frame 3 is closed. Operation becomes possible by opening the gaming machine frame 3 using the key. Further, since the lock switch 122SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like, it can be operated only by the store clerk who possesses the setting key. The lock switch 122SG051 is also a switch that can perform a switching operation between ON and OFF, which will be described later, and an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pressing operation) using a setting key. In addition, in the characterizing part 122SG of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used for both.

Since the main board 11 cannot be viewed when the game machine frame 122SG003 is not opened, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the game board 2 with the game machine frame 122SG003 opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation of the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. and LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs.

FIG. 9-3(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 122SG in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 9-3(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), the command 8001H is a first variation start command that designates the start of variation in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variation start command that designates the start of variation in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-3(B), the determination result (predetermined result ), and different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-3(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specifying command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "loss". The command 8C01H is a second variation display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result that the variation display result is "big win" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A". The command 8C02H is a third variation display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result that the variation display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B". The command 8C03H is a fourth variation display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variation display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor win".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed (high base state , time-saving state) is the second game state designation command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command for designating the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred and the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the error (abnormality) specification command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) occurrence has been determined on the production control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing, which will be described later.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in the open state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for a large winning opening that notifies that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the performance image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning mouth and the notification command after opening the big winning mouth, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win game state or the small win game state (for example, "1" to "15"). be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to display the number of special figure reserved storage so that it can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number, in order to display the number of special figure pending storage so as to be identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (that power has been restored, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started after clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that the pachinko game machine 1 has started the setting value change operation (that the pachinko game machine 1 has started in the setting change state). The command E104H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the operation for changing the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has ended. The command E105H is a setting value check start notification command for notifying wp that the operation for checking the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started (that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started in the setting change state). The command E106H is a setting value confirmation end notification command for notifying that the operation for confirming the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has ended.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program and performs control operations, and a numerical data that indicates a random value is updated independently of the CPU 103. A random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them in the variable data write operation, Variation data reading operation to read, CPU103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105, CPU103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105 and a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

FIG. 9-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 9-4, in the characteristic portion 122SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for judging the jackpot type, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for judgment, the random number MR4 for judging the results of the normal map display, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values within the range shown in FIG. 9-4. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

FIG. 9-5 shows variation patterns in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "losing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for cases such as when the display result is a "big hit". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variation display result is a "minor hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "losing" and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is referred to as a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), and variation A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is "losing" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach-loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "big hit" is called a "big hit variation pattern". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach performance such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, . A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, as for the super reach variation patterns, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 9-5, for the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment is executed, the super reach fluctuation pattern super reach α, super reach β is set shorter than Also, for the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach production of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the variation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach β is executed Toku-zu fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach α is executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, super reach β, super reach α, since it is set so that the degree of expectation for the big hit becomes higher in the order of the variation display result "big hit", the normal reach variation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 122SG of the present embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into types of fluctuation patterns, such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc. Instead of first determining and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these variations After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value for determining the pattern type, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the characterizing portion 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the variation content (performance content) is determined in advance for each variation pattern. This is not a limitation, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the content of variation (content of presentation) may differ according to the set value. For example, in the case of normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, if the set value is 1, the variation pattern will be normal reach loss, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo continuous effect will be performed. If the set value is 3 as a variation pattern that results in non-ready-to-lose after being executed twice, a variation pattern that results in super-ready-to-lose by performing pseudo-continuous effect three times may be used.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generating program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and the variation mode of each symbol in the variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 9-6(A), a display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. Display result determination table (setting value 3) shown in -6 (C), big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), big hit type determination shown in FIG. 9-7 (B) In addition to the table (for the second special symbol), the big hit variation pattern determination table, the small hit variation pattern determination table, the losing variation pattern determination table, the normal figure display result determination table (not illustrated), the normal figure variation pattern determination table (not illustrated) ), etc., are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characterizing portion 122SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit and the small hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, so that the winning probability of the big hit and the small hit (ball output rate) changes. It's becoming The setting value consists of three stages from 1 to 3, where 3 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 3 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 2 and 1, the lower the advantage is in stages. In other words, the set value of 3, which is the largest value, is the most disadvantageous value for the game arcade side, and the smaller values in the order of 2 and 1 are more advantageous to the game arcade side.

FIGS. 9-6(A) to 9-6(C) are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which hit determination values to be compared with MR1 are set. In the characterizing part 122SG of the present embodiment, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C), in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), a normal state or a time saving state (low Certain state) more judgment value than when it is, is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the probability determined (in the characteristic unit 122SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the setting value is 1, 1/150 when the setting value is 2, and 1/99 when the setting value is 3) In comparison, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as "jackpot" to the jackpot gaming state is high (in the feature part 122SG of the present embodiment, if the setting value is 1, 1/150, the setting value is 1/99 for 2 and 1/50 for a set value of 3). That is, in each display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the probability variable state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control to the jackpot game state compared to the normal state or time-saving state. is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the judgment value is increased.

In addition, in each display result determination table, if the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) or a variable probability state (high probability state), the special figure display result is set as "small hit" Judgment values are assigned so that the probability of being determined to be controlled to a small hit game is the same (for example, if the setting value is 1/200, if the setting value is 2, 1/99, the setting value is 3, then 1/50).

Furthermore, as described above, in each game state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the special figure display result is the "big win" or "small win", and the big win game state or the small win is most likely. When the game state is controlled, the probability of being determined is low, and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the special figure display result is set to "big win" or "small win", and the big win game state or the small win game is played. Determination values are assigned so that the probability of being determined to control to the state increases (big hit probability and small hit probability: setting value 3>setting value 2>setting value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 9-6(A) to 9-6(C). If it matches with any of the hit determination values, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit C). Also, when MR1 coincides with any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 9-6(A) to 9-6(C) indicates the probability (percentage) of a big hit and the probability (percentage) of a small hit. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

In addition, in the characterizing part 122SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table shown in FIGS. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and regardless of which display result determination table is used (regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1), the winning probability of the small win is the same. may be

Further, in the characterizing part 122SG of the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit using the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 9-6(A) to 9-6(C). However, a big hit determination table and a small hit determination table are provided separately for each set value, and it is individually determined whether the variation display result is a big hit or a small hit. good too. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) to 9-6 (C), each display result determination table is assigned a determination value for a small hit, but shown in FIG. 9-6 (A) The display result determination table (the display result determination table referred to when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1) may not have a determination value assigned to the small hit. In other words, the fact that the ratio of the small-hit probability differs according to the set value includes that the small-hit probability is 0%.

In this embodiment, three set values 1 to 3 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine The number of setting values that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

Figure 9-7 (A) and Figure 9-7 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101 is. Of these, FIG. 9-7 (A) determines the jackpot type using the reservation memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning port (that is, when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner) This is a table for when In addition, FIG. 9-7 (B) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner). This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the hit type determination random number (MR2) when it is determined that the variation display result is a jackpot pattern. This table is referenced to determine

Here, the jackpot type in the characterizing portion 122SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-8. In the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, only the time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends and the jackpot A (also referred to as a non-probability variable jackpot) that shifts to a low-probability-high base state, and the jackpot game. A big hit B and a big hit C (also referred to as a variable probability big hit) are set in which high-probability control and time-saving control are executed after the end and shift to a high-probability-high base state.

The jackpot game state by the "jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. B" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. Further, the jackpot game state by the "jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated.

The time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by "jackpot A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Before the game is executed, the game ends by entering a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, the high-precision control and time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the big win B or big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is the big win B or the big win C, the high accuracy control and the short-time control are executed again after the big win game state ends, so that the big win game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It is a so-called continuous state that occurs in

In addition, in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two jackpot types. You may provide less than a kind or four kinds or more.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the setting value is "1", out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 , 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "2", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "3", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special game of the first special symbol, only time-saving control is executed after the big-hit game ends. and variable probability control are executed, the ratio of determining the big win C becomes lower in the order of set values 3, 2 and 1. - 特許庁That is, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3. is 1, the ball output rate is the lowest.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the setting value is "1", the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 Among them, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "2", 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the big hit B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "3", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. (No decision value is assigned to jackpot B).

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special game of the second special symbol, only time-saving control is executed after the big-hit game ends. and variable probability control are executed, the ratio of determining the big win C becomes lower in the order of set values 3, 2 and 1. - 特許庁In other words, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the ball payout rate is the highest, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the ball output rate is the lowest.

In addition, in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the big hit type is determined as the big hit B. In other words, the fact that the decision ratio of the jackpot type differs according to the set value means that one of the jackpot types is not decided (the decision ratio is 0%). However, even when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, a case may be provided in which the big win type is determined to be the big win B. .

As described above, in the characterizing portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variation display result is a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game interest can be improved. It has become.

In addition, in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number for judging the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is You may determine using MR1 which is a random number value for special figure display result determination.

In addition, in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, the larger the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the probability of a big hit or the probability of a small hit increases, and the big win C as a big win type is determined). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. .

Further, in the characterizing part 122SG of the present embodiment, while the big hit probability and the small hit probability change according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the game property itself does not change. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game characteristics may be changed according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a variable probability state based on passing through, the game ball has a different rate of passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game according to the variation special figure (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). A game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls to a big hit game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used. Furthermore, although the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are 1 to 3 and the game performance is the same, the probability of a big hit or the probability of a small hit is higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. , a setting may be provided in which the number of winning balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4).

Furthermore, in such a case where the game characteristics are changed according to the setting values, common switches may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is switched to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). When the set value is 2 or 3, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (a game state is changed to a variable state or a variable state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot game state.

In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined result. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, there is a variation pattern determination table for big hits that is used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is a "big hit", and a variation display result is a "small hit". A big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance, and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is "losing" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, each variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIGS. 9-9 (A) and 9-9 (B), as the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the jackpot variation pattern determination table (jackpot A ) and a big-hit variation pattern judgment table (for big-hit B, big-hit C) used when the big-hit types are for big-hit B and big-hit C are prepared in advance. A) and big hit variation pattern judgment table (for big hit B, big hit C), the variation pattern of normal reach big hit (PB1-1), the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), the variation pattern of super reach β big hit A predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to each variation pattern of the variation patterns (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 9-9 (A), in the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A), when the setting value is "1", the range of 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to Up to 400 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β. It is assigned to the big hit variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the set value is "2", 1 to 350 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 351 to 825 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 826 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the set value is "3", 1 to 300 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 301 to 800 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 801 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 9-9 (B), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), when the set value is “1”, , 1 to 100 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 101 to 350 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of super reach β jackpot. Also, if the set value is "2", 1 to 150 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 151 to 450 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 451 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the setting value is "3", 1 to 200 out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 201 to 550 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3).

Thus, when the jackpot A is won in the special game, the ratio of determining the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2) is the ratio of determining the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). and lower in the order of setting values 3, 2, and 1. In addition, when the jackpot B or jackpot C is won in the special game, the ratio for determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot determines the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot. It is higher than the ratio and becomes lower in the order of setting values 3, 2, and 1.

That is, in the present embodiment, super reach β is likely to be determined when the type of the jackpot is "jackpot B" or "jackpot C", and the type of jackpot is "jackpot A". In some cases, the super reach α is assigned so that it can be easily determined, so that when the variation pattern of the super reach β is executed, a "jackpot B" or a "jackpot C" may occur. can raise the expectations of

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1), a predetermined random value out of the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value. assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, even if the set value is 1, 2, or 3, the range of the determination value of MR3 0 to Of the 997, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). In this embodiment, only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as a small hit variation pattern, Small hit variation patterns may be determined at different ratios from a plurality of variation patterns with set values 1, 2, and 3.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss used when the number of pending memories is 1 or less in the low base state where the time saving control is not performed, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and variation for loss used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a losing variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed are prepared in advance.

In the loss variation pattern determination table A, non-shortening non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), super reach A predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of β-loss.

As shown in FIG. 9-10 (A), in the change pattern determination table A for losing (for 1 or less total pending storage in low base), if the setting value is "1", the determination value of MR3 Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to non-reach loss variation patterns (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to normal reach loss variation patterns (PA2-1), 701 Up to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "2", 1 to 400 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 It is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", 1 to 350 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 It is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3).

In addition, in the loss variation pattern determination table B, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 2 to 4 (PA1-2), the variation pattern of the normal reach loss (PA2-1), the super reach A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take for the fluctuation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

As shown in FIG. 9-10 (B), in the change pattern determination table B for losing (for 2 to 4 total pending memories in the low base), when the setting value is "1", the determination value of MR3 Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 500 are assigned to non-reach loss variation patterns (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned to normal reach loss variation patterns (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α-loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "2", 1 to 450 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 It is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", 0 to 400 out of the MR3 judgment value range of 0 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 It is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3).

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss C, the fluctuation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 5 to 8 (PA1-3), the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super reach A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take for the fluctuation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

As shown in FIG. 9-10 (C), in the change pattern determination table C for losing (for 5 or more total pending memories in the low base), when the setting value is "1", the determination value of MR3 Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to non-reach loss variation patterns (PA1-1), and 551 to 700 are assigned to normal reach loss variation patterns (PA2-1), 701 Up to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, if the setting value is "2", 1 to 500 out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 It is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", 1 to 450 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 It is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3).

In addition, in the loss variation pattern determination table D, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the time saving control (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of the super reach α loss ( PA2-2), a predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned as a judgment value to the super reach β loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-3).

As shown in FIG. 9-10 (D), in the losing variation pattern determination table D (for high base medium), when the set value is "1", out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). Also, if the setting value is "2", 1 to 500 out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 It is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", 1 to 450 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 It is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3).

In this way, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for losing, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than the determination of the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the ratio of deciding the normal reach fluctuation pattern , set values 3, 2, and 1, respectively. Also, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, 701 to 900 of the judgment values are super reach α loss fluctuation patterns, and 901 to 997 are super reach β loss, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. Each is assigned to a variation pattern, that is, if the variation display result is a loss, the variation pattern of super reach is determined by a common determination ratio regardless of the set value, so the variation pattern of super reach It is possible to prevent the performance effect from deteriorating due to the non-execution of the variable display by .

In addition, the "common determination ratio" in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment means that the determination ratio is completely the same with different setting values (characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment), and different setting values (For example, between set values 1 to 3, the determination ratio of the super reach fluctuation pattern differs by about 1%).

In addition, in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a failure, the determination ratio of the super reach variation pattern is the same regardless of the set value. , The present invention is not limited to this, and if the result of the variable display is a loss, regardless of the set value that has been set, the determination ratio of all the variable patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same. Alternatively, only the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of either non-reach or normal reach may be the same.

Further, in the characteristic unit 122SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, regardless of the set value that is set, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α loss and the variation pattern of super reach β loss Although both determination ratios are exemplified in a form that is the same regardless of the set value, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result is a loss, super reach α It may be the same regardless of the set value in which only one of the determination ratio of the losing variation pattern and the determination percentage of the super reach β losing variation pattern is set.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, both the determination ratio of the super reach α loss variation pattern and the determination ratio of the super reach β loss variation pattern regardless of the set value is the same regardless of the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variable display result is a big hit, the set value It may be the same regardless of the setting value in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot is set.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of non-reach and normal reach varies depending on the set value. Depending on the current set value, there may be one or more undetermined variation patterns among the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern. In other words, if the determination ratio of the variation pattern differs according to the set value, it is possible to not determine any variation pattern (the determination ratio is 0%) or to set a specific variation pattern to 100% It also includes determining the ratio of

It should be noted that the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) has a shorter variation time than the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the non-reach loss variation is more than the variation pattern (PA1-2). The pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 9-5). Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, a non-reach-losing variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, making it easier to digest the retained memories, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit of 4. Occasionally winning a starting prize makes it difficult to generate useless starting winnings that are not stored in pending memory, and when the number of pending memories is reduced, a non-reach loss variation pattern with a long variation time and no reduction ( By determining PA1-1), the time for the variable display is lengthened, and thus it is possible to prevent the loss of interest in the game due to the non-execution of the variable display.

Further, in the characteristic unit 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-10 (A) to 9-10 (C), it varies using a different loss variation pattern determination table depending on the total pending storage number Although the mode for determining the pattern is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the first A variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for losing according to the number of reserved memories of special symbols, or the number of reserved memories of second special symbols when performing variable display of second special symbols.

Further, in each losing variation pattern determination table of the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, even if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any numerical value of 1 to 3, the super reach losing variation pattern The ranges of random numbers assigned to (PA2-2 and PA2-3) are the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability differ according to the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the variation display that is actually executed in the variation pattern of the super reach loss (variation pattern of the super reach loss) appearance rate) is different according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 . In addition, in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, a form is exemplified in which the ratio of the fluctuation display to be executed in the fluctuation pattern of super reach loss is different according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, The present invention is not limited to this, but considering the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the variable display of the super reach loss is displayed at the same rate. You may make it perform by a fluctuation pattern.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 9-1 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . The game control data holding area includes a first special figure reservation storage unit, a second special figure reservation storage unit, a general figure reservation storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter A setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit are provided.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A, and although the start prize (first start prize) has occurred, the special figure that has not yet been started It stores the pending data of the game (special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the establishment of the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Based on the random number MR1 for determining the variation display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern as reserved data, It stores until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game ) to make it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball has passed (entered) the second start prize opening formed by the variable prize ball device 6B and the start prize (second start prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the establishment of the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Based on the random number MR1 for determining the variation display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern as reserved data, The number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game ) to make it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, the starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern reservation storage part stores the reservation information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate is detected by the gate switch 21.例文帳に追加For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order in which the game ball passed through the passage gate, and is extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, "4").

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting section. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR1 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and is periodically calculated according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Next, the game control main processing in the characterizing portion 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 9-11 are flowcharts showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. FIG. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (122SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (122SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register setting, and setting to make the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON (122SGSa003). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the clear switch is ON (122SGSa003; Y), proceed to 122SGSa014. If the clear switch is OFF (122SGSa003; N), it is further determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (122SGSa004). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is OFF and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 122SGSa014.

When backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa004; Y), the CPU 103 checks the backup data (using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (122SGSa005). . 122SGSa005 determines whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, for example, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (122SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 122SGSa014.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa005; Y), the CPU 103 sets an effect control board activation start waiting timer for waiting during the period until the effect control board 12 is activated (122SGSa006). Then, the value of the effect control board activation start waiting timer is decreased by 1 (122SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the effect control board activation start waiting timer has timed out (122SGSa008). When the effect control board startup start waiting timer has not timed out (122SGSa008; N), the period until the effect control board 12 is started by executing 122SGSa007 again is waited. In addition, when the effect control board start waiting timer has timed out (122SGSa008; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa009).

When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa009; Y), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor 122SG090 is ON, that is, whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 is opened (122SGSa009a). When the open sensor 122SG090 is ON (122SGSa009a; Y), set value confirmation processing for displaying the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 on the display monitor 122SG029 is executed, and the game parlor clerk or the like displays the set value. By visually recognizing the monitor 122SG029, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed (setting change state) (122SGSa010). If the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa009;N) or if the open sensor is OFF (122SGSa009a;N), after the set value confirmation process is executed, the process proceeds to 122SGSa011. That is, in the characterizing part 122SG of the present embodiment, when the clear switch is not operated and started, the set value is confirmed if the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened even if the lock switch 122SG051 is ON. Impossible.

In 122SGSa011, the CPU 103 performs recovery processing for returning the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state at the time of power supply stop. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed-up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

Then, the CPU 103 assumes that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored to the state before the power failure (activated by hot start), and transmits a restoration command including a hot start notification command to the performance control board 12, and proceeds to 122SGSa021. (122SGSa013).

At 122SGSa014, the CPU 103 sets the effect control board activation start waiting timer for waiting during the period until the effect control board 12 is activated. Then, the value of the effect control board activation start waiting timer is decreased by 1 (122SGSa015), and it is determined whether or not the effect control board activation start waiting timer has timed out (122SGSa016). If the effect control board activation start waiting timer has not timed out (122SGSa016; N), it waits for a period until the effect control board 12 is activated by executing 122SGSa015 again. In addition, when the effect control board activation start waiting timer has timed out (122SGSa016; Y), the CPU 103 executes RAM clear processing (122SGSa017) for clearing the contents of the RAM 102, and then the lock switch 122SG051 is ON. It is determined whether or not there is (122SGSa018).

When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa018; N), the CPU 103 assumes that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started with a cold start, transmits a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 122SGSa021 ( 122SGSa019).

Further, when the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa019; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the open sensor 122SG090 is ON (122SGSa019a). When the open sensor is ON (122SGSa019a; Y), that is, when the gaming machine frame 3 is open, setting change processing for changing the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (122SGSa020) and proceed to 122SGSa021. That is, in the characterizing portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the clear switch is operated and activated, even if the lock switch 122SG051 is ON, the setting value cannot be changed unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. ing.

In addition, when the open sensor 122SG090 is OFF at 122SGSa019a, it is assumed that the pachinko game machine 1 is activated by cold start, and a cold start notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and the process proceeds to 122SGSa021 (122SGSa019).

In 122SGSa021, the CPU 103 executes random number circuit setting processing for initializing the random number circuit 104 . Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set (122SGSa022) so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the interrupt is permitted (122SGSa023). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

FIG. 9-12 is a flow chart showing setting value confirmation processing executed by the CPU 103. FIG. In the setting value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first transmits a setting value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa031), and is stored in the address F001 (see FIG. 9-13 (B)) in the RAM 102. The set value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa032). Then, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa033). When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa033; N), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 122SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing 122SGSa033.

In addition, when the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa051; N), the CPU 103 terminates the display of the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa034), and issues a set value check end notification command to the effect control board 12. It is transmitted and the setting value confirmation processing is terminated (122SGSa035).

In the characterizing part 122SG of the present embodiment, by ending the setting confirmation state (ending the setting value confirmation processing), the state becomes the same as when starting with a normal hot start. The command transmitted to the effect control board 12 may be a hot start notification command.

FIG. 9-13A is a flowchart showing RAM clear processing executed by the CPU 103. FIG. In the RAM clearing process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the data stored in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa041). If the data stored in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa041; N), it is further determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042). If backup data is stored in RAM 102 (122SGSa042; Y), CPU 103 designates the second address from the top in RAM 102 and proceeds to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa043).

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or if the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042; N), specify the top address in the RAM 102 and proceed to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa044).

In 122SGSa045, the CPU 103 sets (stores) "00H" in the designated address. In particular, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when there is no backup data (122SGSa042; N), by setting "00H" to the address F000, the pachinko machine 1 automatically sets the set value. 1 is set. Then, it is determined whether or not the designated address is the last address (FXXX to be described later) of the RAM 102 (122SGSa046). If the specified address is not the last address in RAM 102 (122SGSa046; N), specify the next address in RAM 102 and proceed to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa047); ;Y) terminates the RAM clearing process.

The RAM 102 in the characterizing portion 122SG of the present embodiment is assigned addresses (F000 to FXXX) for each storage area as shown in FIG. 9-13B. Among these storage areas, the first address (F000) of the RAM 102 stores the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1, and the second address (F001) from the top of the RAM 102 stores Temporary setting values are stored. Furthermore, in other addresses (F002, F003, etc.), in addition to clear switch backup information that can specify whether or not the clear switch was ON when the pachinko game machine 1 was started, a special figure reservation memory and a general figure reservation Game information including memory, values of various counters, various timers, various flags, and error information generated in the pachinko game machine 1 is stored. Backup data (including a backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among areas where other information is stored. In addition, a value (for example, set value “0”) indicating the factory shipment state is set at the top address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of shipment from the factory. It should be noted that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a state in which a value indicating the factory shipping state is set to the leading address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change processing may be executed without fail. A display on the display device 5 or the like may prompt the user to restart the pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change process.

In other words, the RAM clearing process in the characterizing part 122SG of the present embodiment is that when there is no abnormality in the RAM 102 and there is backup data, addresses (F001 to FXXX ) to clear data other than the set value, and if there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 or if there is no backup data, all addresses (F000 to FXXX) in the RAM 102 store "00H". This is a process of clearing all data including set values by storing the .

In addition, in the characteristic portion 122SG in the present embodiment, the setting value is stored at the top address F000 of the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting value is stored at the last address of the RAM 102. good too. If the setting value is stored in the last address of the RAM 102 in this way, when the RAM clear processing shown in FIG. , and "00H" is stored sequentially from the address F000 to the address just before the address F000.

Furthermore, in the characterizing part 122SG in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the form of clearing the data excluding the setting value of the RAM 102 is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. However, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, only the game information stored in the predetermined address of the RAM 102 (the address F003 in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment) is cleared. can be

Further, in the characterizing portion 122SG in the present embodiment, the form of storing the clear switch backup information in the RAM 102 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. A process of storing and reading clear switch backup information in the RAM 102 by storing it in a register of the microcomputer 100 (for example, an accumulator that is the center of calculation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, or a general-purpose register). may be omitted so that the processing load on the CPU 103 can be reduced. In addition, when storing the clear switch backup information in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved more than when storing the clear switch backup information in the register of the game control microcomputer 100. It is possible to prevent overwriting of other information (data) by processing.

9-14 is a flow chart showing the setting change process executed by the CPU 103. FIG. In the setting change process, the CPU 103 first transmits a set value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa051). The set value change start notification command may be transmitted immediately before starting the set value change process (at the timing when it is determined that the lock switch 122SG051 is ON in 122SGSa018). Then, the setting value stored in the address F000 (see FIG. 9-13B) in the RAM 102 is specified (122SGSa052), and the specified setting value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa053).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting switch 122SG052 has been operated (122SGSa054). When the setting switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054), the contents of the address F001 in the RAM 102 are updated (122SGSa055). Specifically, when the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "1", the set value "2", which is one step more advantageous for the player than "1", is set as the provisional set value. When the set value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "2", the set value "3", which is one step more advantageous for the player than "2", is provisionally set. It is stored in address F001 of RAM 102 as a set value. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "3", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a provisional set value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored at the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa056), and determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057). If the setting changeover switch is not operated in 122SGSa054 (122SGSa054; N), the process of 122SGSa057 is executed without executing the processes of 122SGSa055 and 122SGSa056.

When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 122SGSa054 to 122SGSa056 to store a new provisional setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102, or store the temporary set value in the address F001. A process for displaying the setting values stored in the display monitor 122SG029 is executed.

When the lock switch is OFF at 122SGSa057 (122SGSa057; N), the CPU 103 stores the set value stored at address F001 in RAM 102 at address F000. In other words, the CPU 103 stores the setting value stored at the address F001 (temporary setting value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029) at the address F000, thereby changing the setting value stored at the address F001 to the actual setting value. (changes the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1). Then, the CPU 103 transmits a set value designation command corresponding to the set value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102 and a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12, and ends the setting change process. (122SGSa059, 122SGSa060).

In addition, in the characterizing portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the form of transmitting the setting value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 within the setting change process is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the set value change end notification command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 within the game control main process (immediately after finishing the setting change process).

In addition, in the characterizing portion 122SG of the present embodiment, by turning OFF the lock switch 122SG051, a new setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1 (temporary setting value stored at address F001 in RAM 102). is stored in the address F000), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning of game balls into the starting winning opening, the operation of the clear switch, the pushing operation of the lock switch 122SG051, etc. A new setting value may be set in the pachinko game machine 1 by turning off the lock switch 122SG051 after executing the operation of .

In addition, in the characterizing portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold-started and started, or when it is started in the setting change state, the cold-start notification command and setting value change start for the effect control board 12 Although the form of executing the RAM clearing process before transmitting the notification command is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clearing process sends a cold start notification to the effect control board 12. It may be executed after sending a command or setting value change start notification command.

Furthermore, in the characterizing part 122SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the RAM clear processing is executed before the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the RAM clear processing is executed again (setting values other than those stored at address F000 of RAM 102 are data). By doing so, it is possible to prevent problems such as the game being started with incorrect data stored in the RAM.

Furthermore, in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start and when it is started with a setting change state, after executing a common RAM clear process (122SGSa017), it is started A form of transmitting a command (cold start notification command, set value change start notification command or set value change end notification command) according to the state to the effect control board 12 is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. However, depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start or when it is started with a setting change state, a command (cold start notification command, setting value change start notification command, setting value change After transmitting the end notification command) to the effect control board 12, the common RAM clear processing may be executed.

Next, the game control timer interrupt processing in the characterizing portion 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-15, the CPU 103 first executes the power failure detection process (122SGS020) in the game control timer interrupt process, and then executes the switch process (S21) to the command control process (S27). . As shown in FIG. 9-16, in the power-off detection process, the CPU 103 first determines whether a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped below a predetermined value is input. (122SGSa051). If there is no power-off signal input (122SGSa051; N), the process is terminated. (122SGS053), the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 102 (122SGS053). Then, after creating check data to be used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (122SGS054), the system shifts to loop processing in which no processing is executed until the pachinko game machine 1 is powered off.

Next, the production control main processing in the characterizing portion 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 9-17 is a flow chart showing the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120. FIG. In the production control main process, the production control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (122SGS401a), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and performs the CTC (counter/timer) mounted on the production control board 12. circuit) register settings, etc. Also, an initial operation control process is executed (122SGS401b). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a command reception waiting timer according to the reception waiting period of the command transmitted from the main board 11 (122SGS402). Then, the value of the command reception wait timer is decremented by 1 (122SGS403), and it is determined whether or not the command reception wait timer has timed out (122SGS404). When the command reception wait timer times out (122SGS404; N), the processes of 122SGS403 and 122SGS404 are repeatedly executed and waits until the command reception wait timer times out.

When the command reception wait timer times out (122SGS404; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hot start notification command has been received (122SGS405). When the hot start notification command is received (122SGS405; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from the power failure, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (the player is After receiving the input of information, clear the information stored in the RAM 122 including the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc., and proceed to 122SGS417 (122SGS406).

When there is no reception of the hot start notification command (122SGS405; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is reception of the cold notification command (122SGS407). If the cold notification command is received (122SGS407; Y), the player information stored in the RAM 122 and the effect information (the number of fluctuations stored in the RAM 122 since the previous startup of the pachinko game machine 1, the number of jackpots, , information including the number of times of super reach, etc.) is cleared (122SGS408), and the clearing of the information stored in the RAM 102 and the clearing of the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 are also confirmed. RAM clear notification processing for notification (execution of RAM clear notification) is executed (122SGS409). In the RAM clear notification process, the image display on the image display device 5, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, etc. are performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and the pachinko game machine 1 is started. It is only necessary to inform the store clerk or the like of the game parlor that the player information and the performance information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. After the RAM clear notification process is executed, the process proceeds to 122SGS417.

Moreover, when there is no reception of the cold start notification command (122SGS407;N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is reception of the setting value change start notification command (122SGS410). When the setting value change start notification command is received (122SGS410; Y), that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, it is notified that the setting value is being changed (notification during setting value change ) is executed (122SGS411). Incidentally, the state in which the pachinko game machine 1 is activated in the setting change state generally means that the game machine frame 122SG003 is open, and the game parlor clerk or the like who changes the setting value does not operate the main board 11 This is a state in which the display monitor 122SG029 mounted on the is being visually recognized. In other words, the setting change state is a state in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by the store clerk or the like who changes the setting value. It is considered that it is impossible to judge whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state or not from the display of the device 5 . Therefore, as a setting value changing notification, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and light emission of the game effect lamp 9 notify the pachinko machine 1 in the setting change state to the game parlor clerk who changes the setting value. It should be notified that

Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting value change end notification command and the setting value designation command are received, that is, whether or not the setting value of the setting value is completed (122SGS412). When the setting value change end notification command and the setting value designation command are received (122SGS412), the setting value newly set in the pachinko game machine 1 from the received setting value designation command (the setting stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102 value) is specified, and the specified setting value is updated and stored in the RAM 122 as setting value information (a value of "1" to "3" corresponding to the setting value) (122SG413). After executing the processes of 122SGS408 and 122SGS409 described above, the process proceeds to 122SGS417. If at least one of the setting value change end notification command and the setting value designation command is not received (122SGS412; N), the processes of 122SGS411 and 122SGS412 are repeatedly executed.

In the characterizing portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the RAM 122 is cleared after the execution of the set value changing notification, but the present invention is not limited to this. The RAM 122 may be cleared in parallel. If the clearing of the RAM 122 is completed during the execution of the setting value change notification, the RAM clear notification may be executed in parallel with the setting value change notification, or the RAM may be cleared after the setting value change notification is completed. Notification may be performed.

Also, when there is no reception of the setting value change start notification command (122SGS410; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting value confirmation start notification command is received, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state. It is determined whether it has started (122SGS414). If the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (122SGS414; Y), the setting value confirmation in-progress notification process is performed to notify that the setting confirmation state (that the setting value can be confirmed from the display monitor 122SG029) is received. Execute (122SGS415). In addition, in the notification process during setting value confirmation, the display of an image on the image display device 5, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, the output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, etc. are used to activate the pachinko game machine 1, and It suffices if the surroundings of the pachinko game machine 1 can be notified of the setting confirmation state. In addition, if the effect control CPU 120 does not receive the setting value confirmation end notification command (122SGS410; N), it proceeds to the processing of 122SGS405, hot start notification command, cold start notification command, setting value change start notification command, setting It waits until any of the value confirmation start notification commands is received (repeatedly executes the processes of 122SGS405, 122SGS407, 122SGS410, and 122SGS414).

Thus, in the effect control main process in the characterizing part 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. While clearing the number of fluctuations after receiving the input of the player information, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. from the RAM 122, the performance information (the number of fluctuations since the previous startup of the pachinko game machine 1, the number of big hits, number of super reach, etc.) and set value information (one of "1" to "3" corresponding to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1) are not cleared from the RAM 122. Also, when the pachinko game machine 1 is cold-started, the player information and performance information are cleared from the RAM 122, but the set value information is not cleared from the RAM 122. - 特許庁Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the player information and the effect information are not cleared from the RAM 122, while the setting value information is set to the setting value information already stored in the RAM 122. It is designed to be overwritten (updated memory).

That is, in the characterizing portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the information cleared from the RAM 122 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in hot start, cold start, setting confirmation state, or setting change state.

In addition, in the characterizing part 122SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state 2 exemplifies a form in which the player information and the performance information are not cleared, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the game The player information and performance information may be cleared.

Returning to FIG. 9-17, at 122SGS417, the effect control CPU 120 identifies which of the hot start notification command, cold start notification command, setting value change end notification command, and setting value confirmation end notification command has been received, and displays an image. The device 5 starts displaying the initial pattern according to the received command. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-19, if the received command is a hot start notification command, a setting value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a new setting value If it is not set, the image display device 5 starts to display decorative patterns as initial patterns in a combination of "1", "2" and "3" from the left. Also, if the received command is a setting value change end notification command, that is, if there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set in the pachinko game machine 1, the image display device 5 displays the initial symbol " 4”, “5”, and “6” are combined to start displaying the decoration pattern.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 122SG in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value has been set in the pachinko game machine 1, the image display device 5 displays "4", "5" from the left as initial symbols. , "6", but the present invention is not limited to this. When set, a combination of "4", "5", and "6" is used as the initial pattern at a higher rate than when a set value disadvantageous to the player (for example, "3") is set. may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to suggest that the pachinko game machine 1 is set with a set value that is advantageous for the player, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 122SG in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value has been set in the pachinko game machine 1, the image display device 5 displays "4", "5" from the left as initial symbols. , "6", but the present invention is not limited to this. The initial pattern displayed on the image display device 5 may be different depending on whether the set value is set or when a setting value disadvantageous to the player (for example, "3") is set. Also, when a setting value advantageous to the player (for example, "1") is set and when a setting value unfavorable to the player (for example, "3") is set, the speaker 8L, 8R The volume of the sound to be output, the light intensity of the game effect lamp 9, etc. may be varied.

Then, returning to FIG. 9-17, the effect control CPU 120 sets "4" to the prefetch regulation counter in order to regulate the execution of the prefetch advance notice effect in the first 4 fluctuations (122SGS418). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (122SGS419). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in timer interrupt processing. If the timer interrupt flag is set (on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (122SGS420) and executes the following processes.

The effect control CPU 120 first executes start notification processing for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started (122SGS421). In the activation notification process, for example, it is determined whether or not the interruption is the first interruption from the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . If it is the first interrupt from the startup of the pachinko game machine 1, it identifies which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation end notification command is received, It selects the activation notification process table corresponding to the received command and starts the activation notification process timer corresponding to the received command. After starting the start-notifying process timer, the pachinko game machine 1 is started based on the value of the start-notifying process timer and the start-notifying process table by executing start-notifying processing in subsequent interrupts. Notification should be executed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 122SG in the present embodiment, the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is either a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a setting value change end notification command, or a setting value confirmation end notification command. Depending on the presence, the mode of start notification of the pachinko game machine 1 is different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-20, when a hot start notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 receives a new When the set value is not set, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the output sound A is output for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R. The timing for starting light emission of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the timing for starting output of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same. It may be different from the output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Also, when the cold start notification command is received when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, that is, when the new setting value is not set in the pachinko game machine 1 and the data in the RAM 102 is cleared. , the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the output sound B is output for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R. The 60-second emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 and the 30-second emission start timing of the output sound B from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same. The output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

That is, the specific control in the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the speaker 8L, 8R for 30 seconds. When the pachinko game machine 1 is cold-started, the effect control CPU 120 emits light from the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. It includes both executing the output of B.

In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, when the setting value change end notification command is received, that is, when there is a possibility that a new setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game effect Light emission of the lamp 9 for 40 seconds, output of the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and display of a message image for 40 seconds (for example, a message image to the effect that the change of the set value is completed) on the image display device 5. to run. The timing for starting light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the timing for starting outputting the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the timing for starting the display of the message image on the image display device 5 are the same. The emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 may be different.

In particular, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated when the set value change end notification command is received, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated the hot start notification command or the cold start notification command is received. Unlike , since the message image is displayed on the image display device 5 , it is easy to recognize that the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

That is, the special control in the present invention means that when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the effect control CPU 120 emits light from the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds. It means outputting C and displaying a message image for 40 seconds on the image display device 5 .

In addition, as described above, since the light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output start timing of the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image display start timing in the image display device 5 are the same, these pachinko game Regarding the notification mode when the machine 1 is started, the notification period is 60 seconds when the hot start notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is received (when the pachinko machine 1 is started by hot start), and the cold start notification command is received. is received (when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start), the notification period is 60 seconds, and when the setting value change end notification command is received (when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state). The period is 40 seconds.

In addition, in the characterizing part 122SG of the present embodiment, a mode is illustrated in which the activation notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated is executed using the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko machine 1 is provided with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management device such as a management computer of the game hall or a counter for each machine, and the pachinko machine 1 starts up. As an activation notification when the pachinko game machine 1 has been activated, a signal capable of specifying that the pachinko game machine 1 has been activated may be output from the external output terminal to the management device.

In addition, in the characterizing part 122SG of the present embodiment, the device for executing start-up notification is partly common even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in any of hot start, cold start, setting change state, and setting confirmation state. (in any case, light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine 1 is hot. Depending on whether the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state, the device that executes the start notification differs (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start, the image display device 5 , a message image may be displayed, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, a signal may be output from the external output terminal to the management device, etc.).

In addition, depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state, the notification mode in each device that executes start notification may be changed. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start, all the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are made to emit light, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state. In some cases, only some of the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 may be illuminated.

Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the game machine frame 122SG003 is in the open state, so sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (to the pachinko game machine 1). When three or more speakers are provided, only some of the speakers output sound), and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start, the game machine frame 122SG003 is closed. Therefore, sound may be output from all speakers 8L and 8R. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the image display device 5 displays a message image indicating that the setting is being changed, such as "setting changing", while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When the program is started by the start, the image display device 5 may display a message image indicating that the RAM 102 and the RAM 122 have been cleared, such as "RAM has been cleared."

Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a plurality of external output terminals as described above, different terminals may be used to output signals to the management device according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the period until the change of the setting value is completed (until the setting value change end notification command or the setting value designation command is received) is displayed as the setting value changing notification. A signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the setting change over the period), and after the change of the set value is completed, the signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the error or RAM clear as RAM clear notification. When the pachinko game machine 1 is cold-started, it is only necessary to output a signal from a terminal corresponding to an error or RAM clear to the management device as RAM clear notification.

When the external output terminal is commonly used for each notification, the timing of outputting the signal to the management device may be varied according to each notification.

As described above, in the start-up notification process, the form in which the start-up notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 differs according to the received command is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these pachinko gaming machines 1 may be executed in one notification mode regardless of the received command. Further, the start notification of the pachinko game machine 1 is exemplified in a form in which it is executed even when any of the hot start notification command, cold start notification command, setting value confirmation end notification command, and setting value change end notification command is received. However, the present invention is not limited to these commands, and the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value confirmation end notification command, and the setting value change end notification command, even if received, the pachinko machine 1 A command that does not execute activation notification may be provided.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 122SG in the present embodiment, as the initialization effect in the present invention, start notification of different modes is executed according to the command received when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, or the pachinko game machine 1 Although a form in which different combinations of decoration patterns are displayed on the image display device 5 according to the command received when the is activated, the present invention is not limited to this, and these initialization effects are The mode of activation notification and the combination of decoration patterns may all be different according to the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or only some of them may be the same.

Further, in the characterizing portion 122SG in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by hot start, when activated by cold start, when activated by setting change state, when activated by setting confirmation state also exemplifies a mode of executing start notification, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start or when it is started in a setting confirmation state, these start notifications may not be executed.

Returning to FIG. 9-17, the effect control CPU 120 then executes a power-off detection process (122SGS422). In the power-off detection process, as shown in FIG. 9-22, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped below a predetermined value. (122SGS431). If there is no power-off signal input (122SGS431; N), the process is terminated. The included backup data is specified (122SGS432), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (122SGS433). Then, after creating check data to be used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (122SGS434), the system shifts to loop processing in which no processing is executed until the pachinko game machine 1 is powered off.

Returning to FIG. 9-17, the effect control CPU 120 then analyzes the received effect control command and performs processing such as setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: 122SGS423). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the received command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by interrupt processing based on the effect control INT signal and stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM 122 . In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 9-3) is the effect control command saved in the buffer area.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (122SGS424). In the effect control process processing, the display control of the image display device 5 is executed by selecting the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) among the processes corresponding to the control state.

Next, production random number update processing (122SGS425) for updating the count value of the counter for generating production random numbers such as jackpot symbol determination random numbers (122SGS425), player information input processing (122SGS426) for accepting input of player information, game A player information output process (122SGS427) for outputting player information and an effect information totaling process (122SGS428) for totalizing effect information are executed. After that, the process proceeds to S52.

In the player information input process, the effect control CPU 120 generates a password (a password generated by an external server in which the game information of the player is stored in advance) by the player's operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. The player accesses the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone, receives the generated password), and stores player information specified from the password in the RAM 122 . Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big wins, the number of super reach, etc. as the player information stored each time the variation display, the big win game, and the super reach.

In the player information output process, the effect control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by the player's operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, and generates the two-dimensional code. is displayed on the image display device 5 . After displaying the two-dimensional code, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. The player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 with a portable terminal such as a smart phone, and transmits the player information collected in the current game to an external server. 1 can be stored in the server.

In the production information tallying process, the production control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 as information for production each time a variation display, a big hit game, and a super reach are executed. do.

Next, the effect control process processing in the characterizing portion 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-22, in the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the prefetch regulation counter is "0" (122SGS441). If the value of the prefetch regulation counter is "0" (122SGS441; Y), after executing the prefetch advance notice setting process (S161), any one of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) according to the effect control process flag or

In addition, if the value of the prefetch regulation counter is one of "1" to "4" (122SGS441; N), it is further determined whether the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (122SGS442 ). If the value of the effect control process flag is one of "0", "2" to "7" (122SGS442; N), any of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) depending on the effect control process flag When the process is executed and the value of the production control process flag is "1" (122SGS442; Y), the value of the prefetch regulation counter is decremented by 1 (122SGS443), and S170 to S177 ( 7) is executed. By executing the processing of 122SGS441 to 122SGS443 as described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 immediately after starting, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted until the variable display is executed four times.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 122SG in the present embodiment, based on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the effect control CPU120 executes the effect control main process and the effect control process process, four times the fluctuation display However, the present invention is not limited to this, and based on the pachinko game machine 1 being started, the CPU 103 starts the start winning determination process (Fig. 5) is not executed, the execution of the pre-reading forewarning effect may be restricted over four times of variable display.

Further, in the characterizing part 122SG in the present embodiment, regardless of whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started by cold start or started in the setting change state, based on the fact that the game has become possible, As a setting, a mode is exemplified in which the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted over four times of variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and setting is made as to whether the pachinko game machine 1 has been activated by a cold start. Regardless of whether or not the game is started in the changed state, based on the fact that the game is possible, as settings related to the progress of the game, the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light amount of the game effect lamp 9, and the RTC It is also possible to set the production settings, etc., to the state at the time of shipment from the factory.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. A ready-to-reach effect and a ready-to-reach effect of super reach C or super reach D as a second suggestive effect can be executed, and when the ready-to-reach effect of super reach C or super reach D is executed, the super reach C is executed. Since the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach C or the super reach D is notified from the start of the reach effect of the super reach D, the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is obtained. can be improved.

In addition, the present embodiment also includes invention 122SG described below. That is, conventional pachinko gaming machines include those described in JP-A-2016-42880 and JP-A-2010-200902, for example. However, in the gaming machines described in JP-A-2016-42880 and JP-A-2010-200902, when the gaming machine is turned on and started (when power supply to the gaming machine is started) command (control information) output from the main board (game control board) to the performance control board (performance control means) in order to restore the gaming machine based on the memory backed up by the main board (game control board) A command output from the main board to the performance control board for clearing the backed-up memory regardless of the memory backed up by the main board, and a state in which the set values of the game machine can be changed. If the command output from the main board to the effect control board is the same, when the game machine is turned on and activated, the effect control board will be able to make an appropriate command according to the activation state. There was a problem that the processing could not be executed. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of invention 122SG for solving the problem,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, CPU 103 executes setting change processing shown in FIGS. part) and
Game control means (for example, CPU 103 executes process control processing shown in FIG. 5) capable of controlling the progress of the game and executing control to the advantageous state based on the setting value set by the setting means part) and
backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of retaining stored contents for a predetermined period even if power supply to the game machine is stopped;
Control information (for example, production control command shown in FIG. 9-3) output from the game control means production control means (for example, production control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 9-17 RAM clear a part that executes notification processing, notification processing during setting value change, notification processing during setting value confirmation, etc.);
with
After the power supply to the game machine is stopped, the game control means restores a first start-up based on the storage contents stored in the backup storage means as a start-up state when the power supply to the game machine is started. A state (e.g., hot start), a second activation state (e.g., cold start) in which the memory contents are erased and restored regardless of the memory contents stored in the backup storage means, and setting by the setting means is possible. , and outputs different control information corresponding to the activation state to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-14 When the pachinko game machine 1 is hot-started, the CPU 103 transmits a hot-start notification command to the effect control board 12, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is cold-started, the CPU 103 sends the effect control board. 12, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the CPU 103 transmits the setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12)
According to this feature, the effect control means can execute appropriate processing according to the activation state of the game control means when power supply is started. .

Furthermore, as means 2 of invention 122SG,
A production control storage means (for example, RAM 122) capable of storing information used by the production control means,
Depending on whether the activation state corresponding to the control information is the second activation state or the third activation state, information to be erased among the information stored in the performance control storage means is different ( For example, as shown in FIGS. 9-18, the information cleared from the RAM 102 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in hot start, cold start, setting confirmation state, or setting change state)
According to this feature, appropriate erasure can be performed according to the activation state.

Furthermore, as means 3 of invention 122SG,
Said game control means is capable of outputting control information (for example, setting value change end notification command) specifying the end of said third activation state,
The effect control means performs special control according to the termination of the third activation state based on the output of the control information designating the termination of the third activation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20). Thus, based on the reception of the set value change end notification command, the effect control CPU 120 emits light for 40 seconds from the game effect lamp 9 and outputs the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R in the start notification process. Then, a portion for displaying a 40-second message image (for example, a message image indicating that the setting value has been changed) on the image display device 5).
According to this feature, it is possible to recognize that the third activation state in which the set value can be set has ended by the special control.

Furthermore, as means 4 of invention 122SG,
When the control information corresponding to the first activation state or the second activation state is output, the effect control means performs specific control according to the output (for example, as shown in FIGS. Based on the reception of the start notification command and the cold start notification command, the effect control CPU 120 executes the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the start notification process)
According to this feature, it is possible to recognize that the game machine is in an activation state in which setting values cannot be set by specific control.

Furthermore, as means 5 of invention 122SG,
The production control means performs different controls according to the activation state to which the control information corresponds (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20, the production control CPU 120 executes 60 seconds of light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and output of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R in the activation notification process, and based on the reception of the cold start notification command, the effect control CPU 120 60 seconds of light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and output of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R in the start notification process, and based on the reception of the set value change end notification command, the effect control for A portion in which the CPU 120 executes the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output of the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and the message image for 40 seconds on the image display device 5 in the activation notification process. -19, based on the reception of the hot start notification command and the cold start notification command, display the decoration pattern as an initial pattern in a combination of "1", "2", and "3", or display the set value A part that displays decoration patterns as a combination of "4", "5", and "6" as initial patterns based on the reception of the change end notification command)
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize which activation state it is.

Furthermore, as means 6 of Invention 122SG,
When the setting value is changed in the third activation state, the game control means deletes the backup information stored in the backup storage means except for the specific information (for example, modification 122SG-1 As shown in FIG. 9-23, RAM clear processing is executed based on the setting value being changed, and the data after address F001 in RAM 102 except for the setting value data stored at address F000 are cleared. part)
According to this feature, it is possible to erase the backup information appropriately according to the change of the setting value.

Furthermore, as means 7 of Invention 122SG,
Game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing game information used by the game control means to control the progress of the game,
The timing for erasing at least part of the game information stored in the game information storage means differs between the first activation state and the second activation state (for example, as shown in Modification 122SG-4, the timing for erasing at least part of the game information is When the game machine 1 is started with a cold start, the RAM clear processing is executed at the timing before sending the cold start notification command to the effect control board 12, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the setting changed. , A part that executes RAM clear processing at the timing after transmitting the set value change start notification command to the effect control board 12)
According to this feature, game information can be erased at an appropriate timing according to the activation state.

In addition, the present embodiment also includes invention 123SG described below. That is, conventional pachinko gaming machines include those described in JP-A-2016-42880 and JP-A-2010-200902, for example. However, in the gaming machines described in JP-A-2016-42880 and JP-A-2010-200902, when the gaming machine is turned on and started (when power supply to the gaming machine is started) When the main board clears the backed-up memory regardless of the backed-up memory (general activation state), and when the setting value of the game machine is made changeable (setting activation state) If the notification modes are the same, it is not possible to specify whether the gaming machine is in the normal activation state or the set activation state, and it is difficult to detect unauthorized setting changes of the gaming machine. rice field. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of Invention 123SG for solving the problem,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, CPU 103 executes setting change processing shown in FIGS. part) and
Game control means (for example, CPU 103 executes process control processing shown in FIG. 5) capable of controlling the progress of the game and executing control to the advantageous state based on the setting value set by the setting means part) and
backup storage means (for example, RAM 102 or RAM 122) capable of retaining stored contents for a predetermined period even if power supply to the game machine is stopped;
Activation notification means capable of informing the activation state of the game control means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (for example, the part for executing the activation notification process shown in FIG. 9-17 by the effect control CPU 120),
with
The game control means, as the activation state, a general activation state (for example, a state in which the pachinko game machine 1 is activated by hot start) in which the storage contents stored in the backup storage means are cleared and activated, and and a setting activation state (for example, setting change state) in which the setting is valid,
The activation notification means performs the notification in different modes in the general activation state and the setting activation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by cold start, , light emission of the game effect lamp and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, light emission of the game effect lamp, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and image part for executing the display of the message image on the display device 5)
According to this feature, it is possible to easily identify whether the activation state is the general activation state or the setting activation state, so that fraud due to the setting can be easily detected. .

Furthermore, as means 2 of invention 123SG,
The activation notification means can execute various notifications according to the priority,
The priority of notification of the setting activation state is higher than the priority of notification of the general activation state (for example, as shown in modification 122SG-5, during the execution of the setting value change notification with high priority, Part that prevents RAM clear notification with low priority)
According to this feature, since notification of the setting activation state is prioritized, it is possible to prevent fraud due to setting from being undetectable.

Furthermore, as means 3 of invention 123SG,
The activation notification means notifies the setting activation state and the general activation state in different notification periods (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is cold-started, the notification period is 60 seconds, and the pachinko game machine 1 The game machine is characterized in that the notification period is 40 seconds when started in the setting change state), and according to this feature, an appropriate notification can be performed in the period according to the activation state .

Furthermore, as means 4 of invention 123SG,
The activation notification means is
A first notification means (for example, an image display device 5) and a second notification means (for example, a game effect lamp 9 and speakers 8L and 8R) different from the first notification means,
The setting activation state is notified by the first notification means (for example, a portion for displaying a message image on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9-20),
The general activation state is notified by the second notification means (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-20, the part that emits light from the game effect lamp 9 and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R). According to this feature, the activation notification is performed by different notification means, so it is possible to easily recognize which activation state it is.

Furthermore, as means 5 of invention 123SG,
The game control means controls a game based on common settings (for example, Since the CPU 103 does not execute the starting winning judgment processing after the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the part for regulating the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect can be executed until the four times of the variable display. According to this feature, by executing game control with different settings, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as being recognized that the settings have been changed.

In addition, the present embodiment also includes invention 124SG described below. In other words, there is a conventional game machine described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-137351. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-137351, if the game information is unintentionally deleted due to a change in the setting value, the store where the gaming machine is installed or the player may There is a possibility that it may give a disadvantage. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of invention 124SG for solving the problem,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, CPU 103 executes setting change processing shown in FIGS. part) and
Game control means (for example, CPU 103 executes process control processing shown in FIG. 5) capable of controlling the progress of the game and executing control to the advantageous state based on the setting value set by the setting means part) and
game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing game information used by the game control means to control progress of the game;
Notifying means that can notify in advance that the game information stored in the game information storage means is erased (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the set value change confirmation notification process in the modified example 122SG-1) and,
with
The game control means erases at least part of the game information stored in the game information storage means when a new set value is set by the setting means (for example, if the CPU 103 The part that executes the RAM clear processing shown in ),
The predetermined operations include a setting change start operation (for example, turning on the clear switch), a setting change operation (for example, turning on the setting changeover switch 122SG052), and a setting change completion operation (for example, turning off the lock switch 122SG051). operation) and
When the setting change start operation is performed, the setting means can perform the setting change operation (for example, as shown in FIG. After the determination (122SGSa054a; Y), the processing of 122SGSa054d to 122SGSa056 can be executed), and the setting change completion operation is performed after the setting change operation that has become possible, so that the setting change operation is performed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 9-23 as a modification 122SG-1, the CPU 103 determines that the lock switch is OFF (122SGSa057; N) and then executes the processing of 122SGSa058. ),
The notification means executes the notification when the setting change start operation is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-24 as modification 122SG-1, the effect control CPU 120 starts changing the first setting Part that executes set value change confirmation notification processing based on determination that a notification command has been received (122SGS410; Y))
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent game information from being unintentionally erased by changing the set value.

Furthermore, as means 2 of invention 124SG,
If the setting change completion operation is performed without the setting change operation after the setting change start operation is performed, the game control means changes the game information stored in the game information storage means. Do not erase (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-23 as a modification 122SG-1, after the CPU 103 determines that the setting changeover switch is not operated (122SGSa054d; N), it further determines that the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF. If determined, based on the fact that the same set value is stored at address F000 and address F001 of RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; Y), set value change processing is terminated without executing RAM clear processing (122SGSa060). part)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by erasing the game information even though the set value is not changed. be able to.

Furthermore, as means 3 of invention 124SG,
The notification means can notify that the game information is not deleted by the game control means when the predetermined operation is terminated without the setting change completion operation (for example, as a modification 122SG-1 As shown in FIG. 9-25, the part where the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed on the image display device 5 by the effect control CPU 120 executing the setting value change confirmation notification process)
According to this feature, the operator can recognize the operation method for preventing the game information from being erased, so that the game information is not deleted unintentionally. Erasure can be further prevented.

Furthermore, as means 4 of invention 124SG,
The game control means, when the power supply to the game machine is started, the erasing condition is satisfied, and when a predetermined confirmation operation is performed, the game stored in the game information storage means At least part of the information is erased (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-11, the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch is ON in the game control main process (122SGSa003; Y), and then executes the RAM clear process (122SGSa017) part),
The notification means also performs the notification when the deletion condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. part)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent game information from being erased unintentionally.

Furthermore, as means 5 of invention 124SG,
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) capable of controlling production based on control information output from the game control means,
Production control storage means (for example, RAM 122) capable of storing information used by the production control means;
selection means (for example, stick controller 31A or push button 31B) capable of selecting whether or not to execute erasing in the performance control storage means;
with
When the erasing condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, and the selecting means selects not to execute erasing in the performance control storage means, the game information is stored. Erasing at least part of the game information stored in the means (for example, the part that clears only the RAM 102 as shown in Modification 122SG-3), and the erasing condition when power supply to the gaming machine is started is established, and when the selection means selects to execute erasing of the effect control storage means, at least part of the game information stored in the game information storage means is erased. At the same time, at least part of the information stored in the effect control storage means is erased (for example, as shown in modification 122SG-3, the part that clears both RAM 102 and RAM 122).
According to this feature, when the erasing condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not erasure of the performance control storage means is executed along with the erasure of the game information storage means. can be selected.

Although the characteristic portion 122SG in the embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and changes and additions may be made within the scope of the present invention. are included in the present invention.

For example, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-11, when the clear switch is ON when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, after executing the RAM clear process (122SGSa017), the lock switch When 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa018; Y), the setting change process (122SGSa020) is executed, and a new setting value can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is limited to this. If the clear switch is ON when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, it is first determined whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON. RAM clear processing may be executed based on the fact that a new setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1 .

Incidentally, in this way, when the RAM clear processing is executed based on setting a new setting value to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change processing, as shown in FIG. 9-23 as a modification 122SG-1, In the setting change process, the CPU 103 first transmits a first setting value change notification command indicating that the CPU 103 has started execution of the setting change process to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa051). Next, the set value stored at address F000 in RAM 102 is specified (122SGSa052), and the specified set value is displayed on display monitor 122SG029.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON (122SGSa054a), and if the clear switch is OFF (122SGSa054a; N), further determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON ( 122SGSa054b). When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa054b; Y), the processes of 122SGSa054a and 122SGSa054b are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the clear switch is turned ON or the lock switch 122SG051 is turned OFF. In addition, when the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF, a set value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 to end the setting change process (122SGS061).

Further, when the clear switch is ON (122SGSa054a; Y), the CPU 103 issues a second setting value change start notification command indicating that the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed by operating the setting changeover switch 122SG052. It is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa054c), and it is determined whether or not there is an operation of the setting switch 122SG052 (122SGSa054d).

When the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054d; Y), the contents of the address F001 in the RAM 102 are updated (122SGSa055). Specifically, when the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "1", the set value "2", which is one step more advantageous for the player than "1", is set as the provisional set value. When the set value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "2", the set value "3", which is one step more advantageous for the player than "2", is provisionally set. It is stored in address F001 of RAM 102 as a set value. When the setting value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "3", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a provisional setting value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the setting value (temporary setting value) stored at the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa056), and determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057). If the setting changeover switch is not operated in 122SGSa054 (122SGSa054; N), the process of 122SGSa057 is executed without executing the processes of 122SGSa055 and 122SGSa056.

When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 122SGSa054d to 122SGSa056 to store a new provisional setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102, or store the temporary set value in the address F001. A process for displaying the setting values stored in the display monitor 122SG029 is executed.

When the lock switch is OFF at 122SGSa057 (122SGSa057; N), the CPU 103 determines whether or not a set value (temporary set value) is stored at address 001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057a). If the set value (temporary set value) is not stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102, that is, if the lock switch 122SG051 is turned off without the setting changeover switch 122SG052 being operated, a set value change end notification command is produced. It is transmitted to the control board 12 and the setting change processing is terminated (122SGS061).

On the other hand, when a set value (temporary set value) is stored at address 001 of RAM 102 (122SGSa057a; Y), the set value stored at address F000 in RAM 102 and the set value stored at address F001 are (122SGSa057b), and it is determined whether or not the same set value is stored at addresses F000 and F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c). When the same setting value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; Y), that is, when the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 is not changed, the setting value change end notification command is effect-controlled. It is transmitted to the substrate 12 and the setting change processing is terminated (122SGS061).

Also, when different setting values are stored in the addresses F000 and F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; N), that is, when the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 are changed, the setting values are stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102. The setting value is stored in the address F000, that is, the setting value stored in the address F001 is stored as the main setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 (122SGSa058).

Then, a setting value specifying command corresponding to the setting value (the newly set setting value of the pachinko game machine 1) stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa059), and the RAM is cleared. Execute the process (122SGSa060). Note that the RAM clear processing (122SGSa060) executes the same processing as the RAM clear processing described with reference to FIG. data) is cleared. After the RAM clearing process (122SGSa060) is executed, a set value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 to end the setting change process (122SGS061).

FIG. 9-24 is a flow chart showing part of the effect control main process in Modification 122SG-1. In the effect control main process in the modification 122SG-1, effect control CPU120, as shown in FIG. 9-24, when it is determined that there is no reception of the cold start notification command (122SGS407; N), the first set value change It is determined whether or not a start notification command has been received (122SGS410a). If the first setting value change start notification command is not received (122SGS410a; N), proceed to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 9-17), and if the first setting value change start notification command is received (122SGS410a; Y) , a setting value change confirmation notification process is executed (122SGS410b), and the game information stored in the RAM 102 is cleared by changing the setting value on the image display device 5, or a lock is displayed if the setting value is not changed. An instruction to turn off the switch 122SG051 is displayed as a message image 122SG005M1 (see FIG. 9-25(A)).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second set value change start notification command is received (122SGS410c). If the second set value change start notification command is not received (122SGS410C; N), it is further determined whether or not a set value change end notification command is received (122SGS410d). If no setting value change end notification command is received (122SGS410d; N), the processes of 122SGS410b to 122SGS410d are repeatedly executed, and the first setting value change start notification command or setting value change end notification command is waited. Also, if the set value change end notification command is received (122SGS410d; Y), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 9-17).

In addition, when there is a reception of the second setting value change start notification command (122SGS410c; Y), the effect control CPU 120 executes setting value change notification processing for notifying that the setting value is being changed. (122SGS411), it is determined whether or not a setting value change end notification command has been received (122SGS411a). If no setting value change end notification command is received (122SGS411a; N), the processes of 122SG411 and 122SGS411a are repeatedly executed and the process waits until the setting value change end notification command is received. Then, if the set value change end notification command is received (122SGS411a; Y), it is determined whether or not the set value designation command is received (122SGS411b). If no setting value designation command is received (122SGS411b; N), proceed to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 9-17); The setting value newly set in the pachinko game machine 1 (the setting value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102) is specified, and the specified setting value is set as the setting value information (“1” to “3” according to the setting value). value) in the RAM 122 (122SG413). Then proceed to 122SGS 408 (see FIGS. 9-17).

As described above, the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing, and the production control CPU 120 executes the production control main processing, so that the pachinko game machine is operated in a state in which the game arcade clerk or the like turns on the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051. 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 9-25(A), in the image display device 5, by changing the setting value, game information etc. stored in the RAM 102 are cleared, and the setting value is changed. If not, an instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 is displayed as a message image 122SG005M1.

In the state where the message image 122SG005M1 is being displayed on the image display device 5 in this way, when the store clerk or the like of the game hall turns off the lock switch 122SG051, as shown in FIG. , and the RAM 102 is not cleared. On the other hand, in the state where the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed on the image display device 5, when the game parlor clerk turns ON the clear switch again, as shown in FIG. is in the setting change state, and the fact that the setting value is being changed is notified by image display on the image display device 5, light emission of the game effect lamp 9, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the like.

In this setting change state, if the lock switch 122SG051 is turned off without setting a new set value by a store clerk or the like, or if a store clerk or the like turns off the lock switch 122SG051 without setting a new set value, the store clerk or the like sets a new set value that is the same as the original set value. When the setting value is set and the lock switch 122SG051 is turned OFF, the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 is not changed and the RAM 102 is cleared as shown in FIG. 9-25(D). Instead, a combination of "1", "2", and "3" are displayed on the image display device 5 as initial patterns. Furthermore, in the setting change state, when a game arcade clerk or the like sets a new set value (changes the set value) and turns off the lock switch 122SG051, as shown in FIG. is changed, the RAM 102 is cleared, and the decoration patterns are displayed on the image display device 5 as initial patterns in a combination of "4", "5", and "6".

Further, in the modified example 122SG-1, the setting value of the image display device 5 can be changed by activating the pachinko game machine 1 with the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051 turned on by the game hall clerk or the like. , and an instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 if the set value is not to be changed is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1. It is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 9-26 as a modification 122SG-2, an image display is performed by starting the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the clear switch turned on by a game hall clerk or the like. The game information stored in the RAM 102 is cleared by cold-starting the pachinko game machine 1 in the device 5, and the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted when the pachinko game machine 1 is not cold-started. may be displayed as a message image 122SG005M2.

By doing so, for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start when a store clerk or the like of the game parlor accidentally turns on the clear switch while trying to start the pachinko game machine 1 by hot start. It is possible to prevent the game information stored in the RAM 102 from being cleared unintentionally.

Further, in the modification 122SG-1 and the modification 122SG-2, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state or cold start, the message image 122SG005M1 or the message image 122SG005M2 is displayed on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM 102 is cleared by displaying a message image on the image display device 5. Whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state or in the cold start state may be checked, or both of them may be performed.

Further, in the modified example 122SG-1, the setting value of the image display device 5 can be changed by activating the pachinko game machine 1 with the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051 turned on by the game hall clerk or the like. , and an instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 if the set value is not to be changed is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1. It is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 9-27 as a modification 122SG-3, the RAM 102 is cleared based on the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 has been started by cold start or the setting value has been changed. In this case, the image display device 5 indicates that the setting values have been changed and the RAM 102 has been cleared, and whether or not to clear the RAM 122 in response to the setting values being changed and the RAM 102 being cleared. A message image 122SG005M3 including options may be displayed, and a selection as to whether or not to clear the RAM 122 may be accepted by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A.

In addition, when clearing the RAM 122 is selected by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, the effect control CPU 120 executes RAM clearing processing to clear other information except the set value information in the RAM 122 (resultingly Clear both the RAM 102 and the RAM 122 immediately), and if clearing the RAM 122 is not selected by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, the RAM 122 is not cleared (resultingly, only the RAM 102 is cleared).

Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG in the above embodiment, the same timing (cold start notification command or setting Timing before transmitting the value change start notification command), but the present invention is not limited to this, as a modification 122SG-4, for example, pachinko machine 1 When starting with a cold start, RAM clear processing is executed at the timing before sending a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12, and when starting the pachinko game machine 1 in the setting change state, effect control Timing after transmitting the setting value change start notification command to the board 12 (more specifically, after transmitting the setting value change end notification command to the effect control board 12, that is, the change of the setting value is completed The timing for clearing the RAM 102 may be different between when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start and when it is started with a setting change state, such as executing RAM clear processing in later).

Further, in the characterizing portion 122SG in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-17, the RAM 102 and the RAM 122 are always cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start and when it is started with a setting change state. Although the form of executing the RAM clear notification process is exemplified to notify that (execute RAM clear notification), the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 122SG-5, pachinko game In the case of notifying that the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 is being changed by starting the machine 1 in the setting change state (executing the setting value changing notification), each notification such as not executing the RAM clear notification , and when a high-priority notification (e.g., set value changing notification) is being executed, a low-priority notification (e.g., RAM clearing notification) may not be executed.

When a priority is assigned to each notification in this manner, a low-priority notification may be performed after a high-priority notification is performed. In this case, by executing the low-priority notification in a shorter period than when the high-priority notification is not executed, the period for executing the notification is prevented from becoming long. may

Further, in the characterizing portion 122SG in the above embodiment, no setting is executed for the movable body 32 when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started. In some cases, confirmation of whether or not the movable body 32 operates normally may be performed in parallel with the above-described RAM clearing notification, set value changing notification, set value checking notification, and various activation notifications. . Incidentally, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start or cold start, since the start notification is executed for 60 seconds, the confirming operation of the movable body 32 can be executed during the start notification. Also, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the set value is changed in addition to the start notification for 40 seconds. can be performed.

It should be noted that the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 may be executed from the time the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 regardless of the startup mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or may be performed by executing a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, A setting value change start notification command, a setting value change end notification command, a setting value confirmation start notification command, a setting value confirmation end notification command, etc. may be executed from the point of time when the effect control CPU 120 (effect control board 12) receives the command. Furthermore, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 from the time when the setting value change start notification command is received, that is, the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 is executed during the change of the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 In this case, even if an error occurs in the confirmation operation, priority is given to the execution of the setting value changing notification, and the error notification of the confirmation operation may not be executed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 122SG of the embodiment, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, by setting a new setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the new setting value is reflected in the game as it is. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a new setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1 in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 is once restarted (pachinko game A new set value may be reflected in the game by starting the machine 1 by hot start. In addition, when the new setting value is reflected in the game by restarting the pachinko game machine 1 in this way, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, as a confirmation operation of the movable body 32 , the movable body 32 is slightly moved from the origin position toward the performance position, and then the movable body 32 is moved again to the origin position. is restarted, as confirmation operation of the movable body 32, after moving the movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position, the movable body 32 is moved again to the origin position, etc. Confirmation that requires a relatively long period of time. Actions may be performed. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the period required for the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 when the pachinko game machine 1 is started.

Further, in the characterizing part 122SG of the above embodiment, the set value stored at the address F000 is disclosed as specific information that is not cleared from the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, and The specific information that is not specified may include RTC settings, error history, and the like.

Furthermore, in the characterizing portion 122SG of the above embodiment, the RAM 102 stores a setting value as specific information that is not cleared, a provisional setting value as information to be cleared, game information, etc., but the present invention It is not limited to this, for example, two RAMs are provided on the game control microcomputer 100, one RAM stores specific information such as set values that are not cleared, and the other RAM stores temporary set values, game Information to be cleared, such as information, may be stored. By doing so, the RAM of the other side (temporary setting values, game information, etc. are stored) according to whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state. It is possible to differentiate whether or not to clear the RAM). Furthermore, an area for storing specific information that is not cleared and an area for storing information that is cleared may be provided in the RAM 102 .

Also, if two RAMs are provided on the game control microcomputer 100 as described above, the RAM that stores specific information that is not cleared, such as set values, is connected to a SRAM (Static Random Access Memory) connected to a backup battery. On the other hand, by using FeRAM (Ferroelectric Random Access Memory) as the RAM that stores temporary setting values and game information, it is possible to reliably clear data that is more important than other data such as setting values. You may make it possible to memorize without using.

Further, in the characteristic part 122SG of the above embodiment, the clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, but the present invention is not limited to this. can be mounted on the By doing so, since it is not necessary to newly attach a clear switch to the existing power supply board, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko game machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 122SG in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the display monitor 122SG029 for displaying the setting value is mounted on the main board 11 was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main board 11, a display monitor 122SG029 may be provided in the vicinity of the setting changeover switch 122SG052 to facilitate the operation of changing the set values.

Further, in the characterizing part 122SG in the above-described embodiment, the display monitor 122SG029 for displaying the set values is exemplified on the main substrate 11, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game is possible. When the machine 1 can calculate the role product ratio, the continuous role product ratio, etc., the display monitor 122SG029 may display the calculated role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio.

Further, in the characterizing portion 122SG in the above embodiment, a configuration is exemplified in which the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed by providing the display monitor 122SG029 and the setting changeover switch 122SG052 on the main substrate 11. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 may be changed using a monitor (7-segment monitor) or a reset button mounted on the payout control board.

Further, in the characterizing portion 122SG in the embodiment, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the CPU 103 exemplifies a form in which the setting value change start notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. Since the RAM clear processing (122SGSa017) is executed, both the set value change start notification command and the cold start notification command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12.

Further, in the characterizing section 122SG in the above embodiment, the set value 1 is set to the most advantageous set value for the player, and the set value 3 is set to the most unfavorable set value for the player (the set value 1 is set to the most unfavorable setting value for the game hall). setting value 3 is the most advantageous setting value for the game hall), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting value 1 is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player. The set value may be set to 3, and the set value 3 may be set to be the most advantageous set value for the player.

In particular, in the characteristic portion 122SG, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when there is no backup data (122SGSa042; N), by setting "00H" to the address F000, the pachinko machine 1 is automatically set to the set value 1, that is, the pachinko game machine 1 is in the most advantageous state for the player. For this reason, some players illegally set the set value 1 to the pachinko machine 1 by causing the CPU 103 to execute the RAM clearing process (see FIG. 9-13(A)) after causing an abnormality in the RAM 102, etc. is assumed to be set. Therefore, as described above, by setting the set value 1 to be the most disadvantageous set value for the player, the pachinko machine 1 can start the game based on the CPU 103 executing the RAM clear processing when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 or the like. It is possible to prevent the player from becoming in an advantageous state, and the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the embodiment, the lighting period of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the output period, the image Although the form in which whether or not an image is displayed on the display device 5 is different (the control related to notification at startup is different) has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to the above-described control related to notification at the time of start-up, the initial pattern (see FIGS. 9 to 19), background image, character , etc. (differences in the mode of presentation and the state of presentation after the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes ready to play), whether or not to execute the confirmation operation of the movable body 32, It may include control related to the confirmation operation, such as different aspects of the confirmation operation and different execution periods. That is, the special control and the specific control in the present invention, the target to be controlled by the production control CPU120, the control mode of the production control CPU120, the control period of the production control CPU120, etc. may be controlled at least in part. .

Further, in the characterizing portion 122SG in the above embodiment, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but for example, a game can be played by setting a predetermined number of bets per game using game values. can be started, and a variable display result is derived to an image display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of symbols each identifiable, thereby ending one game, and the variable display derived to the image display device It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be awarded depending on the results.

Further, in the characterizing portion 122SG of the above-described embodiment, a message such as "setting change in progress" is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the determination that the effect control CPU 120 has received the setting value change start notification command. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 notifies that the setting change is being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main board 11 (CPU 103) notifies these notifications. In this case, the main board 11 sends a signal that can identify that the setting is being changed to a management device such as an external hall management computer, for example, information It may be notified to an external device by outputting from the terminal board, and further, the main board 11 (CPU 103) may display or light a display or lamp connected to the main board 11. By controlling the state, the fact that the setting is being changed may be recognizably notified from the outside. For example, all the indicators, lamps, etc. connected to the main substrate 11 may be turned on. In order to distinguish between the setting change state and the other state (playable state), it is preferable to cause the indicator, lamp, etc. connected to the main board 11 to emit light in a manner different from that during normal game play. .

In addition, not only when these settings are being changed, but also when the settings are being checked, the main board 11 (CPU 103) outputs a signal to the outside to notify it, or when it is connected to the main board 11 By controlling the display or lighting state of the indicator or lamp that is present, the fact that the settings are being checked may be recognizably notified from the outside.

In this way, the main board 11 (CPU 103) executes the notification, for example, even for models that do not have an image display device 5, for example, models such as drum machines, etc. It can be recognized from the outside that it is inside.

When the main board 11 (CPU 103) executes the notification, a dedicated lamp, LED, or the like may be provided to notify that the setting is being changed or that the setting is being checked. For the purpose of preventing cost increase due to provision of these dedicated lamps, LEDs, etc., the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B connected to the main substrate 11 (CPU 103), normal symbol display The display mode of the device 20 may be changed to a special display mode that is not displayed during a normal game (during variable display, non-variable display (standby), jackpot game, etc.), such as blinking display or a special display pattern (special special display mode). ) may be lit to notify the user.

In addition, when a dedicated lamp or LED is provided, in order to prevent the player from easily recognizing that the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked, these The LED or the like may be provided inside the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, or the normal symbol display device 20.

In the case of notifying both that the setting is being changed and that the setting is being confirmed, these states are notified (notified to the outside) in one notification mode (same output signal). Alternatively, each of these states may be notified (notified to the outside) in individual notification modes (different output signals) so that the state of each state can be specified from the outside.

In addition, when it is possible to notify that the main board 11 (CPU 103) is changing settings or confirming settings by lighting or blinking of a dedicated lamp or LED, the display control unit in the effect control board 12 123 (without waiting for the image display device 5 to start displaying a message such as "setting change in progress"), a dedicated lamp, LED, or the like lights up or flashes immediately to indicate that the setting is being changed. It is possible to notify that there is a setting or that the setting is being checked.

(Description of characteristic portion 141SG in the present embodiment)
Next, the characterizing part 141SG of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 141SG of the present embodiment, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. The left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is formed in a left game area 141SG002L where game balls can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is formed on the game board 2. It is formed in the right game area 141SG002R where balls can flow down.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, corresponding to each of the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game In the decorative design display areas, which are a plurality of variable display portions, for example, three, decorative designs, which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified from each other, are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative symbols is also included in the variable display game.

As an example, in the display area of the image display device 5, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 141SG005L, 141SG005C, and 141SG005R are arranged. Then, in the special symbol game, in response to the start of either the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, Variation of decorative patterns (for example, vertical scroll display) is started in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 141SG005L, 141SG005C and 141SG005R. After that, when the fixed special symbols are stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, in the "left", "middle", and "right" decoration symbol display areas 141SG005L, 141SG005C and 141SG005R of the image display device 5 , the determined decorative pattern (final stop pattern), which is the variable display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped and displayed.

Thus, in the display area of the image display device 5, a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, or a special symbol using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B In synchronism with the drawing game, a variable display of a plurality of identifiable decorative patterns is performed, and the determined decorative pattern resulting from the variable display is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as "derivation"). Incidentally, deriving and displaying various display patterns, such as special patterns and decorative patterns, means stopping display (also called complete stop display or final stop display) of identification information such as decorative patterns to terminate the variable display. . On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols to the derivation display of the determined decorative symbols as the result of the variable display, the variable speed of the decorative symbols becomes "0". The pattern is displayed stationary, and the display may be in a state of, for example, slightly shaking or expanding or contracting. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed definitively, the player can recognize that the scroll display and update display are not progressing the variation of the decoration pattern. becomes. Note that the temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative pattern completely stopped for a period of time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion or contraction.

For example, eight kinds of patterns (alphanumeric characters "1" to "8" or Chinese Numbers, English letters, 8 character images related to a predetermined motif, combinations of numbers, letters or symbols and character images may be used. , symbols such as letters, or any other decorative image representing any figure). A corresponding design number is attached to each of the decorative designs. For example, the symbol numbers "1" to "8" are attached to the alphanumeric characters "1" to "8", respectively. The decorative patterns are not limited to eight types, and may be any number of types (for example, seven types or 9 types, etc.).

After the variable display of decorative patterns is started, until the fixed decorative patterns that are the result of the variable display are derived and displayed, the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative design display areas 141SG005L, 141SG005C and 141SG005R are displayed. , for example, a scroll display is performed such that the symbol numbers are sequentially flowed downward from the smallest to the largest, and when the decorative symbol with the largest symbol number (for example, "8") is displayed, the display is continued. , the decorative pattern with the smallest pattern number (for example, "1") is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative design display areas 141SG005L, 141SG005C, and 141SG005R (for example, the "left" decorative design display area 5L), the design is scrolled from the larger design number to the smaller one, and the design is displayed. When the decorative design with the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design with the largest design number may be displayed subsequently.

A first reserved memory display area 141SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 141SG005U are set at two locations on the left and right of the lower portion of the display area of the image display device 5 . In the first reserved memory display area 141SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 141SG005U, a reserved memory display for identifiably displaying the reserved memory number (special figure reserved memory number) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed.

Here, the suspension of the variable display corresponding to the special game is that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. ) based on starting winnings by That is, although the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing a variable display game such as a special game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, the variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. or the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to a jackpot game state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended when the start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game is not established. done. In this embodiment, the reserved memory display generated based on the starting winning by the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening is a round white display, and the game ball passes (entering) the second starting winning opening ( Similarly, the reserved memory display generated based on the start winning by entering the race is a round white display.

In the following description, the first reserved memory display area 141SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 141SG005U may be referred to as reserved display areas, and the number of reserved memories is the first reserved memory display area 141SG005D and the second reserved memory display. This can be recognized by the number of pending storage indications displayed in area 141SG005U. Furthermore, a display in which the pending storage indications are collected may be referred to as a pending indication.

The suspension display in the first suspension memory display area 141SG005D and the second suspension memory display area 141SG005U is generated based on the start winning by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening, or the second The display mode (for example, display color or shape) may be changed depending on whether the game ball passes (enters) the starting winning hole based on the starting winning. In this embodiment, "execution" and "implementation" are synonymous.

In addition, a small pattern display area 141SG005S including "left", "middle" and "right" small patterns which change in conjunction with the variable display of the decorative patterns is also arranged at the left end of the image display device 5. Incidentally, the small pattern in the characterizing portion 141SG of the present embodiment is smaller than the decorative pattern and is displayed in the lower right portion of the image display device 5, so the pattern has lower visibility and decorativeness than the decorative pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the small pattern may be a pattern with lower visibility or decorativeness than the decorative pattern.

The left game area 141SG002L is a game area in which a game ball that is relatively weakly struck (left-handed) by operating the batted ball operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 141SG002R is the left game area 141SG002L by the operation of the batted ball operation handle 30. This is the game area in which a game ball that is hit harder (right-handed) than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 141SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

In addition, in the left game area 141SG002L, two general winning openings 141SG010A and 141SG010B are arranged, and in the right game area 141SG002R, from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 141SG002R, a passage gate 141SG041 and a variable winning ball A device 141SG006B, a general winning hole 141SG010C, and a special variable winning ball device 141SG007 are arranged in order. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 141SG002L can enter the first start winning opening formed by the general winning openings 141SG010A, 141SG010B and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 141SG002R , the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 141SG006B, the large winning hole formed by the 141SG010C and the special variable winning ball device 141SG007, and can pass through the passage gate 141SG041. In other words, the game ball flowing down the right game area 141SG002R can first pass through the passage gate 141SG041, then the second start winning opening, the general winning opening 141SG010C, and the big winning opening in this order.

As shown in FIG. 10-2, the switch circuit 110 in the present embodiment includes a gate switch 21 for detecting a game ball passing through the passage gate 141SG041, and a game ball entering the first start winning hole. In addition to the first start switch 22A for detecting the second start switch 22B for detecting the game ball that wins the second start prize opening, the second start switch 22B for detecting the game ball that wins the big prize opening 1 count switch 141SG023A, 2nd count switch 141SG023B for detecting the game ball winning the general winning opening 141SG010A, the 3rd counting switch 141SG023C for detecting the game ball winning the general winning opening 141SG010B, the general winning opening 141SG010D A fourth count switch 141SG023D for detecting winning game balls is connected.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 141SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 141SG006B, the general winning hole 141SG010C, and the special variable winning ball device 141SG007. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 141SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening, the general winning opening 141SG010C, and the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 141SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. Winning is not possible in the opening, the general winning opening 141SG010A and the general winning opening 141SG010B.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the player hits the game ball toward the right game area 141SG002R during the jackpot game or the time saving state, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 141SG002R is the second start winning prize. It is possible to win a prize in the mouth, the general prize mouth 141SG010C, and the big prize mouth.

Furthermore, a plurality of obstacle nails 141SGK2 and 141SGK3 are arranged around the normal figure start winning opening 141SG042 in the right game area 141SG002R. That is, in the present embodiment, the number of winning balls into the general winning opening 141SG010C during the big hit game can be adjusted by these obstacle nails 141SGK2 and 141SGK3.

FIG. 10-2(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 10-2(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-2(A), the command 8001H is the first variation start command that designates the start of variation in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variation start command that designates the start of variation in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 141SG005L, 141SG005C and 141SG005R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. Different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which one of a plurality of types should be the jackpot type in the case of a "jackpot".

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-2B, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "loss". The command 8C01H is a second variation display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result that the variation display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A". The command 8C02H is a third variation display result specification command for notifying the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result that the variation display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B". The command 8C03H is a fourth variation display result specification command for notifying the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result that the variation display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable jackpot". The command 8C04H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor win".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that designates stoppage (confirmation) of decoration patterns in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 141SG005L, 141SG005C and 141SG005R of the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while being performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability high base state, time reduction with probability variation state) in which both time saving control and probability variation control are performed.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big winning game or a small winning game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of a big win game or a small win.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the large winning opening and the notification command after opening the large winning opening, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the normal opening jackpot state or the high-speed opening jackpot state (for example, "1" to "16") is set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed through (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 141SG006B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second starting opening winning designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C3XXH is a winning ball number notification command for specifying the number of winning balls to be paid out based on the winning of game balls in each winning hole. Command C401H is a special zone notification command for notifying the start of the special zone, which will be described later, and command C402H is a special zone notification command for notifying the end of the special zone, which will be described later.

FIG. 10-3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 10-3, in the characteristic portion 141SG of the present embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the variation pattern determination Numerical data representing the random number MR3 for the normal figure display result determination and the random number MR4 for determining the result of the display of the general pattern are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown) of the RAM 102, to update various numerical data by software, thereby generating random numbers MR1 to MR1. Numerical data indicating part of MR4 may be counted.

The random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big hit" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is used to determine the type of jackpot when the variable display result is "jackpot" to be one of "probability variable jackpot A", "probability variable jackpot B", and "non-probability variable jackpot". This is the random number used, and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine the variation pattern in the variation display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, for example, "1" to " 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of the display of the normal pattern is used to determine whether the variation display result in the normal pattern display 20 in the game of the normal pattern is to be "win" or "lose the normal pattern". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “997”, for example.

FIG. 10-4 shows variation patterns in the characteristic portion 141SG of this embodiment. In the characteristic part 141SG of the present embodiment, it is a period from after the jackpot game of the probability variable jackpot A to executing 32 times of special figure games (32 times of fluctuation display) in the high probability and high base state, and the fluctuation display result is a big hit, the ratio of the jackpot type to be the probability variable jackpot A is higher than in the non-special zone, or if the change display result is "losing", the variation of the decoration pattern A plurality of fluctuations corresponding to each of the cases where the display mode is "non-reach" and "reach", and corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "big win" or "minor win". A pattern is prepared in advance. In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "losing" and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is referred to as a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), and variation A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is "losing" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach-loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "big hit" is called a "big hit variation pattern".

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern in the non-special zone include a normal reach variation pattern in which normal reach reach effects are performed, and a super reach variation pattern in which super reach reach effects such as super reach α and super reach β are performed. There is In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, ... A normal reach variation pattern may be provided. Also, as for the super reach variation patterns, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ may be provided.

Incidentally, the variation patterns in the present embodiment also include a special winning variation pattern (PE1-1) corresponding to the case where the variation display result is a "minor winning".

As shown in FIG. 10-4, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach production of normal reach is executed in the non-special zone is set shorter than the super reach α and super reach β which are the super reach fluctuation patterns. It is In addition, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed in the present embodiment, the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed However, the special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach α is executed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 141SG of the present embodiment, as described above, in the non-special zone, the variation display result is "big hit" in order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach. Therefore, in the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of the big hit.

Next, regarding the fluctuation pattern in the special zone, when the fluctuation display result is "losing" (PA1-4) and when the fluctuation display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probable variable big hit A" (PC1- 1) and special figure fluctuation time is set to the same (both 3 seconds). In other words, when the probability variable jackpot A occurs in the special zone (when the variation display of 32 times after the probability variable jackpot game ends is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A"), at intervals of 3 seconds While the variable display is repeatedly executed, the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in a short time (three seconds from the start of the variable) in a combination showing the "probability variable jackpot A" without executing the ready-to-win effect or the like on the image display device 5. - 特許庁be.

Furthermore, regarding the variation pattern in the special zone, there are a plurality of variation patterns (shown in Figure 10-5 In the example, 32 variation patterns from PD1-1 to PD1-32 are provided.

Variation patterns PD1-N (N is an integer from 1 to 32) for “probable variable jackpot B” and “non-probable variable jackpot” in these special zones re-variate the temporary stop of the decorative pattern at intervals of 3 seconds from the start of each variation. is executed N times, the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in combination showing ``probable variable big win B'' or ``non-probable variable big win''.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 141SG of the present embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into types of fluctuation patterns, such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc. Instead of first determining and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these variations After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value for determining the pattern type, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 10-5 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM101. In the characteristic part 141SG of the present embodiment, as the special figure display result determination table, the first special figure and the second special figure use a common special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is limited to this Instead of the first special figure and the second special figure, separate special figure display result determination tables may be used.

The special figure display result determination table is a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big win" to the big win game state is determined based on the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result. It is a table where

In the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-5, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "losing".

In the special figure display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination determines whether or not to control the special figure display result to the big hit game state as "big hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the result. In the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-5, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (about 1/300 in this embodiment), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set to "big win" and controlled to the big win game state becomes higher (about 1/30 in this embodiment). ). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability variable state (high probability state), it is determined to control to a big hit game state compared to the normal state or time saving state. Judgment data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so as to increase the probability.

In addition, in the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-5, regardless of whether the game state is a variable probability state, the number of determination values assigned to the "small hit" is the same number. That is, in the characteristic portion 141SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the variation display result is a "jackpot" is higher than the case where the gaming state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). , but the probability that the variable display result will be a "small hit" is the normal state or time-saving state (low probability state) and the probability variable state (high probability state) are set to be the same.

FIG. 10-6 shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in the characteristic portion 141SG of the present embodiment determines the jackpot type based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined to control the special figure display result as "jackpot" to the jackpot gaming state. It is a table referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types. In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which variation display (fluctuation) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second special symbol Depending on whether it is a special game by the symbol display device 4B, the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for judging the type of the big hit is "non-variable big hit", "variable big hit A", or "variable big hit". It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "B" and "non-probable variable jackpot".

Here, the jackpot type in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 10-6 (B). In this embodiment, as the jackpot type, high-precision control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot gaming state ends. There are set a variable probability big hit A and a variable probability big win B that are shifted to a high probability and high base state after being played, and a non-probability variable big hit that only time reduction control is executed and shifted to a low probability and high base state after the end of the big win game state. .

The jackpot game state by the "probability variable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which 16 rounds (so-called 16 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 141SG007 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. On the other hand, the jackpot game state by the "probability variable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 141SG007 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player five times (so-called five rounds), which is repeated. . In addition, the jackpot game state by the "non-probability variable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 141SG007 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. . Therefore, the "variable probability big hit A" may be called a 16 round (16R) variable probability big hit, and the "variable probability big hit B" may be called a 5 round (5R) probability variable big hit. In addition, during the jackpot game of any jackpot type, the variable probability control and the time saving control are not executed.

In addition, although not shown, the small winning game state in the present embodiment changes the special variable winning ball device 141SG007 twice to the first state that is advantageous for the player, and also makes the special variable winning ball device 141SG007 extremely short. Open for a period of time (eg, 0.1 seconds). In addition, after the end of the small winning game, the game state immediately before the small winning game is taken over.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the variable probability big win A and the variable probability big win B are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is the variable probability big win A or the variable probability big win B, the high probability control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state ends, so that the big win game state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called continuous state, which occurs continuously. In particular, in the characteristic portion 141SG of the present embodiment, after the jackpot game of the probability variable jackpot A is completed, until the special drawing game is executed 32 times (variation display of 32 times), or the special drawing of the 32 times is performed. During the game, the special zone is controlled until the result of the variable display becomes a big hit, and after the variable display for 3 seconds during the special zone, there is a case where the big win game of the probability variable big win A is controlled.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state by the "non-probable variable jackpot" is that a predetermined number of special game games (100 times in this embodiment) are executed, or the predetermined number of special game games are executed. It ends by becoming a jackpot game state before is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-6 (A), depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, "variable big hit A", "variable big hit B ', and 'unprobability variable jackpot' are different in the assignment of judgment values to the jackpot types. That is, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") is less than the "variable big hit A" with the number of rounds "variable big hit B "While assigned to the jackpot type of ", when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the judgment value of the number smaller than when the variable special figure is the first special figure is the "probability variable big hit B" jackpot assigned to the type. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable jackpot B" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, the big hit type is ``probable variable big win B'' and the number of rounds is smaller than that of ``probable variable big win A''. It is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of jackpot games with few prize balls and to prevent the decline in the interest in the game.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-6 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probable variation" jackpot type is the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-variable jackpot or a variable jackpot, the probability of a variable jackpot is the same regardless of whether the variable special is the first special or the second special. It is said that

Therefore, as described above, according to the allocation of the determination value for the "probability variable jackpot B", depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, "variable probability big hit A ” also differs depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The case is set to be easier to determine than the case of the first special figure.

In addition, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the determination value may not be assigned to the big hit type of "probability variable big hit B". By doing so, if the variable special figure is the second special figure, the jackpot type will not be determined as "variable big hit B" with a smaller number of lands than "variable big hit A". It is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of a ``variable probability big win B'' jackpot game in which less prize balls are obtained than the jackpot game of the ``variable probability big win A'' to prevent the game interest from being lowered.

In addition, in the characterizing part 141SG of the present embodiment, an example of determining the jackpot type with reference to different table data depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is determined by referring to common table data in the case where the variable special figure is the first special figure and the case where it is the second special figure. You may do so.

The RAM 102 in the characterizing portion 141SG of the present embodiment is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. ing. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure reservation storage unit, a second special figure reservation storage unit, a general figure reservation storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter A setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit are provided.

The first special figure reservation storage unit is a special figure that has not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A and the start prize (first start prize) is generated. It stores the pending data of the game (special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the establishment of the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on is reserved data. , until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game ) to make it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball has passed (entered) the second start prize opening formed by the variable prize ball device 141SG006B and the start prize (second start prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the establishment of the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on is reserved data. , until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game ) to make it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In addition, reservation information (first reservation information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The general pattern holding storage unit stores the holding information of the general pattern game which has not yet been started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 141SG041 is detected by the gate switch 21, and the normal pattern start. Hold information of a normal pattern game which is not yet started by a normal pattern display device 20 even though a game ball winning a winning opening 141SG042 is detected by a normal pattern start opening switch 141SG024 is stored. For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order in which the game ball passed (winning) the passage gate 141SG041 and the general pattern start winning opening 141SG042, and the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for judging the results of the normal pattern display extracted from is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting section. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update the game numbers by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random numbers MR2 to MR4 are stored as random count values, and periodically according to the execution of software by the CPU 103 Numerical data indicating each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characterizing portion 141SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 10-7 is a flow chart showing an example of game control timer interrupt processing in the characterizing part 141SG of the present embodiment. In the game control timer interrupt process, the CPU 103 executes the switch process (S21) and the main side error process (S22), and then executes the prize ball process (141SGS22a) for paying out the prize balls. In the prize ball process, the CPU 103 switches the first start switch 22A, the second start switch 22B, the first count switch 141SG023A, the second count switch 141SG023B, the third count switch 141SG023C, and the fourth count switch 141SG023D in the switch process. Among them, prize balls are paid out according to the switch that has received the detection signal, and transmission setting of the prize ball number notification command according to the number of prize balls paid out is performed. After that, the aforementioned information output process (S23), game random number update process (S24), special symbol process process (S25), normal symbol process process (S26), and command control process (S27) may be executed.

FIG. 10-8 is a flow chart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first refers to a value set in a special zone counter, which will be described later, and determines whether or not the vehicle is in the special zone (141SGS161). If it is not in the special zone (141SGS161; N), proceed to 13SGS168, and if it is in the special zone (141SGS161:Y), it is further determined whether or not the jackpot flag is set (141SGS162). When the jackpot flag is not set (141SGS162; N), the process proceeds to 141SGS166, and when the jackpot flag is set (141SGS162; Y), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type of the jackpot is variable probability jackpot A. (141 SGS163).

When the jackpot type of the relevant jackpot is the variable probability jackpot A (141SGS163; Y), select the variation pattern determination table for the variable probability jackpot A in the special zone, proceed to 141SGS180 (141SGS164), and the jackpot type of the jackpot is the variable probability jackpot B. Or if it is a non-probability variable big hit (141SGS163; N), select the special zone medium-probability variable big hit B/non-probability variable big hit variation pattern determination table according to the value of the special zone counter, and proceed to 141SGS180 (141SGS165).

Also, when the big hit flag is not set in 141SGS162 (141SGS162; N), it is further determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (141SGS166). When the small hit flag is not set (141SGS166; N), select the fluctuation pattern determination table for losing in the special zone and proceed to 141SGS180 (141SGS167), and when the small hit flag is set, proceed to 141SGS171. .

On the other hand, when it is not in the special zone at 141SGS161, that is, when "0" is set in the special zone counter (141SGS161; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is set (141SGS168). If the jackpot flag is set (141SGS168; Y), select the variation pattern determination table for the jackpot in the non-special zone and proceed to 141SGS180 (141SGS169), and if the jackpot flag is not set (141SGS168; N) , determines whether or not the small hit flag is set (141SGS170). If the small hit flag is set (141SGS170; Y), proceed to 141SGS171. Then, in 141SGS171, the small hit variation pattern determination table is selected and the process proceeds to 141SGS180.

Also, when the small hit flag is not set in 141SGS170 (141SGS170; N), it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set (141SGS172). If the time saving flag is set (141SGS172; Y), select the change pattern determination table D for loss described later and proceed to 141SGS180 (141SGS173), If the time saving flag is not set (141SGS172; N), It is determined whether or not the total pending storage number is 2 or more (141SGS174). If the total number of pending memories is 1 or less (141SGS174; N), select the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss described later and proceed to 141SGS180 (141SGS175), If the total number of pending memories is 2 or more ( 141SGS174; Y) further determines whether or not the total pending storage number is 5 or more (141SGS176).

If the total number of pending memories is 4 or less (141SGS176; N), select the fluctuation pattern determination table B for losing (described later) and proceed to 141SGS180 (141SGS177), If the total number of pending memories is 5 or more ( 141SGS176; Y) selects a change pattern determination table C for failure, which will be described later, and proceeds to 141SGS180.

Then, in the 141SGS180, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern stored in the random number buffer for variation, etc., by referring to the selected variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern is divided into a plurality of types. Either is determined (S170).

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss in the non-special zone (PA2-1), the super in the non-special zone Reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), Super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-3) in the non-special zone Predetermined random within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take Numerical values are assigned as judgment values. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss B, the fluctuation pattern of the shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of reserved memories (PA1-2) corresponding to 2 to 4, the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach loss in the non-special zone (PA2 -1), variation pattern for super reach α loss in non-special zone (PA2-2), variation pattern for super reach β loss in non-special zone (PA2-3) Random for variation pattern judgment A predetermined random number within the range that the numerical value MR3 can take is assigned as a determination value. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss C, the fluctuation pattern of the shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of reserved memories (PA1-3) corresponding to 5 to 8, the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach loss in the non-special zone (PA2 -1), variation pattern for super reach α loss in non-special zone (PA2-2), variation pattern for super reach β loss in non-special zone (PA2-3) Random for variation pattern judgment A predetermined random number within the range that the numerical value MR3 can take is assigned as a determination value. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss D, the fluctuation pattern (PA1-4) of the shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the time saving control (during the high base including the special zone), the fluctuation of the normal reach loss in the non-special zone Variation pattern judgment for pattern (PA2-1), variation pattern of super reach α loss in non-special zone (PA2-2), variation pattern of super reach β loss in non-special zone (PA2-3) A predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for is possible is assigned as a judgment value.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-4, the fluctuation time of the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the fluctuation pattern (PA1 The fluctuation time of the non-reach-losing fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) is shorter than that of -2). Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, a non-reach-losing variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, making it easier to digest the retained memories, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit of 4. Occasionally winning a starting prize makes it difficult to generate useless starting prizes that are not stored in pending memory, and when the number of pending memories is reduced, a non-reach-losing fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time and no reduction ( By determining PA1-1), the time for the variable display is lengthened, and thus it is possible to prevent the loss of interest in the game due to the non-execution of the variable display.

In addition, in the non-special zone middle jackpot variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot in the non-special zone (PB1-1), the variation pattern of the super reach α jackpot in the non-special zone (PB1-2) , a predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot in the non-special zone.

In addition, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, all random values within the range that the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination can take for the special hit (small hit) variation pattern PE1-1 are assigned as determination values It is

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for the probability variable jackpot A in the special zone, all random values within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the variation pattern (PC1-1) of the jackpot in the special zone Numerical values are assigned as judgment values. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for losing in the special zone, the fluctuation pattern for determining the variation pattern for the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4) corresponding to the time saving control (during the high base including the special zone) All random values within the range that the value MR3 can take are assigned as judgment values.

Then, in the variation pattern determination table for the probability variable jackpot B/non-probability variable jackpot in each special zone, as shown in FIG. Among them, all the random numbers within the range that the random number MR3 for judging the fluctuation pattern can take for one fluctuation pattern corresponding to the number of fluctuations in the special zone (the value of the special zone counter) are assigned as judgment values. there is

In other words, when the value of the special zone counter is "32" (the first fluctuation in the special zone), the pseudo continuous performance is executed 32 times in the variation pattern determination table for the probability variable big hit B/non-probability variable big win in the special zone. All random numbers within the possible range of the random number MR3 for judging the fluctuation pattern are assigned as judgment values to the fluctuation pattern (PD1-32) of the big hit, and the value of the special zone counter is "31". (Second fluctuation in special zone) In the variation pattern determination table for the special zone probability variable jackpot B/non-probability variable jackpot, variation for the jackpot variation pattern (PD1-31) that executes the pseudo-continuous effect 31 times A special zone where all random numbers within the possible range of the random number MR3 for pattern judgment are assigned as judgment values, and the value of the special zone counter is "30" (the third fluctuation in the special zone). In the medium-probability variable jackpot B/non-probability variable jackpot variation pattern determination table, the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take the variation pattern (PD1-30) of the jackpot that executes the pseudo-continuous effect 30 times. All random numbers are assigned as judgment values... When the value of the special zone counter is "1" (the 32nd fluctuation in the special zone), the variation pattern for the probability variable jackpot B and non-probability variable jackpot in the special zone In the judgment table, all the random numbers within the possible range of the random number MR3 for judging the fluctuation pattern are assigned as judgment values to the big hit fluctuation pattern (PD1-1) that executes the pseudo-continuous effect once. there is

Therefore, in the first variable display in the special zone, when the result of the variable display is a big hit and the type of the big win is the definite variable big win B or the non-definite variable big win, the image display device 5 executes 32 times of pseudo-continuous performance. Afterwards, when the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a variable probability big hit B or a non-variable big win, and in the second variation display in the special zone, the result of the variation display is a big win and the type of the big win is a variable probability big win B or a non-variable big win. After 31 pseudo-continuous performances are executed on the image display device 5, the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a probability variable big hit B or a non-probable variable big win, and in the third variable display in the special zone, the variable display result is a big win. In addition, when the jackpot type is the variable probability big hit B or the non-variable big win, the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in combination showing the variable probability big win B or the non-variable big win after 30 times of simulated consecutive effects are executed in the image display device 5. . . . In the 32nd variable display in the special zone, when the variable display result is a big hit and the type of the big win is a definite variable jackpot B or a non-definite variable jackpot, the image display device 5 executes one pseudo-continuous effect. Afterwards, the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in combination showing the probability variable big hit B and the non-probability variable big hit.

As described above, in the characterizing portion 141SG of the present embodiment, when determining the variation pattern in the variation display in the low-probability base state of the gaming state, the variation pattern determination table for the non-special zone big hit, the small hit Variation pattern determination table for loss, variation pattern determination table A for loss, variation pattern determination table B for loss, or variation pattern determination table C for loss is selected to determine a variation pattern.

In addition, in the high-probability high base state after the jackpot game of the probability variable jackpot A, when the fluctuation pattern is determined in the 1st to 32nd fluctuation display (in the special zone) after the jackpot game is finished, the probability variable jackpot in the special zone Select the variation pattern determination table for A, the variation pattern determination table for the probability variable jackpot B/non-probability variable jackpot in the special zone according to the value of the special zone counter, the variation pattern determination table for the small hit, and the variation pattern determination table for the loss in the special zone to determine the variation pattern, and when determining the variation pattern in the 33rd or later variation display (in the non-special zone) after the end of the big win game, the variation pattern determination table for the big win in the non-special zone, the variation pattern for the small win A variation pattern is determined by selecting either the determination table or the variation pattern determination table D for loss.

Also, when determining the variation pattern in the high probability high base state after the jackpot game of the probability variable jackpot B or the low probability height base state after the jackpot game of the non-probability variable jackpot is completed, the variation pattern determination table for the non-special zone medium jackpot , a variation pattern determination table for small hits, or a variation pattern determination table for loss D is selected to determine a variation pattern.

That is, in the high base state in the characteristic portion 141SG4 of the present embodiment, the variation pattern determination table that can be selected for determining the variation pattern according to the jackpot type of the jackpot game that triggered the high base state is may differ.

In addition, in the 1st to 32nd fluctuation display (in the special zone) after the end of the jackpot game of the variable probability jackpot A in the characteristic part 141SG4 of the present embodiment, as shown in the processing of 141SGS164, the value of the special zone counter The variation pattern determination table is switched accordingly, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the processing of 141SGS164 after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A, the variation pattern determination table may be switched according to the value of the counter.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 141SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result in the variation display in the special zone is a big hit and the jackpot type is a definite variable big hit B or a non-definite variable big hit, in the variation display, the variation in the special zone Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed a different number of times according to the number of times of display, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display varies within a predetermined range in the special zone. When the display result is a big hit and the type of the big win is a probability variable big hit B or a non-probable variable big win, a specific number of pseudo-continuous effects are always executed in the variable display (for example, the variable display in the first variable display in the special zone). When the result is a big hit and the type of the big hit is a definite variable jackpot B or a non-definite variable jackpot, 32 pseudo consecutive effects are executed in the variable display, and the variable display result is displayed in the 2nd to 11th variable displays in the special zone. When the jackpot and the jackpot type are the probability variable jackpot B or the non-probability variable jackpot, 31 times of pseudo continuous performance is executed, and in the 12th to 21st fluctuation display in the special zone, the variation display result is a jackpot and the jackpot type is a probability change. In the case of a big hit B or a non-probable variable big win, a pseudo-continuous effect is executed 20 times, etc.), and the data capacity for the pseudo-continuous effect stored in the RAM 122 may be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 10-8, after determining the variation pattern at 141SGS180, according to the variation special symbol designation buffer value, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, the second To start any of the special symbol games using the second special symbol in the special symbol display device 4B, the setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed (141SGS181). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the setting for transmitting the drive signal to update the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

Following the processing of 141SGS181, settings are made for transmitting various commands to be used at the start of fluctuation of special symbols (141SGS182). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103, from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the game state designation command, the first fluctuation start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the fluctuation display result In order to sequentially transmit the specified command and the first pending storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address (top address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is set to the game control buffer setting unit Store in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the provided send command buffer. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends the game state designation command, the second fluctuation start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, and the fluctuation display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the specified command and the second pending storage count notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. buffer area.

After executing the processing of 141SGS182, the special figure fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation display time of the special symbol corresponding to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, is set (141SGS183). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the special symbol variation in the special symbol game to the derivation display of the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result (special symbol display result). is. Thereafter, after updating the value of the special figure process flag to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (141SGS184), the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

FIG. 10-10 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S113 of FIG. 5 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation process of S113 to end the variation of the special symbol, and stops the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. Control for deriving and displaying the pattern is performed (141SGS201). In addition, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special figure, the fluctuation of the first special design in the first special design display device 4A is ended, and the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is If it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is terminated. In addition, the control which transmits the design decision command to production control board 12 is done (141SGS202). Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is set (141SGS203), and when the big hit flag is not set (141SGS203; N), the process proceeds to 141SGS211.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is set (141SGS203; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag if the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set (141SGS204), and the effect control board 12 , to transmit any of the winning start 1 designation command (probability variable jackpot A), the winning start 2 designation command (probability variable jackpot B), and the winning start 3 designation command (non-probability variable jackpot) according to the type of the stored jackpot. is set (141SGS205).

Furthermore, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a game state specifying command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (141SGS206).

Then, a value corresponding to the big win display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of the big win in the image display device 5) is set in the big win display time timer (141SGS207). Also, the number of opening times (for example, 16 times in the case of variable probability big win A, 5 times in the case of variable probability big win B or non-variable big win) is set in the counter for the number of times of opening big winning openings (141SGS208). Then, after performing setting for outputting a symbol determination signal indicating that the variable display of the special symbols has stopped toward the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 (141SGS209), the value of the special symbol process flag is changed to the jackpot opening pre-processing. It is updated to "4" which is the value corresponding to (S114), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated (141SGS210).

On the other hand, in 141SGS211, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time saving number counter is "0". When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (141SGS211; Y), the process proceeds to 141SGS216.

On the other hand, if the value of the time saving number counter is not "0" (141SGS211; N), that is, if it is in a high base state in which the number of time saving times remains, the value of the time saving number counter is decremented by -1 (141SGS212). . Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving number counter after subtraction is "0" (141SGS213), and if it is not "0" (141SGS213; N), the process proceeds to 141SGS216, and the value of the time saving number counter is "0" In the case of (141SGS213; Y), in order to end the time saving control, after clearing the time saving flag (141SGS214), the game state corresponding to the set state of the probability variable flag or the time saving flag (specifically low probability (141SGS215), the process proceeds to 141SGS216.

At 141SGS 216, it is determined whether or not the value of the special zone counter is "0". If the value of the special zone counter is any of 1 to 32 (141SGS216; N), the value of the special zone counter is decremented by -1 (141SGS217). Then, it is determined whether the value of the special zone counter after subtraction is "0" (141SGS218), and if the value of the special zone counter after subtraction is "0" (141SGS218; Y), the special zone After setting the transmission of the end notification command, the process proceeds to 141SGS220 (141SGS219). If the value of the special zone counter after subtraction is not "0" (141SGS218; N), proceed to 141SGS220 without executing 141SGS219.

At 141SGS220, the CPU 103 sets for outputting a symbol determination signal indicating that the variable display of the special symbols has stopped to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (141SGS220), and then proceeds to 141SGS22. In addition, when the value of the special zone counter is "0" at 141SGS216 (141SGS216; Y), a pattern confirmation signal indicating that the variable display of the special symbols has stopped is output to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1. (141SGS220), proceed to 141SGS22.

At 141SGS222, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is set (141SGS222). When the small hit flag is set (141SGS222; Y), the setting for transmitting the hit start 4 designation command (small hit) is performed (141SGS223). Then, a value corresponding to the small win display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of the small win in the image display device 5) is set in the small win display time timer (141SGS224). In addition, the number of opening times (for example, two times) is set in the counter for the number of opening times of the big winning opening (141SGS225). The value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8", which is the value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (S118), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated (141SGS226).

In addition, when the small hit flag is not set in 141SGS222 (141SGS22; N), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0" corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S110), and the special symbol is stopped. Processing ends (141SGS228).

FIG. 10-11 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 5 as the jackpot ending process.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is in operation, that is, the timer is counting (141SGS231). When the jackpot end display timer is not in operation (141SGS231; N), a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (jackpot end display time) for performing the jackpot end display on the image display device 5 is set to the jackpot end display timer. Set (141SGS232), and end the jackpot ending process.

On the other hand, when the jackpot end display timer is in operation (141SGS231; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (141SGS233). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big-hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big-hit end display time has elapsed (141SGS234). If it has not passed (141SGS234; N), the jackpot ending process is terminated.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (141SGS234; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is variable probability jackpot A or variable probability jackpot B (141SGS235).

If the jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B (141SGS235; Y), the probability variable flag is set (141SGS238), the time saving flag is set (141SGS239), and the time saving counter is set to "0" ( 141 SGS240). Further, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is the variable probability jackpot A (141SGS241). When the jackpot type is the variable probability big hit B (141SGS241; N), proceed to 141SGS244, and when the jackpot type is the variable probability jackpot A (141SGS241; Y), set "32" to the special zone counter (141SGS242). , the transmission setting of the special zone start notification command is performed, and the process proceeds to 141SGS244 (133SGS243).

On the other hand, in 141SGS235, when the jackpot type is non-probability variable jackpot (141SGS235; Y; N), the time saving flag is set and the time saving number counter is set to "100", and then the process proceeds to 141SGS244 (141SGS236, 141SGS237).

Then, in 141SGS244, the jackpot flag is cleared, and transmission setting of a jackpot end designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is performed (141SGS245). Then, after performing the transmission setting of the game state designation command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the set probability variation flag and the time saving flag (141SGS246), the value of the special figure process flag is processed in special symbol normal processing. is updated to "0" which is the value corresponding to , and the jackpot ending process is terminated (141SGS247).

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 10-12 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S75 of FIG. 6 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 10-12, the effect control CPU 120 first receives data from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by checking the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is a command (141SGS251). At this time, if there is no received command (141SGS251;N), the command analysis process is terminated.

If there is a received command at 141SGS251 (141SGS151; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first start winning designation command (141SGS252 ). Then, when it is the first start opening winning designation command (141SGS252; Y), the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (141SGS253). For example, in the process of 141SGS253, the timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command is provided in the effect control timer setting unit provided in the RAM122 or the like command reception control A timer should be set.

If the received command is not the first start winning designation command at 141SGS252 (141SGS252; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second starting winning designation command (141SGS254). Then, when it is the second start opening winning designation command (141SGS254; Y), the second reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (141SGS255). For example, in the process of 141SGS255, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the waiting time for receiving the second pending storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer provided in the RAM 122 or the like.

At 141SGS254, if the received command is not the second starting entry winning designation command (141SGS254; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first pending storage number notification command (141SGS256). When it is the first reserved storage number notification command (141SGS256; Y), for example, by initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer provided in the RAM 122 or the like, the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is set. Clear (141SGS257).

If at 141SGS256 the received command is not the first pending storage number notification command (141SGS256; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second pending storage number notification command (141SGS258). When it is the second pending storage number notification command (141SGS258; Y), the second pending storage number notification wait time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation of the command reception control timer (141SGS259).

After executing any one of the processes of 141SGS253, 141SGS255, 141SGS257, and 141SGS259, the received command is stored in the start winning command buffer provided in the RAM 122 or the like, and the process proceeds to 141SGS251.

On the other hand, if the received command is not the second reserved storage number notification command at 141SGS258 (141SGS258; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the special zone start notification command (141SGS260). If the received command is a special zone start notification command (141SGS260; Y), a flag indicating that the special zone is in effect is set, and the first reserved memory display area displayed on the image display device 5 is set. Hide 141SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 141SG005U (141SGS261, 141SGS262), and proceed to 141SGS251.

If the received command is not a special zone start notification command at 141SGS260 (141SGS260; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a special zone end notification command (141SGS264). If the received command is the special zone end notification command (141SGS264; Y), the special zone flag is cleared and the special zone end flag indicating the end of the special zone is set (141SGS265, 141SGS267). Also, the display of the first reserved memory display area 141SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 141SG005U on the image display device 5 is started, and the process proceeds to 141SGS251 (141SGS268).

If the received command at 141SGS264 is not a special zone end command (141SGS264;N), the setting corresponding to the received command is performed and the process proceeds to 141SGS251 (141SGS271).

FIG. 10-13 is a flow chart showing part of the effect control process (S75) in the effect control main process. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 executes the pre-reading notice setting process (S161), and then updates the reserved memory display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 141SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 141SG005U. Reservation display update processing (141SGS281) to display the number of awarded balls displayed on the image display device 5 (141SGS282), and that the game ball has entered one of the winning openings A winning notification effect execution process (141SGS283) for executing a winning notification effect that notifies the After executing the number-of-balls notification effect execution process (141SGS284) for executing the number-of-balls notification effect, one of the processes of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) is executed.

10-14 to 10-17 are flow charts showing the number of prize balls display processing (141SGS282) in the effect control process processing. In the number-of-price-balls display process, the effect control CPU 120 first operates an addition effect process timer (at least one of a first addition effect process timer and a second addition effect process timer) to be described later. (141SGS300). If the process timer for addition effects is not in operation (141SGS300; N), it is determined whether or not the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball number counter is being displayed on the image display device 5 (141SGS301). As shown in FIG. 10-18(A), the first prize ball number counter in the present embodiment counts the number of all prize balls in the continuous game It is a counter for totalizing the number of prize balls paid out by the player in the range of 0 to 99999.

When the value 141SG005A of the first winning ball number counter is not displayed on the image display device 5 (141SGS301; N), whether or not the value of the production process flag is "6", that is, the jackpot game is in progress. (141SGS302). When the value of the production process flag is any one of ``0'' to ``5'' and ``7'' (141SGS302;N), the processing for displaying the number of winning balls is terminated, and when the value of the production process flag is ``6'' (141SGS302; Y) determines whether or not the jackpot type is variable probability jackpot A (141SGS303). If the jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot A (141SGS303; Y), display of the values 141SG005B of the first prize ball counter and the second prize ball counter in the image display device 5 is started, and the prize ball number display processing is terminated. (141SGS304). In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-18(A), the second prize ball number counter indicates the number of prize balls paid out during the jackpot game of the probability variable jackpot A 0 to This is a counter for counting within the range of 9999.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is not the probability variable jackpot A (141SGS303; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot B (141SGS305). When the jackpot type is variable probability jackpot B (141SGS305; Y), the display of the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter on the image display device 5 is started, and the prize ball number display processing is terminated (141SGS306). In addition, when the jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot (141SGS305; N), the first prize ball counter value 141SG005A or the first prize ball counter value 141SG005A in the image display device 5 is displayed without starting the prize. Terminate the number-of-balls display process.

Further, when the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter is being displayed in 141SGS301 (141SGS301; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the value of the effect process flag is "6" or "7". In other words, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game of the variable probability jackpot is in progress (141SGS307). If the value of the effect process flag is "6" or "7" (141SGS307; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the prize ball number notification command reception flag is set, that is, whether the prize ball number notification command is received (141SGS308). If the number of prize balls notification command reception flag is not set (141SGS308; N), the number of prize balls display processing is terminated, and if the number of prize balls notification command reception flag is set (141SGS308; move on.

In 141SGS307, when the value of the production process flag is one of "0" to "5" (141SGS307; N), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special zone flag is set (141SGS309). . If the special zone flag is set (141SGS309; Y), the processing of 141SGS308 described above is executed, and if the special zone flag is not set (141SGS309; N), the game state is specified (141SGS310 ). Then, it is determined whether or not the gaming state specified in 141SGS310 is the high base state (141SGS311).

If the gaming state is the high base state (141SGS311; Y), it is determined whether or not the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter is being displayed on the image display device 5 (141SGS312). When the image display device 5 is displaying the value 141SG005B of the second winning ball counter (141SGS312; Y), the display of the second winning ball counter value 141SG005B on the image display device 5 is terminated, and 2 Reset the value 141SG005B of the number-of-balls counter to "0" and proceed to 141SGS308 (141SGS313, 141SGS314). In other words, in the characterizing part 141SG of the present embodiment, at the timing when the special zone ends, the tallying of the prize balls in the second prize ball counter is finished, and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter in the image display device 5 is displayed. display is terminated. If the image display device 5 is not displaying the value 141SG005B of the second winning ball counter (141SGS312; N), the process proceeds to 141SGS308 without executing the processes of 141SGS313 and 141SGS314.

That is, as shown in FIG. 10-18(C), the second prize ball number counter in the characterizing portion 141SG of the present embodiment starts tallying the prize balls from the start timing of the big hit game of the probability variable jackpot A, and the special zone If the game state is controlled to the big hit game state of the probability variable big hit during, while continuing to tally the prize balls as it is, when the special zone ends (32 times of fluctuation display after the big hit game of the probability variable big hit A When it ends), it is a counter that ends the tallying of prize balls.

In addition, when the game state is not the high base state in 141SGS311 (141SGS311; N), that is, when the game state becomes the low probability low base state based on the end of 100 times of fluctuation display after the end of the jackpot game of the non-probability variable jackpot. ends the display of the first winning ball counter value 141SG005A on the image display device 5, resets the first winning ball counter value 141SG005A to "0", and ends the winning ball number display processing (141SGS315, 141 SGS316). That is, as shown in FIG. 10-18(B), the first winning ball number counter in the characterizing portion 141SG of the present embodiment is, as shown in FIG. This is a counter that tallies the number of prize balls until the end timing of 100 times of variable display.

At 141SGS317, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the number of prize balls from the received number of prize ball notification command (141SGS317). Then, the current first prize ball counter value 141SG005A is stored as the pre-addition first prize ball counter value (141SGS318), and the current first prize ball counter value 141SG005A reaches the upper limit value (99999). (141SGS319). If the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter has not reached the upper limit (141SGS319; N), the specified number of prize balls is added to the first prize ball counter (141SGS320), and the process proceeds to 141SGS321. Also, when the value 141SG005A of the first prize number counter has reached the upper limit (141SGS319; Y), the process proceeds to 141SGS321 without executing 141SGS320.

In addition, in the processing of 141SGS320, when the result of adding the specified number of prize balls to the first prize ball counter exceeds the upper limit value (99999) of the first prize ball counter, the value of the first prize ball counter is 141SG005A. is updated to the upper limit value of the first winning ball number counter.

At 141SGS321, the effect control CPU 120 compares the pre-addition first prize ball counter value stored at 141SGS318 with the first prize ball counter value 141SG005A. It is specified whether or not it has occurred (141SGS321), and it is determined whether or not there is the carry-over (141SGS322). If there is no carry-over (141SGS322; N), select the first addition effect process table for no carry-over (141SGS323), and proceed to 141SGS325. If there is a carry-over (141SGS322; Y), select the process table for the first addition effect corresponding to the number of digits of the carry-over (141SGS324), and proceed to 141SGS325.

At 141SGS325, the effect control CPU 120 starts the first addition effect process timer in the process data 1 of the selected first addition effect process table (141SGS325). In addition, in the characterizing part 141SG of the present embodiment, the first addition effect process table corresponding to all the first addition effects corresponding to the presence or absence of the carry and the number of digits of the carry is stored in the ROM 121 in advance. .

And the effect control CPU 120 is the effect device (effect The control of the image display device 5 as a component, the game effect lamp 9 as a component for performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R as components for performance is started, and the first display device 5 displayed on the image display device 5 as a first addition effect The update of the prize ball number counter value 141SG005A is started (141SGS326).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter is being displayed on the image display device 5 (141SGS327). If the image display device 5 is not displaying the second winning ball counter value 141SG005B (141SGS327;N), the winning ball number display process is terminated, and the image display device 5 displays the second winning ball counter value 141SG005B. If it is inside (141SGS327; Y), the current second prize ball counter value 141SG005B is stored as the pre-addition second prize ball counter value (141SGS328), and the current second prize ball counter value is stored. It is determined whether 141SG005B has reached the upper limit (9999) (141SGS329). If the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter has not reached the upper limit (141SGS329; N), the specified number of prize balls is added to the second prize ball counter (141SGS330), and the process proceeds to 141SGS331. Also, when the value 141SG005B of the second prize number counter has reached the upper limit (141SGS329; Y), the process proceeds to 141SGS321 without executing 141SGS330.

In addition, in the processing of 141SGS330, if the result of adding the specified number of prize balls to the second prize ball counter exceeds the upper limit value (9999) of the second prize ball counter, the value of the second prize ball counter is 141SG005B. is updated to the upper limit value of the second winning ball counter.

Then, at 141SGS331, the effect control CPU 120 compares the pre-addition second prize ball counter value stored at 141SGS338 with the second prize ball counter value 141SG005B, and the second prize ball counter value 141SG005B is rounded up. Whether or not it has occurred is specified (141SGS331), and it is determined whether or not there is the carry-over (141SGS332). If there is no carry-over (141SGS332; N), select the second addition effect process table for no carry-over (141SGS333), and proceed to 141SGS335. If there is a carry-over (141SGS332; Y), select the process table for the second addition effect corresponding to the number of digits to be carried up (141SGS334), and proceed to 141SGS335.

At 141SGS335, the effect control CPU 120 starts the second addition effect process timer in the process data 1 of the selected second addition effect process table (141SGS335). In addition, in the characterizing part 141SG of the present embodiment, the ROM 121 stores in advance a second addition effect process table corresponding to all of the second addition effects corresponding to the presence or absence of carry and the number of digits to be carried. .

And the effect control CPU 120 is the effect device (effect The control of the image display device 5 as a component, the game effect lamp 9 as a component for performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R as components for performance is started, and the second display device 5 displayed on the image display device 5 as a second addition effect The update of the prize ball counter value 141SG005B (see FIG. 10-20) is started (141SGS336).

Further, when the process timer for addition effect is in operation at 141SGS300 (141SGS300; Y), it is determined whether or not the process timer for first addition effect is in operation (141SGS501). If the process timer for the first addition effect is not in operation (141SGS501; N), proceed to 141SGS521, and if the process timer for the first addition effect is in operation (141SGS501; Y), a prize pain notification command reception flag is set (141SGS502).

If the prize ball number notification command reception flag is set (141SGS502; Y), proceed to 141SGS511, and if the prize ball number notification command reception flag is not set (141SGS502; N), process timer for first addition effect is subtracted by 1 (141SGS503), and it is determined whether or not the process timer for the first addition effect has timed out (141SGS504). When the first addition effect process timer has timed out (141SGS504; Y), it is determined whether or not it is the last first addition effect process timer that has timed out (141SGS505). When the timer for the last first addition effect is not timed out (141SGS505; N), the process data is switched and the next first addition effect process timer is started (141SGS506, 141SGS507). Then, after controlling the effect device according to the next process data (141SGS508), the process proceeds to 141SGS521.

In addition, when the timer for the last first addition effect has timed out (141SGS505; Y), the value 141SG005A of the first prize number counter displayed on the image display device 5 is updated and displayed (prize After adding the number of balls, the value of the first winning ball counter is updated to 141SG005A (141SGS509), and the process proceeds to 141SGS521.

When the process timer for the first addition effect does not time out (141SGS504; N), the effect device is controlled according to the process data corresponding to the process timer for the first addition effect (141SGS510), and the process proceeds to 141SGS521.

Also, at 141SGS511, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the number of prize balls from the received number of prize ball notification command (141SGS511). Then, the current first prize ball counter value 141SG005A is stored as the pre-addition first prize ball counter value (141SGS512), and the current first prize ball counter value 141SG005A reaches the upper limit value (99999). (141SGS513). When the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter has not reached the upper limit (141SGS513; N), the specified number of prize balls is added to the first prize ball counter (141SGS514), and the process proceeds to 141SGS515. Also, when the value 141SG005A of the first prize number counter has reached the upper limit (141SGS513; Y), the process proceeds to 141SGS515 without executing 141SGS514.

In addition, in the process of 141SGS514, when the result of adding the specified number of prize balls to the first prize ball counter exceeds the upper limit value (99999) of the first prize ball counter, the value of the first prize ball counter is 141SG005A. is updated to the upper limit value of the first winning ball number counter.

At 141SGS515, the effect control CPU 120 compares the pre-addition first prize ball counter value stored at 141SGS512 with the first prize ball counter value 141SG005A. Whether or not it has occurred is specified (141SGS515), and it is determined whether or not there is the carry-over (141SGS516). When there is no carry-over (141SGS516; N), the first addition effect being executed is continued by executing the processes of 141SGS503 to 141SGS510 described above. If there is a carry (141SGS516; Y), the process table for the first addition effect corresponding to the number of digits to be carried is newly selected (141SGS517), and the process of the selected first addition effect process table is selected. The process timer for the first addition effect in data 1 is started (141SGS518). Furthermore, according to the contents of the first process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, etc.) of the set first addition production process table, the production device (image display as production parts The device 5, the game effect lamp 9 as the performance component, and the speakers 8L and 8R as the performance component are controlled, and the number of the first prize balls displayed on the image display device 5 as a new first addition performance. After starting to update the counter value 141SG005A (141SGS519), proceed to 141SGS521.

At 141SGS521, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second addition effect process timer is in operation (141SGS521). If the process timer for the second addition effect is not in operation (141SGS521; N), the number of prize balls display processing is terminated, and if the process timer for the second addition effect is in operation (141SGS521; Y), the number of prize balls It is determined whether or not the notification command reception flag is set (141SGS522).

If the prize ball number notification command reception flag is set (141SGS522; Y), proceed to 141SGS531, and if the prize ball number notification command reception flag is not set (141SGS522; N), process timer for second addition effect is subtracted by 1 (141SGS523), and it is determined whether or not the process timer for the second addition effect has timed out (141SGS524). When the second addition effect process timer has timed out (141SGS524; Y), it is determined whether or not the last second addition effect process timer has timed out (141SGS525). If the last second addition effect process timer is not timed out (141SGS525; N), the process data is switched and the next second addition effect process timer is started (141SGS526, 141SGS527). After controlling the effect device according to the following process data (141SGS528), the processing for displaying the number of prize balls is terminated.

Also, if the last second addition effect process timer has timed out (141SGS525; Y), the value 141SG005B of the second prize number counter displayed on the image display device 5 is updated and displayed (prize After adding the number of balls, the value of the second prize ball counter is updated to 141SG005B (141SGS529), and the prize ball number display processing is terminated.

In addition, when the process timer for the second addition effect does not time out (141SGS524; N), the effect device is controlled according to the process data corresponding to the process timer for the second addition effect (141SGS530), and the number of prize balls is displayed. exit.

Also, at 141SGS531, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the number of prize balls from the received number of prize ball notification command (141SGS531). Then, the current second prize ball counter value 141SG005B is stored as the pre-addition second prize ball counter value (141SGS532), and the current second prize ball counter value 141SG005B reaches the upper limit value (9999). (141SGS533). If the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter has not reached the upper limit (141SGS533; N), the specified number of prize balls is added to the second prize ball counter (141SGS534), and the process proceeds to 141SGS535. Also, when the value 141SG005B of the second prize number counter has reached the upper limit (141SGS533; Y), the process proceeds to 141SGS535 without executing 141SGS534.

In addition, in the process of 141SGS534, when the result of adding the specified number of prize balls to the second prize ball counter exceeds the upper limit value (9999) of the second prize ball counter, the value of the second prize ball counter is 141SG005B. is updated to the upper limit value of the second winning ball counter.

Then, at 141SGS535, the effect control CPU 120 compares the pre-addition second prize ball counter value stored at 141SGS532 with the second prize ball counter value 141SG005B, and the second prize ball counter value 141SG005B is rounded up. Whether or not it has occurred is identified (141SGS535), and it is determined whether or not there is the carry-over (141SGS536). When there is no carry-over (141SGS536; N), the second addition effect being executed is continued by executing the processes of 141SGS523 to 141SGS530 described above. If there is a carry (141SGS536; Y), a second addition effect process table corresponding to the number of digits to be carried is newly selected (141SGS537), and the process of the selected second addition effect process table is selected. The process timer for the second addition effect in data 1 is started (141SGS538). Furthermore, according to the contents of the first process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, etc.) of the set second addition production process table, the production device (image display as production parts The device 5, the game effect lamp 9 as the performance component, and the speakers 8L and 8R as the performance component are controlled, and the number of the second prize balls displayed on the image display device 5 as a new second addition performance. After starting to update the counter value 141SG005B (141SGS539), the processing for displaying the number of prize balls ends.

FIG. 10-19 is a flow chart showing the winning notification effect execution process (141SGS284) in the effect control process process. In the winning notification effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the process timer for winning notification effect is in operation (141SGS351). If the process timer for winning notification effect is not in operation (141SGS351; N), it is determined whether or not the value 141SG005A of the first winning ball number counter is being displayed on the image display device 5 (141SGS352). When the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter is not being displayed on the image display device 5 (141SGS352; N), the winning notification effect execution processing is terminated, and the image display device 5 displays the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter. If it is inside (141SGS352; Y), it is further determined whether or not the number-of-balls notification command reception flag is set (141SGS353).

If the prize ball number notification command reception flag is not set (141SGS353; N), the winning notification effect execution process is terminated, and if the prize ball number notification command reception flag is set (141SGS353; Y), the command is received. The number of prize balls is specified from the number of prize balls notification command (141SGS353). Then, a process table for winning notification effect corresponding to the specified number of winning balls is selected (141SGS355), and a process timer for winning notification effect in process data 1 of the selected process table for winning notification effect is started (141SGS356). In addition, in the characterizing portion 141SG of the present embodiment, the ROM 121 stores in advance a process table for winning notification effect corresponding to the winning notification effect corresponding to each number of winning balls.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (effect component The control of the image display device 5 as the performance component, the game effect lamp 9 as the performance component, and the speakers 8L and 8R as the performance component) is started, and the winning notification image 141SG005N (Fig. 10- 20) is started to be displayed (141SGS357). Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 clears the award number notification command reception flag and ends the winning notification effect execution process (141SGS358).

On the other hand, when the process timer for prize notification effect is in operation at 141SGS351 (141SGS351; Y), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer for prize notification effect (141SGS359), and the process for prize notification effect Determine whether the timer has timed out (141SGS360). When the process timer for winning notification effect times out (141SGS360; Y), the process data is switched and the next process timer for winning notification effect is started (141SGS361, 141SGS362). Then, the effect device is controlled according to the following process data, and the winning notification effect execution processing is terminated (141SGS363).

In addition, when the process timer for winning notification effect has not timed out at 141SGS360 (141SGS360; N), the effect device is controlled according to the process data corresponding to the process timer for winning notification effect, and the winning notification effect execution processing is terminated. (141 SGS364).

As shown in FIGS. 10-20(A) to 10-20(E), the image display device 5 When the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter is displayed (during a jackpot game or during a high base including a special zone), every time a game ball wins a prize, a prize is awarded according to the prize as a prize notification effect. A notification image 141SG005N is displayed, and an updated display of the value 141SG005A of the first winning ball number counter is executed as the first addition effect.

Further, during the jackpot game of the probability variable jackpot A or during the special zone, the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter are displayed on the image display device 5, and the game ball wins. Every time the game is played, the update display of the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball number counter is executed as the second addition effect.

In addition, as the first addition effect and the second addition effect, when the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball number counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball number counter do not carry over, FIG. 10-20 (B) As shown in , an addition effect is executed for only the least significant digit (1's place). On the other hand, if the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter are carried up as the first addition effect and the second addition effect, the following operations are performed. As shown in FIG. 10-20(E), an addition effect is executed for the digits in which carry occurs.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-21(A) to 10-21(C), when the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter have already reached the upper limit. , the first addition effect and the second addition effect are executed according to the winning of the game ball. The value 141SG005B of the number-of-balls counter does not change.

FIG. 10-22 is a flow chart showing the number-of-balls notification effect execution process (141SGS284) in the effect control process process. In the number-of-balls notification effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the process timer for number-of-balls notification effect is in operation (141SGS371). If the process timer for informing the number of prize balls is not in operation (141SGS371; N), it is further determined whether or not the value 141SG005A of the first number of prize balls counter is being displayed on the image display device 5 (141SGS372). When the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter is not being displayed on the image display device 5 (141SGS372; N), the prize ball number notification effect execution processing is terminated, and the image display device 5 displays the value of the first prize ball counter. When 141SG005A is being displayed (141SGS372; Y), the value 141SG005A of the first winning ball number counter is specified (141SGS373).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball number counter specified in 141SGS373 has reached a predetermined value (notification start threshold value, for example, 5000, 10000, etc.). (141SGS374). When the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter specified in 141SGS333 does not reach the notification start threshold (141SGS374; N), the prize ball number notification effect execution processing is terminated, and the first prize ball counter specified in 141SGS373 value 141SG005A has reached the notification start threshold (141SGS374; Y), the process table for the number of prize balls notification effect corresponding to the notification start threshold is selected (141SGS375). Then, the process timer for the number-of-balls notification effect is started (141SGS376). In addition, in the characterizing portion 141SG of the present embodiment, the ROM 121 stores in advance a prize ball number notification effect effect process table corresponding to the prize ball number report effect for each notification start threshold value.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 follows the contents of the first process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, etc.) of the set prize ball number notification effect process table (effect device (141SGS377).

In addition, when the process timer for the number of prize balls notification effect is in operation at 141SGS371 (141SGS371; Y), the value of the process timer for the number of prize balls notification effect is decremented by -1 (141SGS378), and the process timer for the number of prize balls notification effect is reduced. has timed out (141SGS379). When the number-of-balls notification effect process timer times out (141SGS379; Y), the number-of-balls notification effect process data is switched (141SGS380). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the process timer setting value for the number of prize balls notification effect, which is set next in the process table for the number of prize balls notification effect, to the process timer (141SGS381). Also, based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, etc., included in the process data set next, the control state for the production device (parts for production) is changed (141SGS382), and the prize is displayed. The number-of-balls notification effect execution processing is terminated.

In addition, when the process timer for the number of prize balls notification effect has not timed out at 141SGS379 (141SGS379; N), the effect device is controlled according to the process data corresponding to the process timer for the number of prize balls notification effect (141SGS383), and the prize The number-of-balls notification effect execution processing is terminated.

FIG. 10-23 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process process. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is set (141SGS391). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is set (141SGS391; Y), the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the reception command buffer at the time of start winning is associated with The various command data and various flags stored in the buffer number are shifted upward by one buffer number (141SGS392). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set at 141SGS391 (141SGS391; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (141SGS393). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (141SGS393; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (141SGS393; Y), start Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reserved storage in the received command buffer at the time of winning are incremented by one buffer number. Shift (141SGS394). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

After executing 141SGS392 or 141SGS394, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (141SGS395).

Next, the display result (stop pattern) of the decoration pattern and the small pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command) (141SGS396). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the decorative symbols and the stopped small symbols according to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and transmits data indicating the determined decorative symbols and the stopped small symbols to the decorative symbols. Store in the display result storage area.

In addition, in the characterizing part 141SG of the present embodiment, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, sets 3 as the stop symbol. A combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) with the patterns "7" is determined. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", (combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probable variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120, for example, selects a decorative pattern in which 3 patterns are even-numbered patterns as the stop pattern. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). Also, if the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, a combination of odd or even numbers with three different patterns as the stop pattern (for example, "135", "246") It is decided from a combination of decorative patterns such as (small hit pattern)). In addition, when the received variable display result specifying command is the first variable display result specifying command corresponding to the loss, a combination of decoration patterns in which three patterns excluding the small winning pattern are not aligned as the stop pattern (losing pattern). to decide.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and determines stop symbols in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and small symbols are associated with numerical values. A table may be used to determine the decorative symbols and the stop symbols of the small symbols. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decoration symbols and small symbols corresponding to numerical values matching the extracted random numbers.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special zone end flag is set (141SGS397). If the special zone end flag is not set (141SGS397; N), it is further determined whether or not the special zone flag is set (141SGS398). When the special zone flag is set (141SGS398; Y), if decorative patterns are being displayed on the image display device 5, these decorative patterns are set to be non-display and the process proceeds to 141SGS404 (141SGS399). If the special zone flag is not set (141SGS398; N), the process proceeds to 141SGS404 without executing the process of 141SGS399.

On the other hand, if the special zone end flag is set in 141SGS397 (141SGS397; Y), the special zone end flag is cleared (141SGS3400), and the special zone end notification process table corresponding to the variation pattern is selected (141SGS401). ). Then, the display of the first reserved memory display area 141SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 141SG005U on the image display device 5 is started (141SGS402), and the non-special zone (normal high base state) is displayed on the image display device 5. The display of the background image is started (141SGS403), and the process proceeds to 141SGS404.

Next, at 141SGS404, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (141SGS405).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling lighting of each lamp, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (141SGS406). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in the characterizing part 141SG of the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the variation display of the decoration pattern is performed by the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one, but the effect control CPU 120 may select a variation pattern to be used from among a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern designation command (141SGS407). Also, a predetermined time is set in the fluctuation control timer (141SGS408). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variation of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (141SGS409).

FIG. 10-24 is a flow chart showing the effect process during variable display (S172) in the effect control process process. During variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from each value of the process timer, the variable time timer, and the variable control timer (141SGS411, 141SGS412, 141SGS413). Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (141SGS414). When the process timer has timed out (141SGS414), the process data is switched (141SGS415). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next process timer set value in the process table to the process timer (141SGS416). Also, based on the next set display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc., the control state for the production device (parts for production) is changed (141SGS417), 141SGS419. proceed to On the other hand, when the process timer has not timed out (141SGS414; N), according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) Control of the production device (parts for production) is executed (141SGS418), and the process proceeds to 141SGS419.

Next, at 141SGS419, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is time to temporarily stop the small symbols (141SGS419). If it is time to temporarily stop the small symbols, as a part of the pseudo continuous effect, the small symbols are temporarily stopped in a combination indicating a failure, and the process proceeds to 141SGS421 (141SGS420). If it is not the temporary stop timing for the small symbol (141SGS419; N), the process proceeds to 141SGS421 without executing the process of 141SGS420.

At 141SGS421, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is time to start re-fluctuation of the small symbols (141SGS421). When it is time to start re-fluctuation of the small symbols (141SGS421; Y), as a part of the pseudo continuous effect, re-fluctuation of the temporarily stopped small symbols is started (141SGS422). Then, it is determined whether or not the re-change is the last re-change start timing (141SGS423). When it is the last re-fluctuation start timing (141SGS423; Y), the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying the first reserved memory display area 141SGS005D and the second reserved memory display area 141SGS005U in the image display device 5 (141SGS424). , the background image for the non-special zone (normal high base state) is started to be displayed on the image display device 5 (141SGS425). In addition, the display of the second winning ball counter value 141SG005B displayed on the image display device 5 is finished (141SGS426), the second winning ball counter value 141SG005B is reset to "0", and the process proceeds to 141SGS429. (141 SGS427).

In addition, if it is not the re-fluctuation start timing of the small symbols at 141SGS421 (141SGS421; N) or if it is not the last re-fluctuation start timing at 141SGS423 (141SGS423; N), the effect control CPU 120 executes the special zone end notification effect described later. It is determined whether or not it is in the period (141SGS428). If it is during the special zone end notification effect execution period (141SGS428; Y), it proceeds to 141SGS429, and if it is not during the special zone end notification effect execution period (141SGS428; N), it proceeds to 141SGS430.

At 141SGS429, the effect control CPU 120 executes special zone end notification effect execution processing for executing a special zone end notification effect for notifying that the special zone has ended (141SGS429), and proceeds to 141SGS430.

At 141SGS430, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is time to start displaying decorative patterns on the image display device 5 (141SGS430). , the display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5 is started and the process proceeds to 141SGS432 (141SGS431), and if it is not the display start timing of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5 (141SGS430; N), 141SGS432 is performed without executing the processing of 141SGS431. proceed to

At 141SGS432, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation control timer has timed out (141SGS432). When the variation control timer has timed out (141SGS432; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen for the left, middle, and right decorative patterns (displayed after 30 ms have passed since the previous display switching of the decorative patterns). image data of the target screen) is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (141SGS433). Thus, in the image display device 5, variation control of decorative symbols is realized. The display control unit 123 transmits to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing the image data of a predetermined area such as the set background image and the image data based on the display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this manner, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative design in the variation of the decorative design. In addition, the variable control timer is reset to a predetermined value (141SGS434), and the process proceeds to 141SGS435.

Also, if the variation control timer has not timed out (1141SGS432; N), or after executing 141SGS434, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the variation time timer has timed out (141SGS435). If the variable time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (S173) (141SG437). Even if the variable time timer has not timed out, if the determination command reception flag indicating that the symbol determination designation command has been received is set (141SGS436; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is processed for special symbols. S173) is updated (141SGS437). Even if the variable time timer has not timed out, if the pattern confirmation designation command is received, the control will be shifted to stop the fluctuation. Even if it is received, the variation of the decorative design can be terminated when the normal variation time has elapsed (when the special design finishes varying).

In addition, the process data during the variable display of the decorative design is set in the process table used for the variation control of the decorative design. That is, the sum of the process timer setting values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the fluctuation time of the decoration pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n in the process of 141SGS374 times out, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and the decorative design effect control based on the process table ends. do.

FIG. 10-25 is a flowchart showing the special zone end notification effect execution process (141SGS429) in the effect process during variable display. In the special zone end notification effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the special zone end notification effect process timer is in operation (141SGS441). When the special zone end notification effect process timer is not in operation (141SGS441; N), the special zone end notification effect process table is selected (141SGS442), and the process data 1 in the selected special zone end notification effect process table is executed. A process timer for special zone end notification effect is started (141SGS443). In addition, in the characteristic part 141SG of the present embodiment, a process table for special zone notification effect corresponding to the special zone notification effect is stored in the ROM 121 in advance.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the contents of the first process data 1 of the set special zone end notification effect process table (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1 etc.), the control of the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the game effect lamp 9 as the production component, and the speakers 8L and 8R as the production component, the stick controller 31A, and the push button 31B) is started ( 141SGS444), the special zone end notification effect execution processing is terminated.

Further, when the process timer for special zone end notification effect is operating in 141SGS441 (141SGS441; Y), the value of the process timer for special zone end notification effect is decreased by 1 (141SGS445), and the process for special zone end notification effect is performed. It is determined whether the timer has timed out (141SGS446).

When the process timer for special zone end notification effect times out (141SGS446; Y), the process data is switched (141SGS447). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the process timer setting value for special zone end notification effect, which is set next in the process table for special zone end notification effect, to the process timer (141SGS448). Also, based on the next set display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc., the control state for the production device (parts for production) is changed (141SGS449), and special End the zone end notification effect execution processing. On the other hand, when the special zone end notification effect process timer has not timed out (141SGS446; N), the contents of the process data corresponding to the special zone end notification effect process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, (sound control execution data, operating unit control data, etc.) control of the effect device (parts for effect) is executed (141SGS450), and the special zone end notification effect execution process is terminated.

By executing the variable display during the special zone as described above, as shown in FIG. If none of the variable display results in (1) is a big hit, if the variable display result is a loss in the special zone, the variable display will be for 3 seconds, and if the variable display result is a small hit, the variable display will be for 4 seconds. executed. At the timing when the 32nd variable display in the special zone ends, the image display device 5 starts displaying the background image for the non-special zone and displaying the decorative pattern, and the value of the second prize ball counter reaches 141SG005B. Display ends.

Then, in the 33rd variation display (the first variation display after the end of the special zone) after the end of the jackpot game of the variable probability big win A, the special zone end notification performance is executed, and the special zone is completed for the player. is reported.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-26(B), n-th time (32≧n≧1) out of 32 fluctuation displays (32 fluctuation displays in the special zone) after the end of the jackpot game of the probability variable jackpot A In the fluctuation display, if the fluctuation display result is a big hit and the jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot A, in the fluctuation display up to the n-1th time, if the fluctuation display result is a loss, the fluctuation display will be for 3 seconds, and the fluctuation display result will be If it is a small hit, the fluctuation display for 4 seconds is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-26(C), n-th time (32≧n≧1) out of 32 fluctuation displays (32 fluctuation displays in the special zone) after the end of the jackpot game of probability variable jackpot A In the fluctuation display, if the fluctuation display result is a big hit and the jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot B or a non-probability variable jackpot, in the fluctuation display up to the n-1th time, if the fluctuation display result is a loss, the fluctuation display for 3 seconds, If the variation display result is a small hit, the variation display is executed for 4 seconds.

Next, in the n-th fluctuation display, a pseudo continuous effect (temporary stop and re-fluctuation of small symbols) is repeated every 3 seconds for 33-n times. On the image display device 5, the display of the background image for the non-special zone and the display of the decoration pattern are started, and the display of the value 141SG005B of the second winning ball number counter is finished. Then, after the 33-nth re-fluctuation of the small symbols is started, the special zone end notification effect is executed, and the player is notified that the special zone has ended.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 141SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result in the variation display in the special zone is a big hit and the jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot A, the variation display in the special zone is pseudo. While the small symbols are derived and displayed in a combination showing the probability variable big win A without executing the continuous performance or the like, the variation display result in the variable display in the special zone becomes the big win and the big win type becomes the probability variable big win B or the non-probability variable big win. In that case, after performing a pseudo-continuous performance according to the number of remaining fluctuations in the special zone to make it appear as if the special zone has ended, the small symbols are derived and displayed in a combination showing the probability variable big hit B and the non-definite variable big hit. It has become.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 during the jackpot game and during the special zone will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-27 and 10-28. First, as shown in FIGS. 10-27 (A) and 10-27 (B), when the variable display result is a big hit and the big hit type is the probability variable big hit A, the decorative pattern and the small pattern are the probability variable big hit A. The combination shown is derived and displayed, and the jackpot game of probability variable jackpot A is started. At this time, the display of the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter is started in the upper left part of the image display device 5 . During the jackpot game, each time a game ball wins a big winning hole, a start winning hole, or a general winning hole 141SG010A, 141SG010B, 141SG010C, the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter are displayed. is updated and displayed. At this time, as shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 described above, addition effects (first addition effect, second addition effect) and winning notification effects are also executed.

After the jackpot game is over, as shown in FIG. 10-27(C), the decoration pattern as the special zone, the first reserved memory display area 141SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 141SG005U are hidden and synchronized with the special pattern. Then, the variable display of small patterns is started. In addition, in the characteristic portion 141SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-27(B) and 10-27(C), the image 141SG005X during the jackpot game is continuously displayed even in the special zone. It has become. The image 141SG005X during the big win game is displayed in the special zone until the fluctuation display of the big win is completed, but the fluctuation display is completed 32 times.

When the variable display result is a big hit and the big win type is the probability variable big hit A in the special zone, the variable display is performed as shown in FIGS. 10-27 (D) and 10-27 (E) As a result, after the small symbols are derived and displayed in a combination indicating the probability variable big win A, the big win game of the probability variable big win A is started. At this time, the display of the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter are continuously updated.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-27(E), when the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball number counter reaches the notification start threshold during the special zone or during the jackpot game, an image is displayed as the prize ball number notification effect. A notification image 141SG005H indicating that the number of prize balls has reached the threshold for starting notification is displayed on the device 5 . In addition, in the characterizing portion 141SG of the present embodiment, the form of displaying the notification image 141SG005H on the image display device 5 is exemplified as the performance for notifying the number of prize balls, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number-of-balls notification effect may be executed by outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, emitting light from the game effect lamp 9, or the like.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-27(F), in the characteristic part 141SG of the present embodiment, the number of prize balls that can be counted by the first prize ball counter (upper limit value of the first prize ball counter) is greater than the number of prize balls that can be counted by the second prize ball counter (the upper limit of the second prize ball counter). Therefore, after the value 141SG005B of the second winning ball counter reaches the upper limit (9999), even if a new winning occurs, the value 141SG005B of the second winning ball counter is not updated. The value 141SG005A of the number-of-balls counter is continuously updated. While the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter is not updated in this way, the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter is updated, whereby the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter reaches the notification start threshold. In the case of doing so, the prize ball number notification effect is executed.

That is, in the characterizing part 141SG of the present embodiment, when the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter are displayed on the image display device 5, the first prize ball number When the value 141SG005A of the counter reaches the notification start threshold value, regardless of the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter, the prize ball number notification effect is executed.

Also, in the special zone, when the variation display result is a jackpot and the jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot B or a non-probability variable jackpot, when the variable display is executed, as shown in FIGS. As shown, in the small symbol display area 141SG005S, the temporary stop and re-variation (pseudo continuous effect) of the small symbols corresponding to the number of remaining variations of the special zone are repeatedly executed. Then, when the last small pattern is changed again, as shown in FIG. 10-28(J), the special zone end notification effect is executed in the image display device 5, and the special zone ends for the player. You will be informed of what has happened.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 (K) and 10-28 (L), while the display of the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter on the image display device 5 is terminated, the display of the decoration pattern is continued. Then, the display of the first reserved memory display area 141SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 141SG005U is resumed. After that, after the advance notice performance or the like suggesting a predetermined probability variable big win B or non-probability variable big win is executed, the performance pattern and the small pattern are derived and displayed in a combination showing the probability variable big win B or non-probability variable big win.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 141SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. When the ball number counter value 141SG005A or the second prize ball number counter value 141SG005B is displayed, the first addition effect or the second addition effect is executed by the game ball entering the winning hole. The prize ball counter value 141SG005A and the second prize ball counter value 141SG005B are updated. In addition, when the game ball enters the winning hole while the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter have reached the upper limit, the first addition effect or the second addition effect is executed, the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball number counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball number counter are not updated by the execution of the first addition effect and the second addition effect. That is, the first addition effect and the second addition effect are executed regardless of the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter. Even when the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter reach the upper limits, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-20, the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter are displayed on the image display device 5 in the high base state including the jackpot game and the special zone. When the game ball enters the winning hole, the winning notification is given regardless of whether the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball number counter or the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball number counter reaches the upper limit value. Since the effect is executed, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter or the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter reaches the upper limit.

10-20, the characterizing portion 141SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode of notifying the number of prize balls paid out due to the winning as the prize notifying effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, if it is possible to notify that a game ball has entered one of the winning openings, the number of paid-out prize balls may not be notified.

Furthermore, in the characterizing part 141SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-20, a form is illustrated in which a winning notification effect can be executed based on the fact that a game ball has entered one of the winning holes. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a new game ball wins during the execution of the winning notification performance, the winning notification performance being executed is interrupted and the winning notification performance based on the new winning is performed. may be executed. Furthermore, when a new game ball wins during the execution of the winning notification effect, the winning notification effect based on the new winning may be executed overlapping with the winning notification effect being executed. In addition, when executing a plurality of winning notification effects in an overlapping manner, the position of the winning notification image 141SG005N displayed on the image display device 5 as the winning notification effect being executed is specified, and the image is displayed as a new winning notification effect. The winning notification image 141SG005N may be displayed at a position on the display device 5 different from the specified position.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 10-18, the first prize ball number counter is a counter for counting the number of prize balls paid out during the consecutive game, while the second prize ball number counter is a variable jackpot A It is a counter for totalizing the number of prize balls paid out during the jackpot game and the special zone. is a counter for counting Furthermore, since the first prize ball number counter and the second prize ball number counter tally the number of prize balls individually, the effect control CPU 120 controls the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball number counter and the value of the second prize ball counter. The value 141SG005B of the number-of-balls counter can be displayed on the image display device 5 in a distinguishable manner.

In addition, in the characterizing part 141SG of the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out during the continuous game and the number of prize balls paid out during the jackpot game of the probability variable jackpot A and during the special zone are added up. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of prize balls paid out during the continuous game, the probability variable jackpot A during the jackpot game, and the special Only one of the number of prize balls paid out in the zone and the number of prize balls may be totaled and the total number of prize balls may be displayed on the image display device 5 .

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-20, when the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter are displayed on the image display device 5, the winning of the game ball causes the prize ball to When the number of paid-out prize balls is added, the first addition effect or the second addition effect is executed according to the carry-over generated by adding the number of paid-out prize balls, so that the number of paid-out prize balls and the It is possible to facilitate understanding of the correspondence between the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter.

The characterizing portion 141SG of the present embodiment has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to the characterizing portion 141SG of these embodiments, and modifications and additions are made within the scope of the present invention. is included in the present invention.

For example, in the characterizing part 141SG of the embodiment, as the game performance of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game ball is hit toward the right game area 141SG002R mainly during the jackpot game, so that the game ball wins the big prize opening. Although the form of increasing the possession ball (prize ball) by doing is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, as a modification 113SG-1, the right game of the pachinko machine 1 A large winning opening formed by a passage gate 141SG041, a variable winning ball device 141SG006B, and a special variable winning ball device 141SG007 is arranged in order from the upstream side to the downstream side of the area 141SG002R, and a game ball is hit during right hitting after the end of the big hit game. A small winning game is frequently executed by passing through a second start winning opening formed by a passage gate 141SG041 and a variable winning ball device 141SG006B, and a game ball enters a big winning opening during the small winning game. You may make it possible to increase possession balls. In the configuration of the modified example 113SG-1, instead of the special variable winning ball device 141SG007, a special variable winning ball device for big wins and a special variable winning ball device for small wins are provided. A special variable winning ball device may be provided upstream of the variable winning ball device 141SG006B. In this way, by providing the special variable winning ball device for big win on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 141SG006B, during the big win game, before the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 141SG006B, the special variable for big win Since the game ball can enter the big winning hole of the winning ball device, the big winning game can be smoothly progressed.

Furthermore, in the case where it is possible to increase the number of balls held by the game ball entering the big winning hole during the small winning game, the winning probability in the variable display of normal symbols is changed regardless of the game state. The ratio of the small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol is set higher than the ratio of the small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol (for example, the first The ratio of the small hit in the variation display of the 1st special symbol is set to 0, and the ratio of the small hit in the variation display of the 2nd special symbol is set to 299/300).

Then, after the end of the jackpot game of a specific jackpot type (for example, probability variable jackpot B or non-probability variable jackpot), the variation display of the normal symbols executed based on the passing of the game ball through the passage gate 141SG041 becomes "hit". By setting the opening period of the variable winning ball device 141SG006B to the first period, even if a small hit occurs, the game ball flowing down the right game area 141SG002R enters the second start winning opening and wins a big prize. 1KT state (probability variable state and 1KT state or low probability state and 1KT state) in which it is difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the mouth, and after the jackpot game of other jackpot types (for example, probability variable jackpot A) is passed through the passage gate 141SG041, and the opening period of the variable winning ball device 141SG006B is set to a second period shorter than the first period when the variable display of the normal symbols is "hit". A second KT state (probability variable state and second KT state) in which a game ball is more likely to enter a big winning hole opened by occurrence of a small win than the first KT state, and a big winning during a small winning game. It may be possible to prevent excessive increase in possession balls due to winning of a game ball into the mouth.

In the KT state (1st KT state and 2nd KT state), since the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner by launching the game ball toward the right game area 141SG002R, the game ball is directed toward the left game area 141SG002L. It is a state in which the variation display result is more likely to be a small hit than in the normal state (low probability state and non-KT state) in which the variation display of the first special symbol is executed by striking out. In other words, the KT state is an advantageous state for the player who can generate small wins more frequently than in the non-KT state mainly by executing the variable display of the second special symbol.

Next, the game state transition in the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can be controlled to the first KT state and the second KT state as described above will be described. First, in the normal state (low-probability state and non-KT state), the player mainly aims at starting winning to the first starting winning opening by launching the game ball toward the left game area 141SG002L. Therefore, in the normal state, the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. When the variation display result is a big hit in the normal state, the game state after the end of the big win game is either a high probability state and the second KT state, a high probability state and the first KT state, or a low probability state and the first KT state. controlled. For example, after the jackpot game of the variable probability big hit A is finished, the game state is controlled to the high probability state and the second KT state, and after the big hit game of the variable probability big hit B is controlled to the high probability state and the first KT state, and the game state is controlled to the high probability state and the first KT state. After the big win game is finished, the game state is controlled to the low probability state and the first KT state.

In the game state after the end of these jackpot games, the player aims to win a starting prize to the second starting winning port or a winning prize to the big winning port by launching the game ball toward the right game area 141SG002R. In addition, when the game state is controlled to the high probability state and the second KT state or the high probability state and the first KT state, these high probability state and the second KT state or the high probability until the fluctuation display result of the special symbol becomes a big hit again. state and the first KT state are maintained. On the other hand, when the game state is controlled to the low probability state and the first KT state, the game state is normal state (low probability state and non-KT state).

Then, during the KT state, mainly the second special symbols are variably displayed, so that the result of the variative display becomes a small win with a high probability, and the big winning hole is opened in the small win game. Here, when it is in the first KT state, even during the small winning game, the variable winning ball device 141SG006B arranged on the upstream side of the big winning opening is open over the first period with a high probability. Therefore, many of the game balls enter the second start winning hole, making it difficult to win the big winning hole. On the other hand, during the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 141SG006B arranged upstream of the big winning opening during the small winning game is closed at a higher rate than during the first KT state. More game balls than in the 1KT state enter the big winning hole without entering the second starting winning hole.

In addition, in this modification 113SG-1, when the variation display result is a big hit and the big hit type is a probability variable big hit A, the game state is always controlled to the second KT state. Not limited to this, when the variation display result of the second special symbol in the normal state (low probability state and non-KT state) is a big hit and the big hit type is the probability variable big hit A, that is, the game ball is left game In spite of the fact that the game ball was hit toward the area 141SG002L, the player hit the game ball toward the right game area 141SG002R, so that the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and the result of the variable display is a big win and When the jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot A, the game state may not be controlled to the second KT state (controlled to the high probability state and the first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. By doing so, some players actively launch game balls toward the right game area 141SG002R in order to execute the variable display of the second special symbol in the normal state, thereby impairing the original game performance. You can prevent it from falling off.

In addition, in this modification 113SG-1, the opening period of the variable winning ball device 141SG006B is made different between the first KT state and the second KT state, so that the percentage of game balls entering the big winning opening during the small winning game is made different. Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and by varying the number of openings of the variable winning ball device 141SG006B between the first KT state and the second KT state, a big prize during a small winning game can be achieved. The winning ratio of game balls to the mouth may be varied.

In this way, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is made controllable to the second KT state and the game property is such that the number of balls (prize balls) increases in the big win game state and the small win game state in the second KT state, As shown in FIGS. 10-29 to 10-31, the number of winning balls display 141SG300, 141SG303, 141SG305 may be displayed on the image display device 5 in the first KT state and the second KT state during the jackpot game.

Furthermore, during the jackpot game, as shown in FIGS. 10-29(A) to 10-29(C), the image display device 5 displays the number of winning balls 141SG300, the character 1078SG301, and the like "Jumping!" Character display 141SG302 is displayed, and when a game ball wins in the big winning hole, the display of the number of prize balls 141SG300 is updated at the first speed (for example, the display of the number of prize balls 141SG300 is set to 0.1 second. update over time).

Also, in the 1KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-30(A) to 10-30(C), the image display device 5 displays the number of winning balls 141SG303, and when a small hit occurs. , displays a character display 141SG304 such as "Small hit!" It may be updated at the first speed as in the middle.

Then, in the second KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-31(A) to 10-31(C), the image display device 5 displays the number of winning balls display 141SG305, and when a small hit occurs. may display a character display 141SG306 such as "small win!" Furthermore, when a game ball wins in the big winning hole during the small winning game in the second KT state, a character display 141SG309 such as a character 141SG308 or "+15" as a prize ball increase display is displayed on the image display device 5 as a winning effect. , and an effect image 141SG307 may be displayed around the number of prize balls display 141SG305. Then, the display of the number of prize balls display 141SG305 is updated at a second speed that is lower than the first speed (for example, the display of the number of prize balls display 141SG305 is updated over 0.5 seconds), that is, the jackpot game The update speed of the prize ball number display 141SG300, 141SG303, 141SG305 is changed according to whether the game ball entered the big winning hole in the medium, first KT state or second KT state, so that the player can display the number of prize balls. Attention may be paid to the updating speed of 141SG300, 141SG303, and 141SG305 to improve the game interest.

As described above, in this modification 113SG-1, there are two patterns for updating and displaying the number of awarded ball displays 141SG300, 141SG303, and 141SG305 (a pattern for updating and displaying the number of awarded ball displays 141SG300 and 141SG303 at the first speed; By providing a pattern in which the number of prize balls display 141SG305 is updated and displayed at the second speed, interest in the game can be improved when the number of prize balls is updated and displayed. In particular, in this modification 113SG-1, when the small hit probability in the 2KT state is set to a predetermined probability (eg, 50%, etc.), during the 2KT state, the number of game balls to the big winning opening is higher than during the big win game. Winning less frequently. Therefore, by updating the display of the number of prize balls 141SG305 at the second speed which is lower than the first speed, even if the frequency of winning to the big winning opening is lower than during the big winning game, the game balls are interrupted to the big winning opening. Since it is possible to make the player feel as if he or she has won a prize without any effort, it is possible to give the player an interval between small wins, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, in this modification 113SG-1, a common big winning opening may be opened during the big winning game and during the small winning game, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a plurality of big winning openings, and during the big winning game The big winning opening opened during the game may be different from the big winning opening opened during the small winning game.

In addition, like the characteristic portion 141SG of the embodiment and the present modification 113SG-1, the state of launching the game ball toward the right game area 141SG002R (jackpot game state, high accuracy high base state, 1st KT state, 2nd KT state, etc.), the image display device 5 displays a promotion image for urging the player to hit the game ball toward the right game area 141SG002R, and the general winning opening 141SG010C provided in the right game area 141SG002R. When the game ball wins, a winning sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R to notify that the game ball has won the general winning hole 141SG010C. On the other hand, like the characteristic portion 141SG and this modification 113SG-1 of all embodiments, the state of launching the game ball toward the right game area 141SG002R (jackpot game state, high accuracy high base state, 1st KT state, 1st 2KT state, etc.), when the game ball wins in the general winning holes 141SG010A and 141SG010B provided in the left gaming area 141SG002L, the promotion image is displayed by not notifying the winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable based on the entry of the game ball into the left game area 141SG002L when it is in the big hit game state, the high probability high base state, the 1st KT state, the 2nd KT state, etc. can.

Incidentally, when the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the first KT state or the second KT state as in this modification 113SG-1, during the advantageous period of the present invention, the jackpot game state, the small win game state, A first KT state and a second KT state are included.

Further, in the characteristic part 141SG of the above-described embodiment, the image 141SG005X during the jackpot game is continuously displayed on the image display device 5 in the special zone after the end of the probability variable jackpot A jackpot game, and the decoration pattern is hidden. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. Instead of the image, the decorative pattern may be displayed in a mode different from the normal state (low-probability-low base state) or the high-probability-high base state except for the special zone.

It should be noted that, when the decorative pattern is displayed in a manner different from the normal state (low probability low base state) and the high probability high base state excluding the special zone, for example, FIG. 10-32 (A) ~ FIG. As shown in 32(E), in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 141SG005L and 141SG005R, a plurality of "7" decorative patterns are displayed in parallel from the front side to the back side of the image display device 5, In the "middle" decorative design display area 141SG005C, only the "6" decorative design of 1 is displayed. That is, from the state in which the decorative design is stopped in a combination (combination of "767") indicating reach loss of the probability variable jackpot A, the decorative designs displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 141SG005L and 141SG005R is shifted forward, and the decorative design displayed in the "middle" decorative design display area 141SG005C is horizontally rotated to perform the variable display. Further, the small pattern may be displayed in a variable manner in the same manner as the characterizing part 141SG of the above-described embodiment in conjunction with the decoration pattern.

In addition, in the variable display of the loss in these special zones, the decoration pattern and the small pattern are derived and displayed by the combination of the reach loss of the probability variable jackpot A (combination of "767"). In this way, by deriving and displaying the decorative patterns and the small patterns in the special zone in combination with the reach-losing of the probability variable big win A, the decorative patterns and the small patterns are derived and displayed in the special zone in combination with the probability variable big win A. It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not (whether or not the notification of the variable probability big hit A is executed in combination of the decoration pattern and the small pattern).

Furthermore, in the fluctuation display of the loss in the special zone, the fluctuation display ends in 3 seconds (the fluctuation display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of PA1-4 shown in FIG. 10-4), so the decorative pattern and the small pattern is derived and displayed every 3 seconds by the combination of reach-loss of the probability variable big win A, and the player is more effectively informed by whether or not the decoration pattern and the small pattern are derived and displayed by the combination of the probability variable big win A in the special zone. It is possible to attract attention.

In addition, when the variation display result is a big hit in the special zone and the big hit type is a probability variable big hit B or a non-probability variable big hit, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 (F) to 10-33 (K) Then, by executing a pseudo-continuous performance of the number of times corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations in the special zone, and deriving and displaying the decorative pattern and the small pattern in combination showing the probability variable big hit B or the non-probability variable big win via the special zone end notification performance. good.

As described above, in the special zone in the modified example 113SG-2, the shortened variable display for 3 seconds is continuously executed, and when the variable display result is lost, the decorative pattern and the small pattern are changed. By deriving and displaying the combination of the reach-loss of the big win A, the player pays attention to whether or not the big win game of the variable probability big win A is executed again in succession to the big win game of the variable probability big win A which triggered the special zone. It is possible to Furthermore, when the variable display result is a big hit in the special zone, the decoration pattern and the small pattern are always derived and displayed in a combination showing the probability variation big hit A (the combination of the decoration pattern and the small pattern determines the probability variation big hit. A is notified), so that the player can be given a special feeling that the decoration pattern and the small pattern are derived and displayed in the special zone in a combination showing the probability variable big win A.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, in the variable display of the probability variable jackpot A in the special zone, the variable display ends in 3 seconds, similar to the variable display of the loss (the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of PC1-1 shown in FIG. 10-4. ), the decoration pattern and the small pattern are abruptly derived and displayed in the combination of the variable probability big win A, which gives the player a sense of surprise and shortens the interval between successive big win games of the variable probability big win A.例文帳に追加Since it is possible to do so, the amusement in the game can be improved.

10-18, the characterizing part 141SG of the above-described embodiment counts the number of prize balls paid out during the continuous game with the first prize ball number counter, and and the number of prize balls paid out in the special zone are counted by the second prize ball counter, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these first prize ball counters The state in which the number of prize balls is tallied by the second prize ball counter (jackpot game state or high base state) is a state in which game balls are launched mainly toward the right game area 141SG002R, so the modification 141SG- 1, when counting the number of prize balls at the first prize ball counter and the second prize ball counter, the winning opening provided in the right game area 141SG002R (second start winning opening, big winning opening, While totaling the winning balls when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 141SG010C), the winning opening provided in the left game area 141SG002L (general winning opening 141SG010A, general winning opening 141SG010B, first start winning opening) It is also possible not to tally the prize balls when the game ball wins the prize. By doing so, the number of prize balls can be tallied appropriately according to the game state in the first prize ball counter and the second prize ball counter.

In addition, in the modification 113SG-1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled in the second KT state, and the game property of increasing the possession balls (prize balls) in the big win game state and the small win game state in the second KT state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled in the second KT state, and in the big win game state and the small win game state in the second KT state, the balls (prize balls) ), the game state changes from the jackpot game state or the second KT state to the first KT state or the normal state (period during consecutive games), the jackpot game state and the small win game state. Even if the total number of times the winning game state is controlled is totaled, and an image (hit notification image 141SG005P) for informing the player of the totaled number of times (total number of winnings) is displayed on the image display device 5. good.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-34 (A) to 10-34 (E) as a modified example 143SG-1, first, in the normal state, the decorative pattern and the small winning pattern are derived in a combination showing a big hit When it is displayed, a winning notification image 141SG005P is displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of the big winning game to notify that the total number of winnings is one. Then, in the controlled second KT state after the end of the big win game, when the decorative symbols and the small winning symbols are again derived and displayed in a combination showing a big win, or when they are derived and displayed in a combination showing a small win, the total number of wins. is incremented by 1, and the winning notification image 141SG005P for notifying that the total number of winnings is two is displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of the big win game or the start of the small win game.

Furthermore, when the winning notification image 141SG005P is displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of the big winning game or the small winning game in this way, every time the total number of winnings reaches the predetermined number, the total number of winnings reaches the predetermined number of times. You may perform the production|presentation which alert|reports that it reached.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-35 (F) to 10-35 (H), when the total hit count reaches 5 times, first, the image at the start of the big win game or the small win game A win notification image 141SG005P is displayed on the display device 5 to notify that the total number of wins is the fifth. Furthermore, a character image 141SG005Ma is displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that the total number of wins has reached five.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 10-35 (I) to 10-35 (K), when the total number of hits reaches 10, first, the image display device 5 at the start of the big win game or the small win game , a winning notification image 141SG005P for notifying that the total number of winnings is ten is displayed. Furthermore, a character image 141SG005Mb is displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that the total number of wins has reached ten.

As described above, in this modification 143SG-1, the total number of times controlled to the big hit game state or the small win game state is totaled as the total number of hits, and at the start of the big hit game or the small hit game, the total number of hits is calculated. By displaying the corresponding winning notification image 141SG005P, it is possible to notify the player of the total number of winnings. Furthermore, by displaying the character images 141SG005Ma and 141SG005Mb on the image display device 5, it is possible to inform the player that the total number of wins has reached a multiple of 5. Then, when the total number of hits reaches the upper limit that can be aggregated, the total number of hits notified by the winning notification image 141SG005P is the upper limit (upper limit number of times ), the display of the character images 141SG005Ma and 141SG005Mb is continued (notification that the total number of wins has reached a multiple of 5 is continued), so the total number of wins is Even when the total possible upper limit is reached, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, the display of the character images 141SG005Ma and 141SG005Mb on the image display device 5 can be executed regardless of whether or not the total number of wins reaches the tallyable upper limit. The game interest can be further improved when the value is reached.

Further, in this modification 143SG-1, the image display device 5 displays a hit notification image 141SG005P based on being controlled to the big win game state or controlled to the small win game state, that is, it is controlled to the big win game state. The total number of winnings is updated when the game is controlled to the small winning game state, and the winning notification image 141SG005P corresponding to the updated total number of winnings is displayed on the image display device 5, so that the updated total number of winnings is displayed. An appropriate winning notification image 141SG005P can be displayed on the image display device 5 according to the number of times.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification 143SG-1 has a game property that can mainly increase the number of balls (prize balls) in the jackpot game state or the small hit game state in the second KT state, Since the total number of times controlled to the big win game state and the small win game state in terms of game characteristics can be reported as the total number of wins by the win notification image 141SG005P, the game amusement in the second KT state can be improved.

Further, in the present modification 143SG-1, as shown in FIGS. 10-35 (H) and FIG. (Character images 141SG005Ma, 141SG005Mb) are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The character image may always be the same character image. Furthermore, when a different character image is displayed on the image display device 5 each time the total winning count reaches a multiple of 5, the character images displayed on the image display device 5 may be displayed in a predetermined order. or may be displayed randomly.

Further, in this modification 143SG-1, character images (character images 141SG005Ma, 141SG005Mb) are displayed on the image display device 5 every time the total number of winnings reaches a multiple of 5, so that the total number of winnings is displayed to the player. has reached a multiple of 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. The player may be notified that the number of hits has reached a multiple of 5.

Further, in this modification 143SG-1, character images (character images 141SG005Ma, 141SG005Mb) are displayed on the image display device 5 every time the total number of winnings reaches a multiple of 5, so that the total number of winnings is displayed to the player. has reached a multiple of 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. 5, a character image may be displayed.

Furthermore, in this modification 143SG-1, the total number of times that the game state is controlled to the big win game state and the small win game state over the period until the game state changes from the big win game state or the second KT state to the first KT state or the normal state are totaled, and an image (hit notification image 141SG005P) for informing the player of the totaled number of times (total number of wins) is displayed on the image display device 5. As shown in (L) and FIG. 10-36 (O), when the total hit number reaches the total possible upper limit (for example, 99 times), it is newly controlled to a big hit game state or a small hit game state. (When the total number of winnings reaches 100 times), the image display device 5 displays the winning notification image 141SG005P indicating that the total number of winnings is the upper limit value that can be tallied at the start of the big win game or the small winning game. may be displayed in Furthermore, when the total number of hits exceeds the upper limit value that can be aggregated in this way, but is newly controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state, FIG. 10-36 (O) to FIG. P), the winning notification image 141SG005P indicating that the total number of winnings is the upper limit value that can be tallied at the start of the big winning game or the small winning game is displayed on the image display device 5, while the total number of winnings is five. The display of the character image 141SG005Ma for notifying that the number of times has reached a multiple of .

In addition, in this modification 143SG-1, over the period until the game state changes from the big win game state or the second KT state to the first KT state or the normal state, the number of times controlled to the big win game state and the small win game state are controlled. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the total number of hits, only the number of times controlled to the jackpot game state, or a small number Only the number of times controlled to the winning game state may be counted.

In addition, in this modification 143SG-1, as shown in FIG. 10-36, by displaying a winning notification image 141SG005P on the image display device 5 at the start of the big winning game or the small winning game, the total winning is given to the player. Although the form in which the number of times is reported is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be the timing derived and displayed by the combination of , the end timing of the big hit game or the small hit game, and the like. Furthermore, as a modified example 143SG-2, the winning notification image 141SG005P is the period until the game state changes from the big win game state, the small win game state, the second KT state, etc. to the normal state or the first KT state, that is, the second KT state may be displayed all the time during execution of a plurality of times of variable display, during a big win game, and during a small win game. In this case, the winning notification image 141SG005P may be updated and displayed at the time when the game is controlled to the big winning game state or the small winning game state, so that the player can be notified of the new total number of winnings. By doing so, the player can recognize the total number of hits even during the variable display, so that the interest can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing portion 141SG of the above-described embodiment, the image display device 5 exemplifies a form capable of displaying the number of prize balls given during a jackpot game, during a special zone, during a high base, etc. However, the present invention However, the image display device 5 may be capable of displaying the net increase in the number of game balls during the jackpot game, the special zone, the high base medium, and the like. By doing so, the player can more accurately grasp the number of game balls he or she has acquired.

In addition, in the characterizing part 141SG of the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a gaming machine (so-called first-type machine) that can perform variable display of special symbols and can be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the result of the variable display. Although the form has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the big win game state based on the variable display of the special symbols, and during the small win game, It may be a gaming machine (a so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine) that can be controlled to a big hit game state based on passing a game ball through a specific area provided in the. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is such a one-type two-type mixed machine, in the normal state, the first special symbol is variably displayed by hitting the game ball into the left game area, and the first special symbol is displayed. When the big winning game state is controlled based on the variable display of the symbols, the small winning game state based on the variable display of the second special symbols by hitting the game ball into the right game area in the high base state after the big winning game is completed. A game property is provided in which a game ball is caused to enter the specific area and controlled to a big win game state.

Then, a first special period for executing the variable display of the second special figure a predetermined number of times in the high base state, and the second special figure based on the four second special figure reservation storage when the number of remaining time reduction becomes 0 times In the second special period during which the variable display is performed, different effects may be performed depending on whether the variable display results in a big win or a small win.

For example, if the result of the variable display is a big win or a small win in the variable display of the first special period, the number of times of the pseudo-continuous effect corresponding to the number of remaining variations in the first special period is executed in the variable display, and the second In the variable display during the special period, it may be possible to make it appear as if the performance symbols were derived and displayed in combination with a big win or a small win.

Further, in the characteristic portion 141SG of the embodiment, by transmitting a special zone start notification command or a special zone end notification command from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120), the effect control CPU 120 Although a form in which it can be determined whether it is in the special zone is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. You may judge whether it is in a special zone by. It should be noted that, when determining whether or not the effect control CPU 120 is in the special zone based on the number of fluctuation display times after the end of the jackpot game of the probability variable jackpot A, the CPU 103 sends the special zone start notification command and the special zone end notification. Since there is no need to send commands, these special zone start notification commands and special zone end notification commands may be excluded from the effect control commands.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 141SG of the above-described embodiment, the mode of shifting to the special zone only after finishing the jackpot game of the variable probability big hit A was exemplified. may

In addition, in the characteristic portion 141SG of the above embodiment, the special zone is set to 32 times of special figure games (32 times of fluctuation display) in the high probability high base state after the big hit game of the probability variable jackpot A. Although the form of a period is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special zone is a special zone of 32 times in a high base state (regardless of high probability or low probability) after the end of the jackpot game. It may be a period until the game is executed. That is, after the jackpot game of the non-probability variable jackpot ends, the game may shift to the special zone.

In addition, as described above, in the case of a form in which a shift to the special zone is possible after a plurality of jackpot games are completed, the number of special figure games controlled in the special zone (variation display count) is varied according to the jackpot games that have been completed. good too.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 141SG of the above-described embodiment, when the variation display result in the special zone is the big hit and the jackpot type is the probability variable big hit A, the variation pattern of the variation display is changed to the special figure variation time of 3 Although the form of executing in the variation pattern of PC1-1, which is second, is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as described above, when a form in which transition to the special zone is possible after the end of a plurality of jackpot games , the type of the big hit to be targeted for the variation pattern of the PC1-1 may be changed in the special zone according to the type of the finished big win. For example, when the transition to the special zone is made after the jackpot game of the probability variable jackpot B is completed, when the variation display result in the variable display in the special zone is the jackpot and the jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot B, the variation pattern of the variable display is changed. When the variation pattern of PC1-1 with a special figure variation time of 3 seconds is executed, and the transition to the special zone is made after the non-probable variable jackpot game ends, the variation display result in the variation display in the special zone is a jackpot and When the jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot, the variation pattern of the variation display may be executed with the variation pattern of PC1-1 having a special figure variation time of 3 seconds.

Further, in the characterizing portion 141SG of the above-described embodiment, the image display device 5 is exemplified as a form capable of displaying the value 141SG005A of the first winning ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second winning ball counter. However, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a display device different from the image display device 5, and the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter are displayed on the display device. It may be made displayable.

In addition, in the characterizing part 141SG of the above embodiment, the "game value" in the present invention is the prize balls paid out according to the winning of the game balls into any of the winning holes, and the total number of prize balls is the first prize. Although the form of displaying the value 141SG005A of the number-of-balls counter and the value 141SG005B of the number-of-second-winning-balls counter on the image display device 5 has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the "game value" in the present invention is not limited to this. The number of times controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state, the number of times controlled to the big win game state, the number of times controlled to the small win game state, or the number of times controlled to the big win game state and the small win game state The number of times controlled and the total number of times may be displayed on the image display device 5 .

Further, in the modification 143SG-1 of the above-described embodiment, the "game value" in the present invention is the sum of the number of times controlled to the big win game state and the number of times controlled to the small win game state, and these big wins A mode is illustrated in which the winning notification image 141SG005P is displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the total number of times the game state has been controlled and the number of times the game state has been controlled to the small winning game state, but the present invention is limited to this. However, the "game value" in the present invention is the prize balls paid out according to the winning of the game balls in any of the winning holes, and the total number of prize balls is the value of the first prize ball counter 141SG005A or It may be displayed on the image display device 5 as the value 141SG005B of the second winning ball counter.

In addition, in the characteristic part 141SG of the above embodiment, the first prize, which is the number of all prize balls (balls paid out by winning the big prize hole, each start prize hole, and the general prize hole) in the continuous game The value of the ball counter is 141SG005A, the number of prize balls paid out during the jackpot game of the probability variable jackpot A (balls paid out by winning the big prize mouth, each start prize mouth, and the general prize mouth) and in the special zone The value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter, which is the number of prize balls paid out (the number of prize balls paid out due to the winning of the main prize opening, each start prize opening, and the general prize opening), is displayed on the image display device 5. However, in the modification 143SG-1 of the above-described embodiment, instead of the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter, the number of times the jackpot game state was controlled during the consecutive game and Although the form in which the winning notification image 141SG005P corresponding to the total value of the number of times controlled to the small winning game state is displayed on the image display device 5 has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first number of prize balls A winning notification image 141SG005P may be displayed on the image display device 5 in addition to the counter value 141SG005A and the second winning ball counter value 141SG005B.

In addition, in the characterizing part 141SG of the above-described embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out during the big win game state, the small win game state, and the high base state is totaled, and the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball number counter and the second prize ball number counter are counted. Although the form of displaying on the image display device 5 as the value 141SG005B of the number-of-two-balls counter is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hits exemplified in Modification 113SG-1 and Modification 143SG-1 In a pachinko game machine 1 controllable during a game state, a small win game state, a first KT state and a second KT state, during the big win game state, the small win game state, the first KT state and the second KT state. The number of prize balls paid out may be totaled and displayed on the image display device 5 as the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter.

Further, in the characterizing part 141SG of the above-described embodiment, when the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball number counter or the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball number counter reaches the totalizable upper limit value, the display mode is changed from the display of the upper limit value. does not change, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter reach the upper limit value that can be tallied. If so, change the display mode to indicate that the values of these counters have reached the upper limit value that can be aggregated (for example, when the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter reaches the upper limit value "99999" or When the value 141SG005B of the second winning ball number counter reaches the upper limit value of "9999", these numerical values may be changed to display such as "Dalian Zhuangzhong".

Further, in the characterizing portion 141SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode is exemplified in which the addition effect (first addition effect and second addition effect) and the winning notification effect are executed separately, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, these addition effects and winning notification effects may be executed in conjunction with each other. Specifically, a winning notification image 141SG005N displayed on the image display device 5 as the winning notification effect is displayed on the first winning ball counter and the second winning ball counter. The addition performance may be executed by acting to be sucked.

Further, in the characterizing part 141SG in the above embodiment, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but for example, a game can be played by setting a predetermined number of bets per game using game values. can be started, and a variable display result is derived to an image display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of symbols each identifiable, thereby ending one game, and the variable display derived to the image display device It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be awarded depending on the results. In the slot machine, for example, the total number of prize balls (medals) paid out during the bonus and the number of prize balls (medals) paid out during the ART, and the prize paid out during the ART The number of balls (the number of medals) may be displayed individually, and the present invention may be applied to the display of the number of prize balls.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form of displaying the title corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach from the start of the reach effect of the super reach (characteristic part 31AK of FIGS. 8-1 to 8-12), the pachinko game machine 1 Different commands are transmitted from the main board 11 (CPU 103) to the performance control board 12 (performance control CPU 120) according to the activated state, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is activated by cold start and in the setting change state It is possible to execute a different mode of production (activation notification) when it is activated, and when changing the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1, it is notified that the RAM 102 is cleared (Fig. 9-1 to Fig. 9 -27 characteristic part 122SG), the number of prize balls counted during the consecutive game is displayed on the image display device 5 as the value 141SG005A of the first prize counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize counter, and these first prizes are displayed. Even after the value 141SG005A of the number-of-balls counter and the value 141SG005B of the number-of-second-prize-balls counter reach the totalizable upper limit, the addition effect (the first addition effect for updating the value 141SG005A of the first-number-of-price-balls counter Second addition effect for updating the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter) is executed, while not updating the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter after the addition effect. , A form that executes a winning notification effect for notifying that a game ball has won a winning hole regardless of the value of the first winning ball counter value 141SG005A or the value of the second winning ball counter value 141SG005B ( 10-1 to 10-28), but the pachinko game machine 1 may employ a plurality of these characteristic portions.

For example, when the characteristic portion 122SG and the characteristic portion 141SG are applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are changed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started without being changed. It is also possible to execute the addition effect, the award notification effect, the prize ball number notification effect, the special zone end notification effect, etc. Further, at least a part of the effect modes such as the addition effect, the winning notification effect, the prize ball number notification effect, the special zone end notification effect, etc. may be changed according to the set value of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if it is modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention.

Moreover, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game, in which the occurrence of a specific event (the winning of a game ball into one of the winning holes) a game value imparting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing shown in FIG. 10-7) capable of imparting a game value (for example, a prize ball) of a magnitude corresponding to the specific event that has occurred based on , a game value totaling means capable of totaling the given game value (for example, a part for executing the prize ball number display processing shown in FIGS. 10-14 to 10-17 by the production control CPU 120), total game value display means (for example, , a part for the performance control CPU 120 to execute the processing for displaying the number of prize balls shown in FIGS. 10-14 to 10-17), After that, a predetermined operation display is performed based on the occurrence of the specific event, but the display of the aggregated game value is not updated (for example, as shown in FIG. Even if the value 141SG005A of the 1st prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the 2nd prize ball counter have reached the tallyable upper limit, the game ball will win the prize in one of the winning openings. 1 addition performance and second addition performance are executed, but the value of the first prize ball counter value 141SG005A and the value of the second prize ball counter value 141SG005B do not change from the upper limit value), further advantageous for the player Suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting that the game is controlled to a more advantageous state (for example, a big win game state), and a title corresponding to the suggestive effect are notified. title notification means (for example, effect control CPU 120), and the title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the suggested effect (for example, 8-2 (D), (F)) game machines.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest when the total game value reaches a predetermined value. Also, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine capable of improving interest when the aggregated game value reaches a predetermined level and enhancing the performance effect, an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player is provided. A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to the above-mentioned advantageous state, and a suggestive effect execution means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a ready-to-win effect) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state and a title notification means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestive effect, wherein the title notifying means is provided with the suggestive effect when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the suggestive effect. Gaming machines capable of informing corresponding titles (for example, FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)) can be mentioned. An example of the form of this gaming machine will be described below as another form.

(Other form examples)
Characteristic portions of other embodiments will be described below. Next, the characteristic portion 112IW will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 11-1 and 11-2, a pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 112IW001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape and a game board constituting a game board surface. (gauge board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 112IW003 for supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 112IW003, a glass door frame 112IW003a having a glass window is positioned around the left side between a door open position where the front face of the game machine frame 112IW003 is opened and a door closed position where the front face is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 112IW003a, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 112IW003a is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame 112IW003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into the lock to unlock it. 112IW003a cannot be released.

The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case 112IW201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. Further, on the main board 11, a setting key 112IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, which will be described later, and a setting key 112IW051 for changing set values such as a winning probability of a big hit (ball output rate), etc., to be described later in the setting change state. A setting switch 112IW052 that functions as a setting switch is provided.

A setting-switching main body provided with operation units that can be operated by the player, such as the setting keys 112IW051 and the setting-switching switches 112IW052, is accommodated in the board case 112IW201 together with the main board 11. The setting keys 112IW051 and the setting-switching switches 112IW052 are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear right portion of the substrate case 112IW201 so that operation can be performed without opening the substrate case 112IW201.

Since the substrate case 112IW201 having the setting keys 112IW051 and the setting switch 112IW052 is provided on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is impossible to operate from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. It is possible to operate by opening the gaming machine frame 112IW003 using a predetermined door key. Also, since the setting key 112IW051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like of the game arcade, only the store clerk possessing the setting key can operate it. The setting key 112IW051 is also a switch capable of switching between ON and OFF, which will be described later. In this characterizing portion 112IW, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may also be used.

A display monitor 112IW029 and a display changeover switch 112IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 112IW029 are arranged in the substrate case 112IW201. The display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged at the upper left part of the board case 112IW201. In other words, the display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are arranged in front of the main substrate 11 in the substrate case 112IW201. Since the main board 11 cannot be viewed when the game machine frame 112IW003 is not opened, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 112IW003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

As described above, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 in the characteristic portion 112IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 112IW003 is closed. There is a possibility that the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switch 112IW052 are operated from inside the game island where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed. Therefore, in this characteristic part 112IW, as shown in FIGS. 11-2 and 11-3, a board including a setting key 112IW051 and a setting changeover switch 112IW052 is provided at the right end of the outer frame 112IW001a when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. A security cover 112IW500A is attached to cover the right side of the case 112IW201 from the rear side. This security cover 112IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member comprising a short piece 112IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 112IW500Ab extending from the rear end of the short piece 112IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko game machine 1, It is composed of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having transparency. The vertical dimension of the short piece 112IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 112IW201. Security cover 112IW500A is fixed to the right end of outer frame 112IW001a via the front end of short piece 112IW500Aa.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the long piece 112IW500Ab abuts (or approaches) the right portion of the board case 112IW201 from behind the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. Thus, the right side of the substrate case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 . Therefore, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switch 112IW052 are inoperable by the long piece 112IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-3, in the state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switch 112IW052 move together with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 to move from the long piece 112IW500Ab. Separation releases the covering state of the long piece 112IW500Ab, so that it becomes operable.

In other words, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic portion 112IW, when the game machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the security cover 112IW500A regulates the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open, the restriction state by the security cover 112IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is permitted. state.

Since the substrate case 112IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting keys 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 when the game machine frame 112IW003 is closed. Unless the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened by a game arcade clerk or the like using the door key, the setting values cannot be changed by operating the setting keys 112IW051 and the setting changeover switches 112IW052.

However, in a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a game island (not shown) of the gaming hall, even if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, for example, other pachinko gaming machines adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 A setting key 112IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set by inserting an illegal member such as a wire or a cell plate from between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a game device such as a card unit or the like installed between the spacer member and the pachinko gaming machine 1. or the setting changeover switch 112IW052 to change the set value. By maintaining the restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit including the switch 112IW052 is restricted, the fraudulent act can be suitably suppressed.

Further, even in a regulated state in which the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed and the security cover 112IW500A covers the right rear side of the board case 112IW201 including the setting keys 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052, the board can be opened through the transparent security cover 112IW500A. Since the main board 11 and the like accommodated in the case 112IW201 can be seen through, the mounting surface of the main board 11 on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted and the status of sealing seals can be easily confirmed.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generating program.

In this characteristic part 112IW, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, and the normal figure display result determination Numerical data representing the random number MR4 of , and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and the variation mode of each symbol in the variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 11-4(A), a display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. In addition to the display result determination table (setting value 3) shown in -4 (C), the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), the big hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), the loss shown in FIG. A fluctuation pattern determination table, a normal figure display result determination table (not shown), a normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), etc. are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 112IW is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of three levels from 1 to 3, where 1 is the lowest ball payout rate, and the higher the value is in the order of 1, 2, and 3, the higher the ball payout rate is. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the lowest, and the advantage increases stepwise as the value increases in the order of 2 and 3.

(Display result judgment table)
FIGS. 11-4A to 11-4C are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to respective setting values. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which hit determination values to be compared with MR1 are set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second) That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, a determination value for a big hit is set.

As shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is subject to variable display In this case, a jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 at non-probability variation, 1/32 at probability variation) than when the set value is "2" or "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. Even if is subject to variable display, the probability of winning a big hit is the same as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display (1/320 when non-variable, 1/32 when variable). do.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1" Winning a big hit with a higher probability than in some cases (1/300 when non-variable, 1/30 when variable). Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. Even if is subject to variable display, the same probability as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display (1/300 when non-variable, 1/30 when variable) wins the jackpot do.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", Winning a jackpot with a higher probability (1/280 at non-probability variation, 1/28 at probability variation) than in the case of "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. Even if is subject to variable display, the probability of winning a big hit is the same as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display (1/280 when non-variable, 1/28 when variable). do.

In other words, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to any one of the big hits shown in FIGS. If it matches with the hit determination value, it is determined to be a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C) with respect to the special symbol. That is, the winning of the jackpot is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 11-4(A) to 11-4(C) indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a big hit. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern.

Also, for example, when applied to a gaming machine in which the probability variation state ends based on the execution of the variable display of a predetermined number of times (the probability variation end number) after being controlled to the probability variation state (high probability state), the same probability variation If it is the number of ending times, it may be configured such that the variable probability continuation rate (continuous home rate) increases in the order of set value "1"<set value "2"<set value "3".

In addition, in this characteristic part 112IW, a total of three setting values 1 to 3 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine The number of setting values that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

(Jackpot type determination table)
FIG. 11-5(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In addition, in this characteristic part 112IW, when the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning hole (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed), A common jackpot type determination table is used in the case of determining the jackpot type using the reservation memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner). Although configured to be used, different tables may be provided to determine different percentages of which jackpot types are determined.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type among jackpot types A to jackpot types C based on a random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the variation display result is a jackpot pattern. It is a table referred to in order to decide either.

In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), a determination value corresponding to a random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination is assigned to each set value. Percentages of judgment values obtained are shown. In other words, the ratio of which one of the big hit types A to C is determined for each set value is shown. It should be noted that the determination value corresponding to the random number is actually assigned to the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-6 and the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. For simplicity, the percentage of assigned decision values is shown.

As shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the setting value is "1", the ratio of being determined to the jackpot type C is high, and when the setting value is "2", When the percentage of the big hit type B is determined to be high and the setting value is "3", the determination value is assigned so that the percentage of the big hit type A to be determined is high.

11-5(B), in this feature section 112IW, the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period in the jackpot game are defined for each jackpot type. It is

The fanfare period is, for example, a period during which the big win opening pre-processing of step S114 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the big win pattern is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 12 side, the big win game state is started. This is the period in which the fanfare effect as the effect action to be notified is executed.

The interval period is, for example, a period in which the process after opening the big win in step S116 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the round in which the big winning hole is opened on the effect control board 12 side, the next It is a period during which an interval production is executed as a production operation for notifying the start of the round.

The ending period is, for example, a period during which the big win ending process of step S117 is executed on the main board 11 side, and an ending effect as a production operation for notifying the end of the big win game state is executed on the effect control board 12 side. It is the period during which

As shown in FIG. 11-5(B), the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period are the longest in the case of the jackpot type A, the second in the case of the jackpot type B, and the longest in the case of the jackpot type C. set to be short.

As described above, in this characterizing section 112IW, when the set value is "1", the ratio of determination as the jackpot type C is high, so the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period tend to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the ratio of determination of jackpot type A is high, so the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period tend to be relatively long. Therefore, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the average period of the ending period become longer in the order of the setting values "1"<"2"<"3".

This characteristic portion 112IW is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (percentage of winning balls) increases in the order of setting values "1"<"2"<"3". '<'2'<'3', the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period increases in the order. With such a configuration, when the probability of winning the jackpot (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, thereby increasing gambling. can be prevented from becoming too high.

This characteristic portion 112IW is configured to be able to execute a mid-jackpot suggesting performance (details will be described later) that suggests a set value during a big-hit game. It is feasible in the period. With such a configuration, the interest in the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period can be enhanced. Also, by directing the player's interest to the effect suggesting during the big win, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the length of each period.

In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image, etc.) that is difficult for the player to notice the length of the period is executed in common.

In addition, in this characteristic part 112IW, a fanfare period, an interval period and an ending period are set for each jackpot type, and the ratio of which jackpot type is determined for each setting value is different, thereby increasing the number of jackpots. When the probability of winning (percentage of winning balls) is set to be high, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the average period of the ending period are lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed. A fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table is used in which the judgment values are set so that the ratio of selecting the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period in which relatively long periods are set is high in the order of jackpot types A<B<C. By doing so, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the average period of the ending period can be lengthened in the order of the set values "1"<"2"<"3".

In this feature portion 112IW, in any of the jackpot types A to C, the time saving control and the probability variation control executed after the end of the jackpot game state are a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature portion 112IW). It ends when the figure game is executed or the jackpot game state is entered before the special game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Alternatively, in the case of a specific jackpot type, high-precision control and time-saving control that are executed after the jackpot game state ends are continuously executed until a jackpot occurs again after the jackpot game state ends. may be made. In the case of such a specific jackpot type, a jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state, which is a so-called continuous game state. This characteristic portion 112IW is configured so that the ratio of the big hit is different for each setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, the probability variable continuation is performed for each setting value. The rate (consecutive rate) may be different.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 112IW, there is no difference in the degree of advantage between the jackpot types A to jackpot types C (for example, the number of rounds during the jackpot game, the presence or absence of time reduction control and variable probability control, the number of times of control, etc.), fanfare period, interval The period and the average period of the ending period are configured to be different, but for each jackpot type, the number of rounds during the jackpot game, the presence or absence of time reduction control and variable probability control, and the number of times of control are different, and the advantage is different. You may do so. In this case, the performance during the round may be different for each big win type, or may be the same regardless of the big win type.

In addition, in this characteristic part 112IW, according to the set value, the jackpot type when the variation display result is a jackpot is determined at different ratios from jackpot type A, jackpot type B, and jackpot type C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value, one or more of the jackpot types A, jackpot types B, and jackpot types C cannot be determined. There may be more than one. In other words, if the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs according to the set value, it is possible to not determine one of the jackpot types (the determination ratio is 0%), or to set a specific jackpot type to 100%. Determining percentages is included.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 112IW, the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period differ according to the jackpot type. It may be configured to have different periods. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be uniformly determined according to which of the set values "1" to "3". Further, for example, according to which of the set values "1" to "3", a lottery process is performed according to the selection probability according to the set value, and the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period are determined. You may

As described above, in the present characteristic part 112IW, since the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is different according to the set value, the game interest can be improved. .

In addition, in this characteristic part 112IW, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for judging the jackpot type. It may be determined using MR1, which is a random value for determination.

In addition, in this characteristic part 112IW, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (increase in the probability of big wins, the easier determination of jackpot type C as the jackpot type, etc.). Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Further, in this characteristic portion 112IW, while the jackpot probability changes according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game property itself does not change, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the game characteristics may be changed according to the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 .

For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and game balls are provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a specific round during the jackpot game. Based on passing through a predetermined count switch, the game state after the end of the big win game is controlled to a probability variable state, while the rate of the game ball passing through the count switch during the big win game differs according to the big win type. When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320, and the game ball is specially variable during high base (during time reduction control). It is good also as a game property (so-called 1 type 2 types mixed type) which controls to a jackpot game state based on passing the predetermined count switch provided in the prize-winning ball apparatus 7. FIG. Furthermore, although the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are 1 to 3 and the game performance is the same, the probability of big win is higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3, while the big win game is in progress. (For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4) may be provided.

Furthermore, in such a case where the game characteristics are changed according to the setting values, common switches may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is operated as a production switch (a game ball passes through the count switch). When the set value is 2 or 3, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time a game ball is played). It may be used as a switch for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on passing through the count switch.

(Variation pattern determination table)
In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, there is a big hit variation pattern determination table that is used when it is decided in advance that the variation display result will be "big hit", and a variation display result that is "losing". A loss variation pattern determination table used when the determination is made in advance is prepared in advance.

(Loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 11-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a loss variation pattern determination table. In this characteristic portion 112IW, a period (hereinafter also referred to as a special period) from when the setting is changed when the power is turned on until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), and a period other than that ( Hereinafter, it is also referred to as a non-special period), and is configured to use a different loss variation pattern determination table.

Specifically, in the special period, the variation pattern is determined using the first losing variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), and in the non-special period, shown in FIG. 11-6 (B) A variation pattern is determined using the second loss variation pattern determination table. In this characteristic portion 112IW, the period from when the setting is changed when the power is turned on to when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) is defined as the special period, but the present invention is limited to this. For example, the special period may be a period until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. Also, a real-time clock or the like may be used as a special period within a predetermined time period (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). Also, the period until the first big hit occurs may be set as the special period.

11-6 (A) and (B) show the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables, both of which become normal reach loss and super reach loss in the order of set values "1" < "2" < "3" Judgment values are assigned so that the percentage is high and the percentage of non-reach failures is low. With such a configuration, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differs depending on the set value, so the set value is suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are executed.

In addition, the first losing variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-6 (A) has a higher percentage of normal reach losing than the second losing variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-6 (B), and the set value Judgment values are assigned so that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between them increases. With such a configuration, in the special period, it becomes easier to recognize the difference in the frequency of normal reach execution than in the non-special period (that is, it becomes easier to recognize the suggestion of the setting value), so the motivation to play the game during the special period can be given, and the game interest can be enhanced.

In addition, for example, the variation pattern with super reach (or a specific variation pattern thereof) is determined at the same rate regardless of the difference in the set value (or regardless of the difference between the special period and the non-special period) You may do so. By doing so, depending on the setting value, the execution ratio of only a specific variation pattern (normal reach loss in this example) will differ, and the setting value is suggested by the frequency of execution of the specific variation pattern become. In addition, conversely, the selection ratio of the variation pattern that results in super reach loss may also be varied according to the set value.

In addition, the first and second losing variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 11-6 (A) and (B) are either normal reach losing or super reach losing depending on the setting value when other than non-reach losing. Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio (that is, the balance between normal reach loss and super reach loss) is different. Specifically, in the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Then, it increases by 5%), specifically, the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. is slightly increased (in this example, increased by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency between the normal reach loss and the super reach loss. In addition, it is possible to increase the difference in selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period.

In this characteristic portion 112IW, it is possible to execute setting suggestion effects at different ratios depending on the set value. It is a concept including that the execution ratio of normal reach loss and super reach loss is different depending on the set value, and that the execution ratio of only normal reach loss is different according to the set value.

In this characteristic portion 112IW, a common background image is displayed on the image display device 5 when any of the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 11-6(A) and (B) is used. Then, the variable display of the production pattern is performed. Also, when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 3, the common background image is displayed on the image display device 5, and the effect pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Note that a dedicated background image may be displayed only during a special period or during a period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game during the special period or the period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example).

In addition, not limited to the example of this characteristic part 112IW, for example, a special variation pattern that suggests a set value (for example, a variation pattern in which the aspect of the variation display of the production pattern is different from the usual, and the set value is 1 or 2 ) may be provided so that a special variation pattern can be selected only in a special period. With such a configuration as well, it is possible to give motivation to play a game during the special period, and to increase the interest in the game.

(Non-reach loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 11-7 is an explanatory diagram showing a non-reach-losing variation pattern determination table. In this characteristic portion 112IW, a plurality of types of non-reach loss variation patterns with different variation times are provided, and when the variation pattern is determined to be non-reach loss, it is further determined to be any of non-reach loss A to C. is configured to In addition, not limited to such a configuration, for example, the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. It may be configured to determine whether

As shown in FIG. 11-7, in the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table, when the setting value is "1", the ratio of being determined to be non-reach loss C (variation time 7 seconds) is high, and the setting value is "2 ”, the percentage determined to be non-reach loss B (variation time 8 seconds) is high, and if the setting value is “3”, the percentage determined to be non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds) is higher is assigned a judgment value.

In this characteristic portion 112IW, when the setting value is "1", the rate of determination as non-reach loss C is high, so the variation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the rate of determination as non-reach loss A is high, so the fluctuation time during non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of set values "1"<"2"<"3".

This characteristic portion 112IW is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (percentage of winning balls) increases in the order of setting values "1"<"2"<"3". '<'2'<'3'. With such a configuration, when the probability of winning the jackpot (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling nature can be prevented from becoming too high. can be prevented.

In this characteristic portion 112IW, the average fluctuation time is configured to be different by changing the ratio of which one of the non-reach loss A to C with different fluctuation times according to the setting value. Variation patterns other than reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) may also be provided with a plurality of types so that the variation time is different, and the selected ratio may be different according to the set value. In addition, if multiple types of fluctuation patterns (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) are provided so that the fluctuation time is different, the time of the swaying display of the production pattern and the time of high-speed fluctuation display etc. It is desirable that there is no difference in appearance.

In addition, this characteristic portion 112IW is configured so that the average fluctuation time varies depending on the set value. The period during which the stop symbol) is stopped and displayed may be different. With such a configuration, when the probability of winning the jackpot (ball output rate) is set to be high, it is possible to lengthen the period in which the fixed effect pattern (final stop pattern) is stop-displayed, that is, delay the progress of the game. , it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

In addition, in this characteristic part 112IW, variable times are set for non-reach loss A to C, respectively, and the ratio of determining which one of non-reach loss A to C is determined for each set value is different, thereby winning a big hit. When the probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average variation time is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed. may be fixedly set, and the variation time may be longer when the probability of winning the jackpot (ball output rate) is higher.

Note that this characteristic portion 112IW is provided with a shortening variation pattern having a shorter variation time than other variation patterns. For example, there is provided a variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss (variation time 1.5 seconds) whose variation time is shorter than non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds). This shortening variation pattern is configured to be used, for example, when the reserved storage number is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (eg, 3). With such a configuration, when the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit or is close to the upper limit, this state is eliminated and the variable display is performed efficiently (that is, the game can be progressed efficiently). ). Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the reserved memory number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. Therefore, in this characteristic portion 112IW, the shortening variation pattern used when the number of pending memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined number has a common variation time regardless of the set value. Regardless of the configuration of this characteristic portion 112IW, the shortening variation pattern used when the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number may also vary in variation time according to the set value.

(Display monitor 112IW029)
In this characteristic part 112IW, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of game balls entering each winning hole (big winning hole, second big winning hole, first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole, general winning hole) It is possible to calculate various types of winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases based on the totalization.

Specifically, the display monitor 112IW029 has a four-digit display. The display portion of each digit is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments each drawing a figure of "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments.

Display contents are displayed on the first and second digit display portions, and numerical values are displayed in percentage on the third and fourth digit display portions. Display No. 1 displays a short-term continuous ratio, and display No. 2 displays a short-term role ratio. In display No. 3, the total cumulative consecutive ratio is displayed, and in display No. 4, the total cumulative role ratio is displayed. Display No. 5 displays the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls, and display No. 6 displays the base (base 2) calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls. be done.

The short term here means a period during which the number of awarded balls (the number of won balls) was 6000. The period for calculating the total sum means the total period from when the calculation of the continuous ratio and the role ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the role ratio is once reset.

In the above example, the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base are calculated regardless of the game state, but they may be calculated in consideration of the game state. For example, the consecutive ratio may be the ratio of the total number of prize balls accounted for by the number of prize balls entered into the big prize opening during the jackpot game state. In addition, the role ratio is defined as the ratio of the number of prize balls entering the second starting prize opening during the high base state and the number of prize balls entering the large prize opening during the big win game state to the total number of prize balls. good too. Also, the base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

When the short-term consecutive ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, "y6." "y7." is displayed on the first digit display portion and the second digit display portion. Further, when the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) in the third-digit display section and the fourth-digit display section, and the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. is displayed, the short-term role ratio is displayed in percentage (%) on the third and fourth digit display portions.

When the total cumulative winning ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." , "A7." is displayed on the first and second digit display portions. Further, when the total cumulative continuous ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) in the third-digit display section and the fourth-digit display section, and the total cumulative continuous ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. When the cumulative role ratio is displayed, the total cumulative role ratio is displayed in percentage (percentage display) in the display portion of the third digit and the display portion of the fourth digit.

When base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, "bL." "B6." In addition, when base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) in the third and fourth digit display parts, and base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed. When displayed, the total cumulative winning ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the third digit display section and the fourth digit display section.

Furthermore, the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, base 1, and base 2 are displayed based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030 for the set value set at that time. Short-term consecutive ratio, short-term consecutive ratio, total accumulated consecutive ratio, total accumulated consecutive ratio, base 1, base 2 display can be sequentially changed.

In addition, in this characterizing section 112IW, the display monitor 112IW029 exemplifies a mode in which the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base at each setting value can be displayed. The monitor 112IW029 may be able to display only one numerical value or only any two numerical values among these continuous ratio, role ratio, and base.

In addition, in this characteristic part 112IW, a form in which the consecutive ratio, the role ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, is calculated and displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 112IW029 may display the history of the number of awarded balls without calculating the consecutive ratio, the role ratio, and the base. good.

(setting change processing)
Next, the change of the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 in this characterizing part 112IW will be described. Figures 11-8 and 11-9 are flowcharts showing the game control main process in the characterizing section 112IW. In this characteristic portion 112IW, the processing of steps 112IWS001-S002 is the same as the processing of steps S1-S2 shown in FIG.

When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 waits for the activation of the effect control means for measuring the time until the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) is activated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. A timer is set (step 112IWS003). In this case, sufficient time is set to the effect control means startup waiting timer from when the power supply to the gaming machine is started until the effect control CPU 120 is activated. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 112IWS004), and confirms whether or not the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 112IWS005). If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is not 0, it returns to step 112IWS004 and repeats the processing of steps 112IWS004 to S005. If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 112IWS006.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS003 to S005, after waiting until the effect control CPU 120 is started, the processing after step 112IWS006 is executed, and the change and confirmation of the set value, the initialization of the RAM, the restoration processing, etc. are executed. be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a set value command, an initialization command, a command for recovery, and the like, which will be described later, are transmitted before the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and a command can be omitted. can be prevented from occurring.

Next, the CPU 103 stores, for example, a factory-shipped setting flag indicating that the factory-shipped settings remain in the RAM 102 (for example, this flag is cleared even if RAM clear processing 1 and 2 and recovery processing described later are executed). (cleared when setting change processing described later is executed) is set, and in step 112IWS006, it is checked whether or not this factory default setting flag is set. do it. In addition, not limited to such an aspect, for example, a value (for example, "0" or "-") indicating that the setting value is set at the time of shipment from the factory is set, and the value of the setting value is set in step 112IWS006. It may be confirmed whether or not is the value at the time of shipment from the factory. If the factory settings remain unchanged (step 112IWS006; Yes), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

If the settings are not factory default (step 112IWS006; No), that is, if the setting values have already been changed at least once, the CPU 103 backs up the data to the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by performing the same processing as in step S4. It is determined whether or not data is saved (step 112IWS007). Specifically, at step 112IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) in the same manner as in step S5 to determine whether the data is normal. (Step 112IWS008). At step 112IWS008, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 112IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 112IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 checks whether or not a setting changing flag indicating that the setting value is currently being changed is set (step 112IWS009). ). If the setting changing flag is set (step 112IWS009; Yes), that is, if the power supply to the game machine is restarted due to a power failure or the like during the change of the setting value, the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

At step 112IWS010, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 112IWS010). Note that the CPU 103 may perform control to display a display (for example, display of "E") indicating a RAM abnormality error on the display monitor 112IW029.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is ON (step 112IWS011). If the output signal from door open sensor 112IW090 is ON, CPU 103 determines whether setting key 112IW051 is ON (step 112IWS012). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS013). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes RAM clear 1 processing (step 112IWS014). In RAM clear 1 processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, the memory area of the RAM 102 other than the area for storing performance display information such as continuous ratio, role ratio, and base is cleared, and performance display such as continuous ratio, role ratio, and base is cleared. information is retained without being cleared. In addition, in the RAM clear 1 process, the set values stored in the RAM 102 are also cleared. Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS027.

On the other hand, if the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is off (N at step 112IWS011), if the setting key 112IW051 is off (N at step 112IWS012), or if the output signal from the clear switch is off ( At step 112IWS013 N), the process does not proceed to step 112IWS014, but proceeds to loop processing.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS006 to S014, in this characteristic part 112IW, if the backup RAM is not normal (steps 112IWS007, N of S008) or if the settings for factory shipment remain unchanged (step 112IWS006 Y), if a power failure or the like occurs during the setting change (step 112IWS009 Y), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 opened. On this condition, the RAM is cleared, and the setting values after step 112IWS027 can be changed. On the other hand, unless the game machine frame 112IW003 is opened and the setting key 112IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, loop processing is executed, setting values cannot be changed, and game control does not proceed.

If the setting changing flag is not set (step 112IWS009; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS015).

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is ON (step 112IWS016). If the output signal from door open sensor 112IW090 is on, CPU 103 determines whether setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS017). If the setting key 112IW051 is ON, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation process start command indicating to start the setting confirmation process to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS018). On the effect control board 12 side, when the setting confirmation process start command is received, control is performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, or a predetermined image is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R). or emit a decorative luminous body such as a decorative LED in a predetermined manner).

Next, the CPU 103 executes setting confirmation processing (step 112IWS019).

After completing the setting confirmation process, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step 112IWS020) for returning the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state at the time when the power supply was stopped, by the same process as in step S6. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation process end command indicating that the setting confirmation process has ended to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS021). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

On the other hand, if the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is not ON (N at step 112IWS016) or if the setting key 112IW051 is not ON (N at step 112IWS017), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as in step S6. Then, a restoration process (step 112IWS022) is performed to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 by the process similar to step S7 (step 112IWS023). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes RAM clear 2 processing (step 112IWS024). In RAM clear 2 processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, the memory area of the RAM 102 other than the area for storing performance display information such as continuous ratio, role ratio, and base, and the area for storing setting values is cleared. Performance display information such as role ratios and bases, and set value information are retained without being cleared. In the game control main process shown in Figure 11-8 and Figure 11-9, when it is determined that the output signal from the clear switch is ON, the RAM clear process (RAM clear 2 process) is executed immediately. However, when it is determined that the output signal from the clear switch is on, a flag indicating that the clear switch is on is set, and necessary processing (door open sensor 112IW090, setting key 112IW051 confirmation, setting confirmation processing, setting change processing, etc.), it may be determined whether or not the flag is set, and if set, the RAM clear processing may be executed.

Next, CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from door opening sensor 112IW090 is ON (step 112IWS025). If the output signal from door open sensor 112IW090 is ON, CPU 103 determines whether setting key 112IW051 is ON (step 112IWS026). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 sets a setting changing flag (step 112IWS027).

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change process start command indicating to start the setting change process to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS028). On the effect control board 12 side, when the setting change processing start command is received, control is performed to notify that the setting is being changed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, or a predetermined image is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R). or emit a decorative luminous body such as a decorative LED in a predetermined manner).

Next, the CPU 103 executes setting change processing (step 112IWS029).

After completing the setting change process, the CPU 103 resets the setting changing flag (step 112IWS030). Also, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set set value to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS031). Also, a setting change process end command indicating that the setting change process has ended is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS032). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

On the other hand, if the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is not ON (N at step 112IWS025) or if the setting key 112IW051 is not ON (N at step 112IWS026), the CPU 103 performs the same process as in step S9. , the effect control command for instructing initialization is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS033). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

In this characteristic portion 112IW, the processing of steps 112IWS034 to S036 is the same as the processing of steps S10 to S12 shown in FIG.

Next, the setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019) will be described. FIG. 11-10(A) is a flow chart showing the setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019).

In the setting confirmation process, the CPU 103 first identifies the setting values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the identified setting values on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSA01).

Next, CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from setting key 112IW051 is ON (step 112IWSA02). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSA03). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is ON, the process proceeds to step 112IWSA02 and repeats the processing of steps 112IWSA02 to SA03. That is, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open and the setting key 112IW051 is on.

If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is not ON, the CPU 103 executes setting confirmation error processing (step 112IWSA04). After that, the process shifts to loop processing. In addition, in step 112IWSA04, for example, the CPU 103 may transmit a command indicating a setting confirmation error, and execute the setting confirmation error notification based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the command. good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may notify the error by turning on an error LED on a circuit board mounted on the gaming machine. Also, in this example, when the setting confirmation error process is executed, the error state is continued until the power is turned on again, and the process is prevented from proceeding by shifting to the loop process.

If the setting key 112IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSA05). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is ON, the process of step 112IWSA05 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is not ON (that is, if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed), the setting confirmation process is terminated.

Next, the setting change process (step 112IWS029) will be described. FIG. 11-10B is a flow chart showing the setting change process (step 112IWS029).

In the setting change process, the CPU 103 first identifies the setting values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the identified setting values on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSB01).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting switch 112IW052 is ON (step 112IWSB02). If the output signal from the setting switch 112IW052 is not ON, the process proceeds to step 112IWSB05. If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is ON (Y in step 112IWSB02), the CPU 103 updates the setting values displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSB03). For example, when "1" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 112IW029, the display of the display monitor 112IW029 is updated to "2", and when "2" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 112IW029 , the display on the display monitor 112IW029 is updated to "3", and if "3" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 112IW029, the display on the display monitor 112IW029 is updated to "1". Further, the CPU 103 stores the set values (set values after update) displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the backup area of the RAM 102 (updates and stores the set values already stored) (step 112IWSB04).

Next, CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from setting key 112IW051 is ON (step 112IWSB05). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSB06). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is ON, the process proceeds to step 112IWSB02 to repeat the processing of steps 112IWSB02 to SB06. That is, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open and the setting key 112IW051 is on, the processes of steps 112IWSB02 to SB06 are repeatedly executed.

If the output signal from door open sensor 112IW090 is not ON, CPU 103 executes setting change error processing (step 112IWSB07). After that, the process shifts to loop processing. In step 112IWSB07, for example, the CPU 103 may transmit a command indicating that there is a setting change error, and execute the setting change error notification based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the command. good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may notify the error by turning on an error LED on a circuit board mounted on the gaming machine. Also, in this example, when the setting change error process is executed, the error state continues until the power is turned on again, and the process is prevented from proceeding by shifting to the loop process. In this case, since the setting change flag remains set in step 112IWS027, the RAM clear 1 process is executed after the power is turned on again (Y in step 112IWS009, see 112IWS014). The error state will be canceled.

If the setting key 112IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSB08). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is ON, the process of step 112IWSB08 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is not ON (that is, if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed), the setting change process is terminated.

Note that the specified setting values may be displayed on the image display device 5 in step 112IWSA01 of the setting confirmation process. Further, the specified setting value may be displayed on the image display device 5 in 112IWSB01 of the setting change process. Then, subsequent processing may be executed using the image display device 5 .

Also, during execution of the setting confirmation process and setting change process shown in FIGS. mode). By notifying using the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B in this way, it is possible to suitably notify the player of the setting confirmation state or the setting change state. It should be noted that the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B may have different modes during the setting confirmation state and the setting change state.

Also, if the power is turned off during execution of the setting change process shown in FIG. 11-10, the setting change process is executed again and the updated setting values are stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM). An error may occur unless the setting change is completed by Specifically, at the start of the setting change process, a setting change flag (not erased even if the RAM is cleared) is stored in the same backup RAM as the backup RAM that stores the setting value, and at the end of the setting change process, the setting change flag is stored. If the setting change flag is ON when the flag is turned off and a process other than the setting change process (for example, game control main process) is executed, an error is assumed. As described above, in a situation where the setting change process does not proceed normally, the game arcade clerk may misunderstand that the setting change has been completed even though it has not been completed. In such a case, if the setting change is not completed, an error will occur, so that the setting change can be reliably completed.

Also, in steps 112IWSA01 and 112IWSB01 in FIG. 11-10, the current set values are read from the backup RAM and displayed. However, when the backup to the backup RAM is not performed normally, information indicating an error is displayed on the image display device 5, and the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are displayed in a mode different from that during the normal game. (For example, all segments of the 7-segment LED may be extinguished, or if all segments are lit during setting confirmation processing and setting change processing, all segments may be blinked).

FIG. 11-11 is an explanatory diagram showing the processing executed when the power is turned on. In this characteristic portion 112IW, as shown in FIG. 11-11, when the setting key 112IW051 is on when the power is turned on (and when the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on), the clear switch is turned on. If so, setting change processing (steps 112IWS005 to S010) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, setting confirmation processing (steps 112IWS015 to S017) is executed. If the setting key 112IW051 is turned off when the power is turned on, initialization processing (step S8) is executed if the clear switch is turned on, and recovery processing (step S6) is executed if the clear switch is turned off. executed.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 11-12(A) and 11-12(B), when the power is turned off (powered off) by the operation of a game hall clerk or the like, the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. The display on the display monitor 112IW029 ends when the supply stops. When the power is turned off and the large winning opening is open during a jackpot game or the like, power supply to the solenoid 82 is stopped and the large winning opening is closed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-12(C), when the game arcade clerk or the like turns on the power while operating the clear switch (if Yes in step S3 of the game control main processing), the setting key 112IW051 is turned ON. The setting change process is executed by the CPU 103 on the condition that it is, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029.

In the state where the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 112IW029, as shown in FIG. Numerical values displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 are sequentially updated (for example, updated in the order of 1→2→3→1→ . . . each time the setting switch 112IW052 is operated).

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-12(E), the CPU 103 stores the set values displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the RAM 102 based on the fact that the setting key 112IW051 has been turned off by the operation of the game arcade clerk or the like. stored (updated) in the backup area of At this time, the CPU 103 displays on the display monitor 112IW029, based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030, the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term consecutive ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, Display base 1 and base 2. Also, if the reserve memory is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the reserve memory is cleared. 11-12(A) (timing when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off), when the big winning opening is closed, RAM clear processing is executed when the setting is changed. Since the memory related to the big win is erased, the big prize opening remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 ends the setting change processing, and enters a state in which a game can be performed, that is, a state in which a variation display result, a jackpot type, a lottery for determination of a variation pattern, payout of prize balls, and the like can be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-12(F), the CPU 103 displays "E.E.E.E." It is possible to

In addition, in the setting change processing in this characterizing portion 112IW, as an initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029, a mode of displaying the setting values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. As an initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process, the most disadvantageous setting value for the player (“1” in the case of this characteristic portion 112IW) or the most advantageous setting value for the player. A set value (“3” for the characteristic portion 112IW) may be displayed.

(Special pattern normal processing)
Next, the processing of the special symbol normal processing (step S110) in this characterizing portion 112IW will be described. FIGS. 11-13 and 11-14 are flowcharts showing special symbol normal processing (step S110) in special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total reserved memory number (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) (step 112IWS101). For example, it checks the count value of a total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number.

If the total reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second reserved storage number is 0 (step 112 IWS 102). For example, it is checked whether the count value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the second reserved storage number is 0 or not. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). is set with data indicating "second" (step 112 IWS 103). If the second reserved memory number is 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special symbol pointer (step 112 IWS 104).

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS102 to S104, in this characterizing section 112IW, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. In addition, not limited to such a mode, for example, according to the starting winning order in which the game ball wins in the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol and may be configured to execute

Next, in the RAM 102, the CPU 103 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 112 IWS 105). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=1 in the first reserved storage buffer is read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 . Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 .

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 112 IWS 106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and the number of storage areas in the first reserved storage buffer Shift content. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", 1 is subtracted from the count value of the second reserved storage number counter, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103, in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102, saves the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) Each stored random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n−1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reservation storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reservation storage buffer of the RAM 102 Store the random value in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or 2nd reserved storage number)=1, 2, 3, 4.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step 112IWS107). Note that the CPU 103 saves the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 .

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS108). As already described, in this characteristic unit 112, the processing of step 112IWS011 is executed to transmit the set value command when the setting change processing is executed at power-on. A set value command is transmitted each time the variable display is started by executing the processing of 112 IWS 108 .

Even if the same variation pattern is used, if the configuration is such that a different variation pattern command is sent for each set value, variation pattern commands for the total number of variation patterns x the number of set values (3 in this example) are required. As a result, the data capacity may increase. Therefore, for example, a set value command is transmitted only when a specific variation pattern is used, and only the variation pattern command corresponding to the specific variation pattern is provided with the variation pattern command for the number of set values. good. In this case, for example, the set value command is transmitted only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation with the highest output frequency is used, and only the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation is the fluctuation pattern command for the number of set values may be provided.

In this example, the same set value command is sent as the set value command (see step 112IWS011) when the power is turned on and the set value command when fluctuation starts (see step 112IWS108). It is not limited to any form. For example, a set value command for when power is turned on and a set value command for when fluctuation starts may be configured as separate commands so that different set value commands are sent when power is turned on and when fluctuation starts. good.

Also, in this example, a case is shown in which the set value command is transmitted separately from the variation pattern command at the start of variation. good too. In this case, for example, even if the variation pattern command specifies the same variation pattern A, if the set value is "1", the variation pattern command A-1 is transmitted, and if the set value is "2" A variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and if the set value is "3", a variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted.

In addition, regardless of the setting value on the game control microcomputer 100 side, the same variation pattern command (for example, variation pattern command A) can be configured to be output, and depending on which setting value is on the effect control CPU 120 side It may be configured such that which variation pattern is selected or the selection ratio is varied. For example, if the setting value is 1, the variation pattern A-1 is selected or the variation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, or if the setting value is 2, the variation pattern A-2 is selected or the variation pattern A-2 is high Alternatively, if the set value is 3, the variation pattern A-3 may be selected or the variation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high percentage. In this case, for example, the variation patterns A-1 to A-3 have the same variation time, but may differ in the presence/absence of pseudo-runs, the number of pseudo-runs, and the presence/absence and type of reach. Further, in this case, for example, when the setting value command cannot be received normally, the variation pattern A-1 is uniformly selected, or when the setting value command is not normally received, the selection ratio dedicated to may be configured to select a variation pattern with .

Also, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of fluctuation has been shown, but the configuration is not limited to such a mode, and for example, the set value command may be transmitted at the end of fluctuation.

Further, the CPU 103 performs control for transmitting a background designation command to the effect control board 12 according to the current game state (step 112IWS109). In this case, the CPU 103, for example, performs control to transmit the probability variable state background designation command in the case of the probability variable state, and performs control to transmit the time reduction state background designation command in the case of the time saving state, and is in the normal state In this case, control is performed to send a normal state background designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination from the random number buffer area, and executes the big hit determination module. The big-hit determination module is a program that compares a predetermined big-hit determination value (see FIG. 11-4) with a random number MR1, and executes a process of determining a big-hit if they match. That is, it is a program for executing the process of judging a big hit.

If the value of the random number MR1 does not match any jackpot determination value (N of step 112IWS110), the process proceeds to step 112IWS116.

If the value of the random number MR1 matches any of the jackpot determination values (Y in step 112IWS110), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step 112IWS113). Next, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 11-5) to determine the type ("jackpot type A , "jackpot type B" or "jackpot type C") is determined as the jackpot type (step 112, IWS 114).

Further, the CPU 103 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 112 IWS 115). For example, when the jackpot type is "jackpot type A", "01" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is "jackpot type B", "02" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is "jackpot type C", "03" is set as data indicating the jackpot type.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step 112IWS116). For example, when the jackpot flag is not set, the winning symbol "-" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, for example, when the big hit flag is set, the big hit symbol "7" is determined as the special symbol stop symbol. It should be noted that a different special symbol stop symbol may be determined according to the type of the big hit.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 112IWS117).

The characteristic portion 112IW includes a first invention described below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, one described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that gambling properties may become too high when the advantage is set to be high. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the first invention for solving the problem,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5, etc.) that can execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set.
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, fanfare period, interval period, ending period, etc. during the jackpot game) differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 11-5).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

In addition, as a game machine of means A of the first invention for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP-A-2010-200902,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5, etc.) that can execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set.
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period, the interval period, the ending period, etc. during the jackpot game) varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 11-5),
moreover,
A game value giving means (for example, A part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing shown in FIG. 10-7),
A game value totalizing means capable of totaling the given game value (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize ball number display process shown in FIGS. 10-14 to 10-17);
A tally game capable of displaying the tallyed tally game value, and updating the display of the tally game value with a predetermined operation display (for example, a first addition effect or a second addition effect) based on the occurrence of the specific event. Value display means (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the number of prize balls display processing shown in FIGS. 10-14 to 10-17),
with
After the total playing value reaches a predetermined value, the total playing value display means displays a predetermined action based on the occurrence of the specific event, but does not update the display of the total playing value (for example, FIG. 10). As shown in -21, even if the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter displayed on the image display device 5 have reached the total possible upper limit value , based on the fact that the game ball has entered one of the winning holes, the first addition performance and the second addition performance are executed, the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter. is a portion where the value does not change from the upper limit), and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gambling nature from becoming too high. In addition, it is possible to improve interest when the total game value reaches a predetermined value.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the first invention,
The fanfare control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 11-5 (B))
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the first invention,
The interval control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 11-5 (B))
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the first invention,
The ending control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 11-5 (B))
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the first invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing games using gaming values,
a game value imparting means for imparting a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means has a first set value (for example, a set value of 3), and the game value imparted by the game value imparting means is larger than the first set value so as to match the game value used in the game. It can be set to a second setting value (for example, setting value 1) that occupies a higher proportion,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is longer when set to the second set value than when set to the first set value (for example, FIGS. 11-5 (A) and (B) reference)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the first invention,
In a predetermined control period in an advantageous state, it is described that a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting a set value (for example, a suggestive effect during a big hit) may be provided, According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase interest in the predetermined control period in the advantageous state.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 7 of the first invention,
Equipped with production execution means capable of executing production,
The effect executing means can execute a common effect (for example, a common fanfare effect, an interval effect, an ending effect, etc.) during a predetermined control period in an advantageous state, regardless of a set value. Such a configuration can enhance the interest of the predetermined control period in advantageous conditions.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 8 of the first invention,
It is stated that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be determined in advance according to the set value. can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 9 of the first invention,
A gaming machine that can be controlled in a plurality of types of advantageous states,
The game control means can be controlled to any one of the plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, jackpot types A to C) by different ratios based on the set value,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the advantageous state (see, for example, FIG. 11-5(B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 10 of the first invention,
A game machine capable of playing games using game media (for example, game balls),
Based on the entry of the game medium into a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712) a game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12);
Information display means (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means is capable of displaying set values (for example, a display monitor 112IW029, as shown in FIG. 11-12, where the continuous ratio, role ratio, and base can be displayed).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in manufacturing costs.
Incidentally, the correspondence between means 2 to 10 and means 1 of the first invention can be applied to the correspondence between means 2 to 10 and means A.

The characteristic portion 112IW also includes a second invention described below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, disclosed in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that gambling properties may become too high when the advantage is set to be high. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the second invention for solving the problem,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5, etc.) that can execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set.
A predetermined control period (for example, variable time) for variable display differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 11-7)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

In addition, as a game machine of means A of the second invention for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP-A-2010-200902,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5, etc.) that can execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set.
A predetermined control period (for example, variable time) for variable display varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 11-7),
moreover,
A game value giving means (for example, A part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing shown in FIG. 10-7),
A game value totalizing means capable of totaling the given game value (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize ball number display process shown in FIGS. 10-14 to 10-17);
A tally game capable of displaying the tallyed tally game value, and updating the display of the tally game value with a predetermined operation display (for example, a first addition effect or a second addition effect) based on the occurrence of the specific event. Value display means (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the number of prize balls display processing shown in FIGS. 10-14 to 10-17),
with
After the total playing value reaches a predetermined value, the total playing value display means displays a predetermined action based on the occurrence of the specific event, but does not update the display of the total playing value (for example, FIG. 10). As shown in -21, even if the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter displayed on the image display device 5 have reached the total possible upper limit value , based on the fact that the game ball has entered one of the winning holes, the first addition performance and the second addition performance are executed, the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter. is a portion where the value does not change from the upper limit), and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gambling nature from becoming too high. In addition, it is possible to improve interest when the total game value reaches a predetermined value.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the second invention,
The variable display period differs depending on the setting value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 11-7)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the second invention,
It is stated that the period during which the display result of the variable display is displayed may be changed according to the set value. can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the second invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing games using gaming values,
a game value imparting means for imparting a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means has a first set value (for example, a set value of 3), and the game value imparted by the game value imparting means is larger than the first set value so as to match the game value used in the game. It can be set to a second setting value (for example, setting value 1) that occupies a higher proportion,
The predetermined control period for variable display is longer when set to the second set value than when set to the first set value (see, for example, FIG. 11-7).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the second invention,
It is stated that the predetermined control period for the variable display may be determined in advance according to the set value. can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the second invention,
variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern;
variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means;
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns having different variable display periods at different ratios according to a set value (see, for example, FIG. 11-7).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 7 of the second invention,
A game machine capable of playing games using game media (for example, game balls),
Based on the entry of the game medium into a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712) a game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12);
Information display means (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means is capable of displaying set values (for example, a display monitor 112IW029, as shown in FIG. 11-12, where the continuous ratio, role ratio, and base can be displayed).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in manufacturing costs.
Incidentally, the correspondence between means 2 to 7 and means 1 of the second invention described above can be applied to the correspondence between means 2 to 7 and means A.

It should be noted that the configuration indicated by the characterizing portion 112IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration indicated by other characterizing portions such as the characterizing portion 31AK to form a gaming machine. For example, when executing the pre-game suggesting performance, the during-game suggesting performance, and the during-the-big-hit suggesting performance shown in the characteristic portion 112IW, a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the pre-game suggesting performance, the during-the-game suggesting performance, and the during-the-big-hitting suggesting performance. Sometimes, in the same manner as the characterizing part 31AK, the title corresponding to the pre-game suggestive effect, the during-game suggestive effect, and the big-hit suggestive effect may be configured to be able to be notified.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 248F to Characteristic Portion 250F)
Next, the characteristic portion 248F to the characteristic portion 250F will be described. The characteristic part 248F relates to the continuation rate suggesting effect, the characteristic part 249F relates to the setting suggesting effect pattern A, and the characteristic part 250F relates to the setting suggesting effect pattern B, respectively.

(About specs)
FIG. 12-1 is a diagram for explaining specifications for each set value. As shown in FIG. 12-1, in the setting 1, the jackpot probability at the time of non-probability variation is 1/319, the jackpot probability at the time of probability variation is 1/95, and the ST continuation rate is 65.29%. In setting 2, the jackpot probability at the time of non-probability variation is 1/280, the jackpot probability at the time of probability variation is 1/75, and the ST continuation rate is 73.87%. In setting 3, the jackpot probability at the time of non-probability variation is 1/250, the jackpot probability at the time of probability variation is 1/60, and the ST continuation rate is 81.37%. Here, the ST continuation rate indicates the probability that the ST state will continue. The ST state means a state in which the variable probability state is controlled after the jackpot game state and the variable probability state continues until the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times. In the characteristic portion 248F to the characteristic portion 250F, ST continues 100 times after the big hit game state. The continuation rate is the probability of being repeatedly controlled to the jackpot gaming state, which is an advantageous state, the probability of being repeatedly controlled to the same gaming state (for example, variable probability), the probability of being repeatedly controlled to the high base state (for example, variable probability, It is a concept that includes the probability controlled in the order of short time and probability).

By setting the data shown in FIG. 12-1, in the case of setting 1, the jackpot probability at non-probability variation, the jackpot probability at probability variation, and the ST continuation rate are all the lowest among the set values. On the other hand, in the case of setting 3, the jackpot probability at non-variable probability, the jackpot probability at probability variable, and the ST continuation rate are all the highest among the set values. Therefore, the relationship of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3 is advantageous to the player. Note that the set value may be provided in a plurality of stages, for example, in stages 1 to 6, which are advantageous to the player.

(Regarding the flow of various effects from the characteristic part 248F to the characteristic part 250F)
FIG. 12-2 is a timing chart showing the flow of various effects. FIG. 12-2(A) shows the flow of the continuation rate suggestion effect, which is the effect of the characteristic part 248F, and FIG. 12-2(B) shows the flow of the setting suggestion effect (pattern A), which is the effect of the characteristic part 249F. , FIG. 12-2(C) shows the flow of the setting suggestion effect (pattern B), which is the effect of the characteristic portion 250F.

First, the continuation rate suggestion effect, which is the effect of the characteristic portion 248F shown in FIG. 12-2(A), will be described. The continuation rate suggesting effect is an effect suggesting a different ST continuation rate for each set value. Note that since the continuation rate differs for each set value, suggesting the continuation rate is also suggesting the set value. As shown in FIG. 12-2(A), the continuation rate suggesting effect is an effect executed in the ending period after the jackpot game state. After the jackpot game state is over, information such as entering the ST and the number of winning balls is shown to the player as an image for a predetermined period of time. A continuation rate suggesting effect may be executed during the ending period. After that, the ST state continues for 100 fluctuations as the ST period.

Next, the setting suggestion rendering (pattern A), which is the rendering of the characteristic portion 249F, shown in FIG. 12-2(B) will be described. The setting suggesting effect is a effect that suggests which one of a plurality of stages of set values is set. In the setting suggestion effect of pattern A, when the jackpot game state is controlled during the variable display of 1 to 20 rotations, which is the early number of ST periods of 100 times after the jackpot game state and the ending period are completed. A setting suggestion effect is executed during the round. Further, in the setting suggesting effect of pattern A, the setting suggesting effect is not executed when a big win is achieved between the variable displays of 21 to 100 rotations. In other words, in the setting suggestion effect of pattern A, when it is controlled to the jackpot game state at any number of times from the 1st to 20th rotations in the ST period that is advantageous for the player, at any of the 21st to 100th rotations. It can be said that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is higher (ratio of 100:0) than when the jackpot game state is controlled by the number of times.

Next, the setting suggestion effect (pattern B), which is the effect of the characteristic portion 250F shown in FIG. 12-2(C), will be described. In pattern B, similarly to pattern A, the setting suggestion effect is executed. In the setting suggestive effect of pattern B, the first set suggestive effect period is the variable display period of 1 to 20 rotations, which is the earliest number of ST periods of 100 times after the end of the jackpot game state and the ending period. there is A setting suggestion performance is executed during a round when the variable display during the first setting suggestion performance period is controlled to a jackpot game state. In addition, in the setting suggestion effect of pattern B, the period of the variable display of 21 to 100 rotations in the ST period is the second setting suggestion effect period. A setting suggestion performance is executed during a round when the variable display during the second setting suggestion performance period is controlled to a jackpot game state. Here, between the first set suggestion performance period and the second set suggestion performance period, the performance mode of the set suggestion performance executed when the jackpot game state is controlled is different. Further, in the ST period which is advantageous for the player, when it is controlled to a big hit game state in the first set suggestion performance period of the 1st to 20th rotations, the jackpot game is played in the second set suggestion performance period of the 21st to 100th rotations. The execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is higher than when it is controlled by the state.

Here, the continuation rate of the ST state is constant in a gaming machine with no set value. Therefore, even if the continuation rate suggesting effect is executed in such a gaming machine, it lacks interest. However, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (A), the continuation rate suggestion effect that suggests to the player the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state in the ST state is executed on a gaming machine with a set value. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the suggestive performance, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Also, the continuation rate suggesting effect is a effect that is executed during the ending period that takes a relatively long time. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention when the jackpot game state ends, and the game becomes more interesting.

Also, the setting suggestion effect of pattern A is executed during the round. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the round game and improve the interest in the game during the round game.

In addition, the setting suggestion effect of pattern B is also executed during the round. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the round game and improve the interest in the game during the round game.

(Regarding the characteristic part 248F)
Next, the continuation rate suggestion effect, which is the effect of the characteristic part 248F, will be described in detail. FIG. 12-3 is a diagram showing a continuation rate suggestion effect determination table. The continuation rate suggestion effect determination table is a table used in the continuation rate suggestion effect process or the pending continuous effect process, which will be described later. Using the continuation rate suggestion effect determination table, it is determined whether or not the effect is to be executed, and if so, which effect (character A, character B, character C or character D) is to be executed. A continuation rate suggestion effect determination table is stored in the ROM 121 .

As shown in the continuation rate suggestion effect determination table, in setting 1, the ratio of determination without effect is 88%, the ratio of character A is determined by 5%, the ratio of character B is determined by 4%, and character C is determined. 3%, and there is no percentage determined for character D (0%). In setting 2, the percentage determined without effect is 88%, the percentage determined as character A is 3%, the percentage determined as character B is 5%, the percentage determined as character C is 4%, and the percentage determined as character D. There is no percentage determined to be (0%). In setting 3, the percentage determined without any effect is 87%, the percentage determined as character A is 3%, the percentage determined as character B is 4%, the percentage determined as character C is 5%, and the percentage determined as character D. is 1%.

Due to the setting of the data shown in FIG. 12-3, in the continuation rate suggestive effect processing, the ratio of selecting no effect is high, and the continuation rate suggestive effect is not easily executed. In addition, the ratio of the effects to be executed is "character A>character B>character C" for setting 1, "character B>character C>character A" for setting 2, and "character B>character C>character A" for setting 3. , "character C>character B>character A>character D". That is, since the appearance rate of the character differs depending on the set value, it is possible to suggest a different ST continuation rate for each set value from the aspect of the character. Also, since character D appears only in setting 3, which is the most advantageous, it is determined that setting 3, which is the highest setting when character D appears, has the lowest determination ratio. Any character may be displayed at a rate of 100% without being determined without any effect.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, characters A to C are possible modes with any set value. Therefore, it is possible to preferably suggest a set value according to the aspects of these characters having different execution ratios, and the interest in the game is improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-3, the effect mode of the continuation rate suggesting effect includes a character D that is determined to be set to setting 3 with a high continuation rate. According to this, when the character D whose execution rate is low appears, the high setting is determined, so that the set value can be favorably suggested, and the interest in the game is improved.

FIG. 12-4 is a flow chart showing an example of the continuation rate suggestion effect processing. The continuation rate suggestion effect process is a process executed during the ending effect process (S177).

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a big hit from the normal state (248FS001). Whether or not it is a so-called first hit, which is a jackpot from a normal state, is determined based on a command designating a game state. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is a big hit from the normal state (Y in 248FS001), the process ends. In other words, control is performed so that the continuation rate suggesting effect is not executed in the first hit. Note that the continuation rate suggesting effect may be executed at the first hit. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that there is no big hit from the normal state (N in 248FS001), it determines the effect content of the continuation rate suggesting effect by the continuation rate suggesting effect determination table according to the set value. (248FS002), move to 248FS003.

At 248FS003, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the continuation rate suggesting effect. When the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the continuation rate suggesting effect (Y at 248FS003), it sets to execute the determined continuation rate suggesting effect (248FS004), and ends the process. As a result, the continuation rate suggesting effect is set to be executed during a predetermined period of the ending period. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the continuation rate suggesting effect (N in 248FS003), the process ends.

It should be noted that the continuation rate suggesting effect is not necessarily executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed when execution has been determined, but may be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, even if the continuation rate suggesting effect is executed based on the operation of the push button 31B operable by the player, and the continuation rate suggesting effect is not executed if the push button 31B is not operated during the operable period. good. In this way, the player's desire to operate can be improved. Further, when the continuation rate suggesting effect is executed using the operation means, a promotion image that encourages the operation of the operation means may be displayed, or the promotion image may not be displayed.

Further, although there were many cases where the continuation rate suggesting effect was not executed, the continuation rate suggesting effect by the characters A to D may be executed at a rate of 100%. Even in such a case, it is desirable that the appearance rate of character D for which setting 3 is determined be lower than the appearance rates of the other characters. As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being revealed to the player immediately.

FIG. 12-5 is a diagram showing an example of a holding continuous effect determination table and a holding continuous effect effect determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 121. FIG. In the characteristic part 248F, a holding consecutive effect may be executed. The holding series performance refers to whether or not the holding storage information (holding information) related to the variable display includes holding storage information (holding storage information that will be a so-called holding series) that will be a big hit (whether it will be a holding series). When prefetching processing is performed and the holding memory information for a big win is included, a performance for suggesting that the holding memory information for a big win is included (holding series suggesting performance) is executed by a performance control CPU 120.例文帳に追加is. In the holding consecutive effect, an effect using a character similar to the aforementioned continuation rate suggesting effect is executed. Then, the current set value is suggested by the mode of the character executed in the holding continuous effect.

The holding continuous effect determination table of FIG. 12-5(A) is used for determining whether or not to execute the holding continuous effect when there is the holding storage information of the big win. As shown in FIG. 12-5(A), it is set such that the percentage of execution of the holding continuous effect is 70% and the percentage of non-executing the holding continuous effect is 30%. In addition, when there is the reservation storage information that becomes a big hit, the reservation consecutive effect may be executed at a rate of 100%.

12-5(B) shows an effect determination table for when there is a holding continuous effect, which effect (character A, character B, character C or character D) is to be executed when it is decided to execute the holding continuous effect. used to determine As shown in FIG. 12-5(B), in setting 1, the percentage determined to be character A is 30%, the percentage determined to be character B is 20%, the percentage determined to be character C is 10%, and the percentage determined to be character C is 10%. The ratio determined for D is set to be 40%. Also, in setting 2, the percentage determined to be character A is 10%, the percentage determined to be character B is 30%, the percentage determined to be character C is 20%, and the percentage determined to be character D is 40%. is set to be Further, in setting 3, the ratio of character A is determined to be 10%, the ratio of character B to be determined is 20%, the percentage of character C is determined to be 30%, and the percentage of character D is determined to be 40%. is set to be

By setting the data shown in FIG. 12-5(B), in the holding continuous effect process, when the holding continuous effect is executed, the ratio selected as the effect to be executed is the same as the character D is the highest, and its ratio is constant regardless of the set value. That is, the character D appearing only in setting 3 of the continuation rate suggesting effect does not suggest the set value in the holding continuous effect. However, since the character D appears only at a very low probability when the continuation rate suggesting performance is executed, the performance appears at a high rate when the holding consecutive performance is executed, so that the amusement of the game is improved. can be done. Further, when the character D does not become a holding group even though the character D has appeared, it can be said that the high setting is confirmed.

Focusing on characters other than character D, the ratios selected as the effects to be executed are "character A>character B>character C" in the case of setting 1, and "character B>character C>character A" in the case of setting 2. , and in the case of setting 3, "character C>character B>character A". With such a setting, the setting value is suggested by executing the holding consecutive effect.

FIG. 12-6 is a flow chart showing an example of the holding continuous effect process. The pending continuous effect process is a process executed during the ending effect process (S177). First, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the inside of the pending memory buffer (248FS010), and determines whether or not there is a big hit pending memory (248FS011). When the performance control CPU 120 determines that there is a big hit pending memory (Y at 248FS011), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pending continuous performance from the pending continuous performance determination table (248FS012), and shifts to 248FS013. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that there is no big hit pending memory (N in 248FS011), the process proceeds to 248FS015.

At 248FS013, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the holding continuous effect. When the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the pending continuous effect (Y at 248FS013), it determines the content of the effect from the effect determination table when the continuous continuous effect is present (248FS014), and shifts to 248FS016. Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets to execute the determined content (248FS016), and ends the process. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the holding continuous effect (N in 248FS013), the process proceeds to 248FS015.

In 248FS015, the effect control CPU 120 determines the contents of the effect from the continuation rate suggestion effect determination table. Here, the continuation rate suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 12-3 is used even when there is no big hit pending memory and when the pending continuous effect is not executed. Thus, even in the case of a big win in which no holding consecutive performance is executed, the lottery for the continuation rate suggesting performance is executed every time, so that the interest in the big win can be improved. Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets to execute the determined content (248FS016), and ends the process.

Note that the continuation rate suggestion effect processing and the continuation rate suggestion effect processing described above may be collectively executed within the same flow. In such a case, in the case of a big hit from the normal state, the holding consecutive effect may not be executed.

In addition, since the same character as the continuation rate suggesting effect appears in the holding consecutive effect, the interest in the game can be improved by combining the continuation rate suggesting effect and the holding consecutive effect. It should be noted that different characters may be displayed in the holding consecutive effect and the continuation rate suggesting effect.

(Regarding the setting suggestion effect executed in the characteristic portion 249F)
Next, the setting suggestion effect executed in the characteristic portion 249F will be described. FIG. 12-7 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of setting suggestion effect. FIG. 12-7 shows an example of a big hit within the 1st to 20th rotations of ST in the setting suggestion effect pattern A shown in FIG. 12-2(B). As shown in FIG. 12-7(A), the image display device 5 executes an effect indicating that a big win has been achieved. In addition, a remaining number display 249F001 indicating the number of remaining fluctuations is displayed on the upper right of the screen. The remaining count display is decremented by one each time the variable display is executed. FIG. 12-7(A) shows a case where a big hit is achieved in the remaining 97 spins of the third spin.

Next, the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 12-7(B) is executed during the period during the big win round. In the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect using the push button 31B is executed as the setting suggestion effect for the number of times corresponding to the remaining number of times up to ST20. A setting suggestion remaining image 249F002 indicating the number of remaining setting suggestion effects is displayed on the right side of the screen. In addition, a button image 249F003 imitating the push button 31B is displayed in the center of the screen, and the number of remaining setting suggestion effects is indicated by characters "17 chances!" Thus, in the ST period, since the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect increases as soon as possible in the ST period, the setting suggestion is to win the jackpot early in the 1st to 20th rotations of the ST as a predetermined period. It is possible to increase the execution ratio of the production.

FIG. 12-7(C) is a diagram showing a case where the setting suggestion effect is not executed. As shown in FIG. 12-7(C), when a pattern in which the setting suggesting effect is not executed is selected or when the push button 31B is not operated, the setting suggesting effect is not executed and nothing is displayed on the screen. is not displayed either. On the other hand, FIG. 12-7(D) is a diagram showing a case where the setting suggestion effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 12-7(D), when the pattern for executing the setting suggesting effect is selected and the player operates the push button 31B, the character image 249F004 is displayed on the screen as the setting suggesting effect. be.

A plurality of types of button images 249F003 shown in FIG. 12-7(B) may be provided. For example, a button image corresponding to the stick controller 31A may be provided so that when the stick controller 31A is operated, the character image 249F004 appears more often than when the push button 31B is operated. Further, when the button image corresponding to the stick controller 31A is displayed, the appearance rate of any one character image among the plurality of types of character images 249F004 may be increased. For example, when the button image corresponding to the stick controller 31A is displayed, the character D suggesting a high setting may appear at a high rate, or may always appear (the character D is confirmed). good too. Also, even if there is only one operation means, the appearance ratio of the character images may differ according to the change in the shape, color, etc. of the button image.

Also, the character image 249F004 shown in FIG. 12-7(D) may appear twice or more because the setting suggestion effect by the button image 249F003 is executed multiple times. In such a case, when the character image 249F004 is displayed for the second and subsequent times, it may be displayed side by side with the character image 249F004 displayed by the previous operation. Alternatively, the previous display may be updated to display a new character image 249F004. Also, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect may be increased by changing the display mode of the previous character image 249F004 (for example, taking a pose with a high reliability of the setting suggestion effect, changing the color of the clothes (e.g., change to a color with a higher Also, the reliability may be displayed in percentage along with a plurality of character images 249F004, and an effect may be made such that the percentage display corresponding to the character image 249F004 corresponding to the actual set value increases. In this way, it is possible to improve the reliability of the setting suggestion effect in accordance with the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect that is executed a plurality of times.

FIG. 12-8 is an explanatory diagram showing a setting suggestion effect determination table. The setting suggesting effect determination table indicates whether or not the setting suggesting effect is executed in the setting suggesting effect process in the case of a jackpot within 1 to 20 rotations in the ST period, and which effect (character A, character A, Table used to determine whether character B, character C or character D) is to be executed. A setting suggestion effect determination table is stored in the ROM 121 .

As shown in the setting-suggestion effect determination table, in setting 1, 88% is determined without effect, 5% is determined as character A, 4% is determined as character B, and 4% is determined as character C. The determined percentage is 3%, and the character D has no determined percentage (0%). In setting 2, the percentage determined without effect is 88%, the percentage determined as character A is 3%, the percentage determined as character B is 5%, the percentage determined as character C is 4%, and the percentage determined as character D. There is no percentage determined to be (0%). In setting 3, the percentage determined without any effect is 87%, the percentage determined as character A is 3%, the percentage determined as character B is 4%, the percentage determined as character C is 5%, and the percentage determined as character D. is 1%.

Due to the setting of the data shown in FIG. 12-8, in the setting suggestion effect processing, when the jackpot is within 1 to 20 rotations from the ST start, the ratio of selecting no effect is high, and the setting suggestion effect is difficult to execute. It's becoming In addition, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the ratio of selection as the effect to be executed is "character A > character B > character C" in the case of setting 1, and "character B >Character C>Character A", and in the case of setting 3, "Character C>Character B>Character A". That is, since the appearance rate of the character differs according to the set value, it is possible to suggest the set value from the character's mode. Also, since character D appears only in setting 3, which is the most advantageous, it is determined that setting 3, which is the highest setting when character D appears, has the lowest determination ratio. Any character may be displayed at a rate of 100% without being determined without any effect.

FIG. 12-9 is a flow chart showing an example of setting suggestion effect processing. The setting suggestion effect process is a process executed during the big hit effect process (S176). First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit is a big hit within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of the ST (249FS001). The effect control CPU 120 confirms the number of times stored in the variation number counter for counting the number of times of variable display during the ST, thereby determining whether or not the jackpot is within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of the ST. judge. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that the hit is a jackpot within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of the ST (Y in 249FS001), the effect content of the setting suggestion effect is determined according to the setting suggestion effect determination table corresponding to the set value. Determine (249FS002) and move to 249FS003. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that there is no big hit within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of the ST (N in 249FS001), the process ends.

At 249FS003, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect. When the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the setting suggesting effect (Y in 249FS003), it sets so as to execute the setting suggesting effect corresponding to the ST remaining number of times (249FS004), and ends the process. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the setting suggestion effect (N in 249FS003), the process ends.

Here, as shown in FIG. 12-9, when it is controlled to be a big hit in the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of ST, and when it is controlled to be a big hit in the 21st to 100th rotations from the start of ST. The execution ratio is different (the setting suggestion effect is not executed in the 21st to 100th times). In this way, in the ST state, when it is controlled to the big hit game state at any of the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of the ST, and at the time of any of the 21st to 100th rotations from the start of the ST, the big hit is achieved. Since the execution ratio of the setting suggesting performance is different between when it is controlled to the game state, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the execution timing of the performance suggesting the setting, and the interest in the game is improved.

In particular, when the jackpot is controlled in the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of the ST, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the jackpot is controlled in the 21st to 100th rotations from the start of the ST (in the 21st to 100th times Since the setting suggestion performance is not executed), by controlling to the big win game state at the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of the ST, the interest is improved by continuing the big win game state and attention is paid to the execution of the setting suggestion performance. be able to.

In addition, the 21st to 100th rotation from the start of ST is the number of times after the 1st to 20th rotation, so when it is controlled to the ST state, the jackpot game at the 1st to 20th rotation faster than the 21st to 100th rotation Even if it is controlled by the state, it is possible to prevent the player from thinking that he/she has suffered a loss (for example, he/she cannot fully see the effect of watching only during the ST).

Also, the period up to the 20th rotation after the start of the ST is set as a period including the 1st to 20th rotations but excluding the 21st to 100th rotations. In this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed when the jackpot game state is controlled within the predetermined period. It should be noted that if the period up to the 20th rotation after the start of the ST is a special period in which the setting suggestive effect may be executed when controlled to the jackpot game state, an effect may be executed. good. For example, during the period up to the 20th rotation after the start of the ST, the background may be changed, or a telop indicating a special period may be displayed.

Also, in the 21st to 100th rotations including the 1st to 20th rotations, the lottery for the setting suggestion effect is not executed by the same table, but a different table is used for each variable display or for multiple times. may be executed. In such a case, the earlier the number of times, the higher the ratio and reliability of execution of the setting suggestion effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-8, when the big hit is controlled in the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of the ST, the setting with higher reliability than when the big hit is controlled in the 21st to 100th rotations from the start of the ST Since the suggesting effect is executed (the setting suggesting effect is not executed in the 21st to 100th times), the reliability of the setting suggesting effect is high. The high reliability of the setting suggestion effect means that the setting difference becomes more conspicuous, so that the player can easily guess which set value it is. In this way, attention can be drawn to the setting suggesting effect when the big hit is controlled in the 1st to 20th rotations in the ST state, and the amusement of the game is improved.

(Regarding Modified Example of Characteristic Portion 249F)
FIG. 12-10 is an explanatory diagram showing a setting suggestion effect determination table of a modification. FIG. 12-10(A) shows a setting suggestion effect determination table for ST1-20 rotations, and FIG. 12-10(B) shows a setting suggestion effect determination table for ST21-100 rotations. As shown in FIG. 12-10, in the modified example, different tables are used for ST1-20 rotations and ST21-100 rotations, but the setting suggesting effect is executed regardless of the number of fluctuations. Also, in the modified example, even when the jackpot is achieved in any number of STs, a setting suggesting effect in which some kind of character appears is executed. These tables are stored in the ROM 121. FIG.

The setting suggestion effect determination table for ST 1 to 20 rotations in FIG. 12-10 (A) indicates that any setting suggestion effect (character A, character B, character C or character D). In setting 1, the percentage determined to be character A is 50%, the percentage determined to be character B is 30%, the percentage determined to be character C is 20%, and the percentage determined to be character D is not (0%). be). In setting 2, the percentage determined to be character A is 20%, the percentage determined to be character B is 50%, the percentage determined to be character C is 30%, and the percentage determined to be character D is not (0%). be). In setting 3, the percentage determined to be character A is 20%, the percentage determined to be character B is 30%, the percentage determined to be character C is 40%, and the percentage determined to be character D is 10%.

The setting suggestion effect determination table for ST21 to 100 rotations in FIG. 12-10 (B) indicates which setting suggestion effect (character A , Character B, Character C or Character D). In setting 1, the percentage determined to be character A is 40%, the percentage determined to be character B is 30%, the percentage determined to be character C is 30%, and the percentage determined to be character D is not (0%). be). In setting 2, the percentage determined to be character A is 30%, the percentage determined to be character B is 40%, the percentage determined to be character C is 30%, and the percentage determined to be character D is not (0%). be). In setting 3, the percentage determined to be character A is 30%, the percentage determined to be character B is 30%, the percentage determined to be character C is 35%, and the percentage determined to be character D is 5%.

By setting the data shown in FIGS. 12-10 (A) and (B), in the setting suggestion effect processing, when a big hit occurs from the start of the ST to the end of the ST, no effect is not selected. , one of the effects is always executed. The ratio selected as the effect to be executed is different between 1 to 20 rotations from the ST start and 21 to 100 rotations from the ST start. Within 1 to 20 rotations from the ST start, the ratio selected as the effect to be executed is "character A > character B > character C" in the case of setting 1, and "character B >Character C>Character A", and in the case of setting 3, "Character C>Character B>Character A>Character D". In addition, within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of the ST, the ratio selected as the effect to be executed is "character A> character B = character C" in the case of setting 1, and "character C" in the case of setting 2. Character B>Character A=Character C", and in the case of setting 3, "Character C>Character A=Character B>Character D".

With such a setting, the character corresponding to the set value is character A in setting 1, character B , setting 3, the appearance rate of the character C is high. However, the appearance rate of the character with the highest appearance rate for each set value is higher in the case of within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST than in the case of within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST. Therefore, it can be said that the reliability of the set value for the character is higher in the case of 1 to 20 rotations from the ST start than in the case of 21 to 100 rotations from the ST start. Also, if the character D appears regardless of the number of fluctuations, setting 3 is determined. It should be noted that the contents of the effect to be executed may differ between the case of 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST and the case of 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST.

(Regarding the setting suggestion effect executed in the characteristic portion 250F)
Next, the setting suggestion effect executed in the characterizing portion 250F will be described. FIG. 12-11 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 12-11 shows an example of when a big hit is made within ST1-20th rotation and when a big hit is made within ST21-100th rotation in setting suggestion effect pattern B shown in FIG.12-2(C). ing. As shown in FIG. 12-11(A), which shows the case where the jackpot is hit within ST1 to 20th rotation, the image display device 5 executes an effect indicating that the jackpot has been hit. In addition, a remaining number display 250F001 indicating the number of remaining fluctuations is displayed on the upper right of the screen. The remaining count display is decremented by one each time the variable display is executed. FIG. 12-11(A) shows a case where a big win is achieved in the remaining 97 rotations of the third rotation after the start of the ST.

Next, the first setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 12-11(B) is executed during the big win round. In the first setting suggesting effect, a darts effect is executed in which the arrow image 250F002 is directed toward the target image 250F004 on which "O" and "X" are drawn. When a big hit is achieved within the 1st to 20th rotations of ST, an effect is executed in which the arrow can be thrown four times at any rotation speed. "4 chances!" above the target image 250F004 is characters indicating that there is an effect in which the arrow can be thrown 4 times. When the push button 31B is pressed while the button image 250F003 imitating the push button 31B displayed at the lower right of the screen is displayed, the arrow image 250F002 flies toward the target image 250F004.

FIG. 12-11(C) is a diagram showing a case where the setting suggestion effect is not executed. As shown in FIG. 12-11(C), when the arrow image 250F002 hits the "x" of the target image 250F004, the "x" of the failure image 250F005 indicating that the setting suggestion effect has failed appears on the screen. displayed in the center. On the other hand, FIG. 12-11(D) is a diagram showing a case where the setting suggestion effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 12-11(D), when the arrow image 250F002 hits the "○" of the target image 250F004, the character D image 250F006, for example, is displayed from a plurality of characters assuming that the setting suggestion effect is successful. be.

As shown in FIG. 12-11(E), which shows the case where the jackpot is hit within the 100th spin from ST21, the image display device 5 executes an effect indicating that the jackpot has been hit. In addition, a remaining number display 250F001 indicating the number of remaining fluctuations is displayed on the upper right of the screen. The remaining count display is decremented by one each time the variable display is executed. FIG. 12-11(E) shows a case where a big win is achieved in the remaining 45 rotations of the 55th rotation after the start of the ST.

Next, the second setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 12-11(F) is executed during the big win round. In the second setting suggestion effect, a bowling effect is executed in which the pin images 250F008 are knocked down by throwing the ball image 250F007 toward the six pin images 250F008. When a big hit is achieved within the ST21 to 100th rounds, a bowling performance is executed in which the ball can be thrown twice at any number of rounds. "Two chances!" above the pin image 250F008 is a character indicating that there is an effect in which the ball can be thrown twice. When the push button 31B is pressed while the button image 250F003 imitating the push button 31B displayed at the lower right of the screen is displayed, the ball image 250F007 rolls toward the pin image 250F008.

FIG. 12-11(G) is a diagram showing a case where the setting suggestion effect is not executed. As shown in FIG. 12-11(G), if the ball image 250F007 does not hit the pin image 250F008, or if the pin image 250F008 does not all fall down in one throw, it indicates that the setting suggestion effect has failed. "X" which is the failure image 250F005 is displayed in the center of the screen. On the other hand, FIG. 12-11(H) is a diagram showing a case where the setting suggestion effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 12-11(H), when the ball image 250F007 hits the pin image 250F008 and all the pin images 250F008 fall down, it is determined that the setting suggesting effect is successful, and a plurality of characters, for example, the character C image 250F009. is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 12-11, when the big hit is controlled in the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of the ST, and when the big hit is controlled in the 21st to 100th rotations from the start of the ST, the production mode of the setting suggestion production is different. different. In this way, the effect mode of the setting suggestion performance is different between when the jackpot game state is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations in the ST state and when the jackpot game state is controlled at the 21st to 100th rotations. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the execution trigger of the effect suggesting the setting, and the interest in the game is improved.

FIG. 12-12 is a diagram showing a setting suggestion effect determination table. FIG. 12-12(A) shows a setting suggestion effect determination table for ST1-20 rotations, and FIG. 12-12(B) shows a setting suggestion effect determination table for ST21-100 rotations. These tables are stored in the ROM 121. FIG.

FIG. 12-12(A) shows setting suggestion effect determination table for ST 1-20 spins. In the setting suggestion effect process, if the hit is a jackpot within 1-20 spins from the start of the ST, whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed, This is a table used for determining which setting suggestion effect (character A, character B, character C, or character D) is to be executed when executed. In setting 1, the percentage determined without effect is 82%, the percentage determined as character A is 7%, the percentage determined as character B is 6%, the percentage determined as character C is 5%, and the percentage determined as character D. There is no percentage determined to be (0%). In setting 2, the percentage determined without effect is 82%, the percentage determined as character A is 5%, the percentage determined as character B is 7%, the percentage determined as character C is 6%, and the percentage determined as character D. There is no percentage determined to be (0%). In setting 3, the percentage determined without any effect is 77%, the percentage determined as character A is 5%, the percentage determined as character B is 6%, the percentage determined as character C is 7%, and the percentage determined as character D is 5%.

FIG. 12-12 (B) ST21-100 rotation setting suggestion effect determination table shows whether or not setting suggestion effect is executed in the setting suggestion effect process, if the jackpot is within 21-100 rotations from the start of the ST, This is a table used for determining which setting suggestion effect (character A, character B, character C, or character D) is to be executed when executed. In setting 1, the percentage determined without any effect is 88%, the percentage determined as character A is 5%, the percentage determined as character B is 4%, the percentage determined as character C is 3%, and the percentage determined as character D. There is no percentage determined to be (0%). In setting 2, the percentage determined without effect is 88%, the percentage determined as character A is 3%, the percentage determined as character B is 5%, the percentage determined as character C is 4%, and the percentage determined as character D. There is no percentage determined to be (0%). In setting 3, the percentage determined without effect is 86%, the percentage determined as character A is 3%, the percentage determined as character B is 4%, the percentage determined as character C is 5%, and the percentage determined as character D. is 2%.

By setting the data shown in FIGS. 12-12 (A) and (B), in the setting suggestion effect process, if the jackpot is within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of the ST, regardless of the number of rotations from the start of the ST , the ratio of selecting no effect is high, making it difficult to execute the setting suggestion effect. In addition, when the effect is executed, the ratio selected as the effect to be executed is "character A>character B>character C" in the case of setting 1, and "character B>character C" in the case of setting 2. C>Character A", and in the case of setting 3, "Character C>Character B>Character A".

With such a setting, the character corresponding to the set value is character A in setting 1, character B , setting 3, the appearance rate of the character C is high. However, the appearance ratio is higher in the cases within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of ST than in the cases within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of ST. Therefore, it can be said that the reliability of the set value for the character is higher in the case of 1 to 20 rotations from the ST start than in the case of 21 to 100 rotations from the ST start. Also, if the character D appears regardless of the number of fluctuations, setting 3 is determined.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-12, when the big hit is controlled in the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of the ST, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the big hit is controlled in the 21st to 100th rotations from the start of the ST. is high. In this way, by controlling the jackpot at the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of the ST, interest is improved by continuing the jackpot game state, and attention can be paid to the execution of the setting suggestion performance.

In addition, the 21st to 100th rotation from the start of ST is the number of times after the 1st to 20th rotation, so when it is controlled to the ST state, the jackpot game at the 1st to 20th rotation faster than the 21st to 100th rotation Even if it is controlled by the state, it is possible to prevent the player from thinking that he/she has suffered a loss (for example, he/she cannot fully see the effect of watching only during the ST).

Also, the period up to the 20th rotation after the start of the ST is set as a period including the 1st to 20th rotations but excluding the 21st to 100th rotations. In this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed when the jackpot game state is controlled within the predetermined period. In the period up to the 20th rotation after the start of the ST, an effect is executed indicating that this is a special period in which the rate of execution of the setting suggestion effect is higher than that of the 21st and subsequent rotations when the jackpot game state is controlled. You can do so. For example, during the period up to the 20th rotation after the start of the ST, the background may be changed, or a telop indicating a special period may be displayed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-12, when the big hit is controlled in the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of the ST, the setting with higher reliability than when the big hit is controlled in the 21st to 100th rotations from the start of the ST Suggestion production is executed. The high reliability of the setting suggestion effect means that the setting difference becomes more conspicuous, so that the player can easily guess which set value it is. In this way, attention can be drawn to the setting suggesting effect when the big hit is controlled in the 1st to 20th rotations in the ST state, and the amusement of the game is improved.

FIG. 12-13 is a flow chart showing an example of setting suggestion effect processing. The setting suggestion effect process is a process executed during the big hit effect process (S176).

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit is a big hit within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of the ST (250FS001). The effect control CPU 120 confirms the number of times stored in the variation number counter for counting the number of times of variable display during the ST, thereby determining whether or not the jackpot is within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of the ST. judge. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that the jackpot is within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of the ST (Y in 250FS001), the effect content of the setting suggestion effect is determined by the setting suggestion effect determination table for the ST 1 to 20 rotations. Determine (250FS002) and move to 250FS003. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to 250FS005 when it determines that there is no big hit within 1 to 20 rotations from the start of the ST (N at 250FS001).

At 250FS003, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect. When the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the setting suggesting effect (Y at 250FS003), it sets the darts effect to be performed four times as the setting suggesting effect (250FS004), and ends the process. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the setting suggestion effect (N in 250FS003), the process ends.

At 250FS005, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot is achieved within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of the ST. The effect control CPU 120 confirms the number of times stored in the variation number counter for counting the number of times of variable display during the ST, thereby determining whether or not the jackpot is within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of the ST. judge. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that the jackpot is within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of the ST (Y in 250FS005), the effect content of the setting suggestion effect is determined by the setting suggestion effect determination table for ST21 to 100 rotations. Determine (250FS006) and move to 250FS007. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that there is no big hit within 21 to 100 rotations from the start of the ST (N at 250FS005), the process ends.

At 250FS007, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect. When the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the setting suggesting effect (Y at 250FS007), it sets the bowling effect to be performed twice as the setting suggesting effect (250FS008), and ends the process. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the setting suggestion effect (N in 250FS007), the process ends.

It should be noted that the setting suggesting effect may be always executed when a big win is achieved during the ST. Even in such a case, the setting-suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate for a jackpot within 1 to 20 rotations from the ST start than for a jackpot within 21 to 100 rotations from the ST start. It is desirable to Also, the appearance rate of only the character with the highest appearance rate corresponding to the set value may differ depending on the number of rotations from the start of the ST.

(Regarding modified examples of characteristic parts)
The features 248F to 250F have been described above with reference to the drawings. Included in the invention. Modifications of the characteristic portions 248F to 250F will be described below.

The continuation rate suggestion effect shown in FIG. 12-2(A) may be executed at the start of the ST state, which is the start of the special state, and at the end of the ST state, which is the end of the special state. Specifically, the continuation rate suggesting effect may be executed at least either at the start of the ST period (ST 1st rotation) or at the end of the ST period (ST 100th rotation). In such a case, a variation pattern that is not selected in the ST2 to 99th rotations should be selected as the variation pattern. In particular, in the 100th spin, since a long variation pattern is selected to display the acquired balls, the continuation rate suggesting effect may be executed during the displayed balls display period. . In addition, as the continuation rate suggestive effect, the effect suggested by the color of the effect around the screen of the image display device 5, the effect suggested by the aspect of the character, the effect suggested by the display content of the characters, the effect suggested by the character aspect At least one of (for example, the color of the light guide plate that reflects the light incident from the side and emits it to the front side) may be executed.

Further, when the continuation rate suggesting effect is executed, it is not automatically executed on the pachinko game machine 1 side, but is executed by the player operating the operating means at a timing different from usual or by a different method. can be Specifically, the continuation rate suggesting effect may be executed when the back button operation is executed by long-pressing the button or inputting a command such as a cross key.

An effect control command specifying a display result is transmitted from the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120 side. Then, the above-described holding continuous effect may be executed based on the reception of the command. In such a case, if the effect control command specifying the display result is not normal due to some influence, the effect control CPU 120 limits the execution of the holding continuous effect in the same effect mode as the continuation rate suggesting effect. do it. In this way, it is possible to prevent suggesting incorrect information to the player. It is also possible to predetermine a restricted effect, such as not executing only the effect in which the character D whose high setting is determined appears.

The CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 transmits information about set values as shown in step 112IWS031 in FIG. 11-9, step 112IWS108 in FIG. 11-13, and the like. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-4, the effect control CPU 120 executes the continuation rate suggesting effect based on the information regarding the setting value. In such a case, if the set value command as the information on the set value is not normal, the effect control CPU 120 may limit the execution of the continuation rate suggestion effect of high continuation determination. In this way, it is possible to prevent suggesting an erroneous set value to the player without reducing the number of executions of the continuation rate suggesting effect. Instead of limiting, a continuation rate suggesting effect that suggests low continuation may be executed.

The continuation rate suggesting effect and the pending continuous effect are not effects that simply make a character appear, but are effects in which the continuation rate or the like is indicated as a result of execution of some effect such as the above-described roulette effect or bowling effect. good too.

Regarding the continuation rate suggesting performance, the case where the continuation rate suggesting performance is executed when there is no big hit from the normal state has been explained. However, the continuation rate suggesting effect may be executed even when the jackpot is from the normal state. Also, in such a case, the holding consecutive effects may be executed at the same time, or the execution of the holding consecutive effects may be restricted (not executing the holding consecutive effects at the first hit, etc.).

The continuation rate suggesting effect may increase in reliability by continuously entering the ST state. By doing so, the game becomes more interesting when the ST state continues. Conversely, if the ST state ends immediately (for example, ends with one ST), the continuation rate suggestion effect is executed at the end of the ST. It should be executed. In this way, even if the ST state ends at an early stage, the set value is suggested, so when the possibility of high setting is suggested, the player can be encouraged to continue the game. , interest increases.

As shown in FIG. 12-9, when the setting suggestion effect is controlled to be a big hit in the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of the ST, the execution ratio is higher than when it is controlled to be a big hit in the 21st to 100th rotations from the start of the ST. was getting higher. However, when a big win is controlled at the 21st to 100th rotations from the start of the ST, the execution ratio of setting suggestion performance may be made higher than when the big win is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of the ST. Specifically, when the number of times is just before the end of the ST, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect may be set higher than when the number of times is the number of times immediately after the start of the ST. In this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the execution of the setting suggesting performance while giving a sense of security when the player is controlled to the ST state and is controlled to the jackpot game state at a number of times later than the number of times after the start of the ST state. .

The CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 transmits information about set values as shown in step 112IWS031 in FIG. 11-9, step 112IWS108 in FIG. 11-13, and the like. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggestion effect process of FIG. 12-9 based on the information regarding the set value. In such a case, if the set value command as the information on the set value is not normal, the effect control CPU 120 may execute a setting suggestion effect of low setting. In this way, it is possible to prevent suggesting an erroneous setting value to the player without reducing the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect. In addition, without making a temporary decision (temporary setting) to execute the setting suggestion effect of the low setting, only the high setting confirmation pattern is not executed, and the setting suggestion effect selected by lottery is executed. may be made. Alternatively, the setting suggestion effect may not be executed.

As shown in FIG. 12-7, in the invention relating to the characteristic portion 249F, the case where the effect using the operating means for the remaining number of times up to the 20th rotation of ST is executed has been described. However, the performance using the operating means may not be executed. In addition, instead of drawing lots for each remaining number of times, a lottery may be executed for a plurality of times as one setting suggestion effect.

As shown in FIG. 12-12, when the setting suggestion effect is controlled to be a big hit in the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of the ST, the execution ratio is higher than when it is controlled to be a big hit in the 21st to 100th rotations from the start of the ST. was getting higher. However, when a big win is controlled at the 21st to 100th rotations from the start of the ST, the execution ratio of setting suggestion performance may be made higher than when the big win is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of the ST. Specifically, when the number of times is just before the end of the ST, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect may be set higher than when the number of times is the number of times immediately after the start of the ST. In this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the execution of the setting suggesting performance while giving a sense of security when the player is controlled to the ST state and is controlled to the jackpot game state at a number of times later than the number of times after the start of the ST state. .

The CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 transmits information about set values as shown in step 112IWS031 in FIG. 11-9, step 112IWS108 in FIG. 11-13, and the like. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggestion effect process of FIGS. 12-13 based on the information regarding the set value. In such a case, if the set value command as the information on the set value is not normal, the effect control CPU 120 may execute a setting suggestion effect of low setting. In this way, it is possible to prevent suggesting an erroneous setting value to the player without reducing the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect. In addition, without making a temporary decision (temporary setting) to execute the setting suggestion effect of the low setting, only the high setting confirmation pattern is not executed, and the setting suggestion effect selected by lottery is executed. may be made. Alternatively, the setting suggestion effect may not be executed.

12-3, the setting suggesting effect of FIG. 12-8, and the setting suggesting effect of FIG. 12-12, the presence or absence of the effect and the character when the effect is executed are determined at the same time. However, a table for determining the presence/absence of the effect and a table for determining the character when the effect is executed may be provided separately.

The continuation rate suggesting effect and the setting suggesting effect may be executed not only when the big win is controlled, but also when the game is lost. Also, in such a case, various effects may be executed when the ST period ends without a big win being executed, or when such a state continues a plurality of times.

The round in which the setting-suggesting effect pattern A and the setting-suggesting effect pattern B are executed may be determined in advance. Also, the round to be executed may be determined by random lottery. Also, these effects may be executed during the ending period. Also, the timing of execution may differ according to the number of remaining STs.

It should be noted that the controls in the characteristic portions described above may be applied in combination with each other. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute an effect related to the setting suggestion.

(Description of the Invention Regarding Characteristic Portion 248F)
As described above, the characteristic portion 248F includes the following inventions related to the characteristic portion 248F described above. Conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting change operation, and can execute control of an advantageous state for the player based on the set setting values. rice field. In such a pachinko game machine, one of giraffe, elephant, and lion is displayed during the variable display of the identification information according to the set value before and after the change of the set value to suggest the set value. There was a gaming machine (see, for example, JP-A-2010-200902). In addition, there is a game machine that maintains a high probability state until variable display of identification information is executed a specific number of times (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-218044).

However, in the case where the game machine disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-218044 executes the effect suggesting the setting as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, there is room for improvement in the effect suggesting the setting. In order to solve such problems, the characteristic portion 248F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process, etc.) that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) that have different advantages for the player; ,
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means (for example, ST state) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, ST state) that increases the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) For example, with a CPU 103),
The probability of being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state differs depending on the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-1, the ST continuation rate is different),
It is possible to execute a continuation rate suggesting effect to suggest to the player the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-2(A), a continuation rate suggesting effect can be executed. be).

According to such a configuration, the continuation rate suggesting effect is executed to suggest to the player the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state in the special state. improves.

In addition, as a game machine according to the characteristic part 248F that solves the problem of executing an effect suggesting a setting as in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 in a game machine like Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-218044,
(A) A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process, etc.) that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) that have different advantages for the player; ,
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means (for example, ST state) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, ST state) that increases the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) For example, with a CPU 103),
The probability of being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state differs depending on the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-1, the ST continuation rate is different),
It is possible to execute a continuation rate suggesting effect to suggest to the player the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-2(A), a continuation rate suggesting effect can be executed. be),
moreover,
A game value giving means (for example, A part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing shown in FIG. 10-7),
A game value totalizing means capable of totaling the given game value (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize ball number display process shown in FIGS. 10-14 to 10-17);
A tally game capable of displaying the tallyed tally game value, and updating the display of the tally game value with a predetermined operation display (for example, a first addition effect or a second addition effect) based on the occurrence of the specific event. Value display means (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the number of prize balls display processing shown in FIGS. 10-14 to 10-17),
with
After the total playing value reaches a predetermined value, the total playing value display means displays a predetermined action based on the occurrence of the specific event, but does not update the display of the total playing value (for example, FIG. 10). As shown in -21, even if the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter displayed on the image display device 5 have reached the total possible upper limit value , based on the fact that the game ball has entered one of the winning holes, the first addition effect and the second addition effect are executed, the value of the first prize ball counter is 141SG005A and the value of the second prize ball counter is 141SG005B. A gaming machine characterized by a portion where the value of does not change from the upper limit).
According to this feature, the continuation rate suggesting effect is executed to suggest to the player the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state in the special state. . In addition, it is possible to improve interest when the total game value reaches a predetermined value.

(2) In the game machine of (1) above,
The continuation rate suggesting effect is a effect executed when the advantageous state ends (for example, the continuation rate suggesting effect is executed during the ending period).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the end of the advantageous state, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above,
A plurality of types of presentation modes are provided for the continuation rate suggestive presentation, including presentation modes that can be executed with any set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-3, characters A to C have any set value can be done even if

According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably suggest the set value, and the interest in the game is improved.

(4) In the game machine of (3) above,
The plurality of types of continuation rate suggesting effects include an effect mode in which it is determined that a high continuation rate is set, which is highly advantageous for the player (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-3, a high continuation rate is Character D, which is determined to be set to setting 3, is included).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably suggest the set value, and the interest in the game is improved.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
Reserving storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing information about variable display as reserved storage information;
Determination means (for example, S110 in FIG. 5) for determining whether or not to set the advantageous state based on the pending storage information;
a determination means (for example, S101 in FIG. 5) for determining whether or not the advantageous state is established prior to the determination by the determination means;
During the advantageous state, when the holding storage information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state is stored in the holding storage means based on the determination result of the determining means, the control is performed to the advantageous state. (For example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the holding continuous effect of FIG. 12-6) capable of executing the holding continuous effect suggesting
The holding continuous effect executing means can execute the holding continuous effect in a performance mode similar to the continuation rate suggesting effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-5, the holding continuous effect is similar to the continuation rate suggesting effect character).

According to such a configuration, the amusement of the game is improved by combining the continuation rate suggesting effect and the holding continuous effect.

(6) In the gaming machine of (5) above,
Determination information output means (e.g., game control microcomputer 100 CPU103) capable of outputting determination information (e.g., effect control command specifying the display result) regarding the determination result of the determination means,
The holding continuous effect execution means is
executing the holding continuous effect based on the determination information output from the determination information output means (for example, executing the holding continuous effect based on the effect control command designating the display result);
When the determination information output from the determination information output means is not normal, the execution of the holding continuous effect in the same effect mode as at least the continuation rate suggesting effect is restricted (for example, effect control specifying the display result If the command is not normal, the effect control CPU 120 limits the execution of the holding continuous effect in the same effect mode as the continuation rate suggesting effect).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent incorrect information from being suggested to the player.

(7) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
Furthermore, an operation means (for example, push button 31B) that can be operated by the player is provided,
The continuation rate suggesting effect is executed based on the operation of the operating means (for example, the continuation rate suggesting effect is executed based on the push button 31B being operated).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to operate.

(8) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (7) above,
Setting value information output means capable of outputting setting value information that can specify which setting value is set (for example, CPU 103 of game control microcomputer 100, step 112IWS031 in FIG. 11-9, step 112IWS031 in FIG. 11-13 step 112 IWS 108);
Based on the set value information output from the set value information output means, the continuation rate suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120, the continuation rate suggestion effect of FIG. 12-4) capable of executing the continuation rate suggestion effect ) and further comprising
The continuation rate suggesting effect execution means confirms that the predetermined continuation rate is set at least at a high advantage for the player when the set value information output from the set value information output means is not normal. (For example, if the set value command is not normal, the performance control CPU 120 limits the execution of the continuation rate suggestive effect of high setting confirmation).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an erroneous set value from being suggested to the player without reducing the number of executions of the continuation rate suggestion effect.
The correspondence between (2) to (8) and (1) in the characteristic portion 248F described above can be applied to the correspondence between (2) to (8) and (A).

(Description of the Invention Regarding Characteristic Portion 249F)
As described above, the characteristic portion 249F includes the following inventions related to the characteristic portion 249F described above. Conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting change operation, and can execute control of an advantageous state for the player based on the set setting values. rice field. In such a pachinko game machine, one of giraffe, elephant, and lion is displayed during the variable display of the identification information according to the set value before and after the change of the set value to suggest the set value. There was a gaming machine (see, for example, JP-A-2010-200902). In addition, there is a game machine that maintains a high probability state until variable display of identification information is executed a specific number of times (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-218044).

However, when executing an effect suggesting a setting as in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 on a game machine as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-218044, there is room for improvement with respect to the trigger for executing the effect suggesting the setting. rice field. In order to solve such problems, the characteristic portion 249F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process, etc.) that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) that have different advantages for the player; ,
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means (for example, ST state) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, ST state) that increases the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) For example, with a CPU 103),
The probability of being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state differs depending on the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-1, the ST continuation rate is different),
In the special state, when it is controlled to the advantageous state for the first time and when it is controlled to the advantageous state for the second time different from the first time, it is controlled to the advantageous state. The execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect that suggests to the player is different (for example, as shown in FIG. The execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is different between when the jackpot is controlled at the 100th rotation (the setting suggestion effect is not executed at the 21st to 100th times)).

According to such a configuration, since the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect differs between when the first control in the special state is performed in the advantageous state and when the second time in the special state is controlled in the advantageous state, It is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution trigger of the performance suggesting the setting, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, as a game machine according to the characteristic part 249F that solves the problem of executing an effect suggesting a setting like the one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902,
(A) A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process, etc.) that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) that have different advantages for the player; ,
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means (for example, ST state) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, ST state) that increases the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) For example, with a CPU 103),
The probability of being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state differs depending on the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-1, the ST continuation rate is different),
In the special state, when it is controlled to the advantageous state for the first time and when it is controlled to the advantageous state for the second time different from the first time, it is controlled to the advantageous state. The execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect that suggests to the player is different (for example, as shown in FIG. The execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is different between when the jackpot is controlled at the 100th rotation (the setting suggestion effect is not executed at the 21st to 100th times)),
moreover,
A game value giving means (for example, A part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing shown in FIG. 10-7),
A game value totalizing means capable of totaling the given game value (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize ball number display process shown in FIGS. 10-14 to 10-17);
A tally game capable of displaying the tallyed tally game value, and updating the display of the tally game value with a predetermined operation display (for example, a first addition effect or a second addition effect) based on the occurrence of the specific event. Value display means (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the number of prize balls display processing shown in FIGS. 10-14 to 10-17),
with
After the total playing value reaches a predetermined value, the total playing value display means displays a predetermined action based on the occurrence of the specific event, but does not update the display of the total playing value (for example, FIG. 10). As shown in -21, even if the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter displayed on the image display device 5 have reached the total possible upper limit value , based on the fact that the game ball has entered one of the winning holes, the first addition effect and the second addition effect are executed, the value of the first prize ball counter is 141SG005A and the value of the second prize ball counter is 141SG005B. A gaming machine characterized by a portion where the value of does not change from the upper limit).
According to this feature, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect differs between when the first control in the special state is performed in an advantageous state and when the second time in the special state when the control is performed in an advantageous state. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution opportunity of the suggested performance, thereby improving the amusement of the game. In addition, it is possible to improve interest when the total game value reaches a predetermined value.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The advantageous state is a state constituted by repeating a predetermined game a plurality of times (for example, a state of repeating a round game),
The setting suggesting effect is a effect executed during the predetermined game (for example, the setting suggesting effect is executed during the round).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the predetermined game, and the interest in the game is improved.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above,
When controlled to the advantageous state at the first time, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is higher than when controlled to the advantageous state at the second time (for example, in FIG. 12-9 As shown, when the jackpot is controlled in the 1st to 20th rotations from the start of the ST, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the jackpot is controlled in the 21st to 100th rotations from the start of the ST (211th to 100th times In this case, the setting suggestion effect is not executed)).

According to such a configuration, by controlling to be in an advantageous state at the first time, the continuous advantageous state improves the interest and draws attention to the execution of the setting suggesting effect.

(4) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
The second number is the number after the first number (for example, the 21st to 100th rotations are the numbers after the 1st to 20th rotations).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from thinking that he or she has lost money even if the player is controlled to the advantageous state faster than the second time when the player is controlled to the special state.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
The first number of times is the number of times after the second number of times (for example, the first number of times is the number of times just before the end of the ST, and the second number of times is the number of times immediately after the start of the ST).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the user pay attention to the execution of the setting suggesting performance while providing a sense of security when the control is performed to the advantageous state at a number of times later than the second time when the control is performed to the special state. .

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above,
In the special state, a predetermined period is provided that includes the first number of times but does not include the second number of times (for example, the period up to the 20th rotation after the start of ST is the first number of times). 1st to 20th rotations are included, but 21st to 100th rotations are not included, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the setting suggesting effect will be executed when the control is effected in an advantageous state within the predetermined period.

(7) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
Setting value information output means capable of outputting setting value information that can specify which setting value is set (for example, CPU 103 of game control microcomputer 100, step 112IWS031 in FIG. 11-9, step 112IWS031 in FIG. 11-13 step 112 IWS 108);
setting suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120, setting suggestion effect processing in FIG. 12-9) capable of executing the setting suggestion effect based on the set value information output from the set value information output means; further comprising
When the set value information output from the set value information output means is not normal, the setting suggestion effect executing means sets a predetermined set value that is less advantageous for the player among the set values of the plurality of stages. (For example, when the set value command is not normal, the effect control CPU 120 executes a setting suggestion effect of low setting).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an erroneous setting value from being suggested to the player without reducing the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect.

(8) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process, etc.) that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) that have different advantages for the player; ,
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means (for example, ST state) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, ST state) that increases the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) For example, with a CPU 103),
The probability of being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state differs depending on the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-1, the ST continuation rate is different),
In the special state, when it is controlled to the advantageous state for the first time, it is controlled to the advantageous state more than when it is controlled to the advantageous state for the second time different from the first time. The reliability of the setting suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the Since the setting suggesting performance is executed with higher reliability than when the jackpot is controlled at the 100th rotation (the setting suggesting performance is not executed at the 21st to 100th times), the reliability of the setting suggesting performance is high).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the setting suggesting effect when the control is made to the advantageous state in the first time in the special state, thereby improving the interest of the game.
The correspondence between (2) to (8) and (1) in the characteristic portion 249F described above can be applied to the correspondence between (2) to (8) and (A).

(Description of the Invention Regarding Characteristic Portion 250F)
As described above, the characteristic portion 250F includes the following inventions related to the characteristic portion 250F described above. Conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting change operation, and can execute control of an advantageous state for the player based on the set setting values. rice field. In such a pachinko game machine, one of giraffe, elephant, and lion is displayed during the variable display of the identification information according to the set value before and after the change of the set value to suggest the set value. There was a gaming machine (see, for example, JP-A-2010-200902). In addition, there is a game machine that maintains a high probability state until variable display of identification information is executed a specific number of times (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-218044).

However, when executing an effect suggesting a setting as in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 on a game machine as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-218044, there is room for improvement with respect to the trigger for executing the effect suggesting the setting. rice field. In order to solve such problems, the characteristic portion 250F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process, etc.) that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) that have different advantages for the player; ,
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means (for example, ST state) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, ST state) that increases the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) For example, with a CPU 103),
The probability of being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state differs depending on the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-1, the ST continuation rate is different),
In the special state, when it is controlled to the advantageous state for the first time and when it is controlled to the advantageous state for the second time different from the first time, it is controlled to the advantageous state. The effect mode of the setting suggestion effect that suggests to the player is different (for example, as shown in FIG. The effect mode of the setting suggestion effect is different between when the big hit is controlled at the 100th rotation).

According to such a configuration, the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect differs between when the first control in the special state is performed in the advantageous state and when the second time in the special state when the control is performed in the advantageous state. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution trigger of the performance suggesting the setting, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, as a game machine according to the characteristic part 250F that solves the problem of executing an effect suggesting a setting as in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 in a game machine like Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-218044,
(A) A game machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that performs variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process, etc.) that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) that have different advantages for the player; ,
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means (for example, ST state) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, ST state) that increases the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) For example, with a CPU 103),
The probability of being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state differs depending on the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-1, the ST continuation rate is different),
In the special state, when it is controlled to the advantageous state for the first time and when it is controlled to the advantageous state for the second time different from the first time, it is controlled to the advantageous state. The effect mode of the setting suggestion effect that suggests to the player is different (for example, as shown in FIG. The production mode of the setting suggestion production is different from when the big hit is controlled at the 100th rotation),
moreover,
A game value giving means (for example, A part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing shown in FIG. 10-7),
A game value totalizing means capable of totaling the given game value (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize ball number display process shown in FIGS. 10-14 to 10-17);
A tally game capable of displaying the tallyed tally game value, and updating the display of the tally game value with a predetermined operation display (for example, a first addition effect or a second addition effect) based on the occurrence of the specific event. Value display means (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the number of prize balls display processing shown in FIGS. 10-14 to 10-17),
with
After the total playing value reaches a predetermined value, the total playing value display means displays a predetermined action based on the occurrence of the specific event, but does not update the display of the total playing value (for example, FIG. 10). As shown in -21, even if the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter displayed on the image display device 5 have reached the total possible upper limit value , based on the fact that the game ball has entered one of the winning holes, the first addition effect and the second addition effect are executed, the value of the first prize ball counter is 141SG005A and the value of the second prize ball counter is 141SG005B. A gaming machine characterized by a portion where the value of does not change from the upper limit value).
According to this feature, the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect differs between when the first control in the special state is performed in the advantageous state and when the second time in the special state when the control is performed in the advantageous state. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution opportunity of the suggested performance, thereby improving the amusement of the game. In addition, it is possible to improve interest when the total game value reaches a predetermined value.

(2) In the game machine of (1) above,
The advantageous state is a state constituted by repeating a predetermined game a plurality of times (for example, a state of repeating a round game),
The setting suggesting effect is a effect executed during the predetermined game (for example, the setting suggesting effect is executed during the round).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the predetermined game, and the interest in the game is improved.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above,
When controlled to the advantageous state at the first time, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is higher than when controlled to the advantageous state at the second time (for example, in FIG. 12-12 As shown, when the big hit is controlled at the 1st to 20th rotation from the start of the ST, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion performance is higher than when the big hit is controlled at the 21st to 100th rotation from the start of the ST).

According to such a configuration, by controlling to be in an advantageous state at the first time, the continuous advantageous state improves the interest and draws attention to the execution of the setting suggesting effect.

(4) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
The second number is the number after the first number (for example, the 21st to 100th rotations are the numbers after the 1st to 20th rotations).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from thinking that he or she has lost money even if the player is controlled to the advantageous state faster than the second time when the player is controlled to the special state.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
The first number of times is the number of times after the second number of times (for example, the first number of times is the number of times just before the end of the ST, and the second number of times is the number of times immediately after the start of the ST).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the user pay attention to the execution of the setting suggesting performance while providing a sense of security when the control is performed to the advantageous state at a number of times later than the second time when the control is performed to the special state. .

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above,
In the special state, a predetermined period including the first rotation but excluding the second rotation is provided (for example, the period up to the 20th rotation after the start of the ST is the first rotation. 1st to 20th rotations are included, but 21st to 100th rotations are not included, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the setting suggesting effect will be executed when the control is effected in an advantageous state within the predetermined period.

(7) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
Setting value information output means capable of outputting setting value information that can specify which setting value is set (for example, CPU 103 of game control microcomputer 100, step 112IWS031 in FIG. 11-9, step 112IWS031 in FIG. 11-13 step 112 IWS 108);
setting suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120, setting suggestion effect processing of FIGS. 12 and 13) capable of executing the setting suggestion effect based on the set value information output from the set value information output means; further comprising
When the set value information output from the set value information output means is not normal, the setting suggestion effect executing means sets a predetermined set value that is less advantageous for the player among the set values of the plurality of stages. (For example, when the set value command is not normal, the effect control CPU 120 executes a setting suggestion effect of low setting).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an erroneous setting value from being suggested to the player without reducing the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect.

(8) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process, etc.) that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) that have different advantages for the player; ,
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means (for example, ST state) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, ST state) that increases the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) For example, with a CPU 103),
The probability of being controlled to the advantageous state in the special state differs depending on the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-1, the ST continuation rate is different),
In the special state, when it is controlled to the advantageous state for the first time, it is controlled to the advantageous state more than when it is controlled to the advantageous state for the second time different from the first time. The reliability of the setting suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the Since the setting suggestion performance is executed with higher reliability than when the big hit is controlled at the 100th rotation, the reliability of the setting suggestion performance is high).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the setting suggesting effect when the control is made to the advantageous state in the first time in the special state, thereby improving the interest of the game.
The correspondence between (2) to (8) and (1) in the characteristic portion 250F described above can be applied to the correspondence between (2) to (8) and (A).

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 109AK)
Next, the characterizing portion 109AK of this embodiment will be described. In the front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. Although a plurality of types of display devices (display devices) such as the normal map holding display device 25C were provided in separate places, these display devices may be provided collectively. For example, the information display device 109AK001 as shown in FIG. Device (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, first reservation display device 25A, second reservation display device 25B, normal design display device 20, normal design reservation display device 25C) can be The information display device 109AK001 may be provided at a predetermined position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a position where the player can visually recognize from the front, lower left, lower right, etc. in the game area).

As shown in FIGS. 13-1A and 13-1B, the information display device 109AK001 has a plurality of display portions composed of lamps such as LEDs, and displays game-related information according to the lighting and extinguishing conditions of each display portion. do. Each display part of the information display device 109AK001 is the first special symbol display device 109AK4A, the second special symbol display device 109AK4B, the first reservation display device 109AK25A, the second reservation display device 109AK25B, the normal design display device 109AK20, and the general design The hold indicator is 109AK25C. In addition, the information display device 109AK001 includes a round number indicator 109AK011 indicating the total number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state, a time saving state indicator 109AK012 indicating the time saving state, and a variable probability state. It has a display part that serves as a probability changing state indicator 109AK013. Thus, the information display device 109AK001 is one module for displaying a plurality of types of game-related information. Each display part in the information display device 109AK001 is composed of, for example, the same LED. By doing so, the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The first special symbol display device 109AK4A and the second special symbol display device 109AK4B are each composed of eight display parts (LED), and the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight display parts (lighting pattern) determines the display result (hit type) is displayed. It is arbitrary to assign any lighting pattern to the losing or winning type.

The first reservation display 109AK25A and the second reservation display 109AK25B are each composed of four display parts (LEDs), and display the number of first reservation storage and the number of second reservation storage according to the number of lights.

The normal symbol display device 109AK20 is composed of four display parts (LEDs), and displays the display result (type of win) according to the lighting pattern of the four display parts. It is arbitrary to assign any lighting pattern to the losing or winning type.

The normal map hold indicator 109AK25C is composed of four display parts (LEDs), and displays the number of normal map reserve memories by the number of lights.

The number-of-rounds display 109AK011 is composed of six display parts (LEDs), and displays the total number of rounds in the big-hit game state in the big-hit game state by the lighting pattern of the six display parts. It is arbitrary to assign which lighting pattern to which round number.

The time saving state indicator 109AK012 is configured by one display part (LED), and displays that it is in the time saving state by lighting. The variable probability state indicator 109AK013 is configured by one display part (LED), and displays the variable probability state by lighting.

The shape of the information display device 109AK001 and the number, shape, and arrangement of display parts may be arbitrary as long as various game-related information can be displayed. For example, the display portion of the information display device 109AK001 may be composed of 7-segment LEDs. Information other than the game-related information described above may be displayed on the information display device 109AK001, or part of the game-related information may not be displayed.

In this embodiment, when the pachinko game machine 1 is activated, RAM clear processing is executed in which the range of clearing (initializing) the RAM 102 varies depending on the state (operation) at the time of activation. As shown in FIG. 13-2, when an initialization operation (the clear switch is turned on, the setting key 112IW051 is turned off, and the power is turned on) at startup, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are all cleared. When a power failure recovery operation (power on with the clear switch and setting key 112IW051 turned off) is performed at startup, all of the contents stored in the RAM 102 are retained. When the setting change operation (clear switch and setting key 112IW051 is turned on and the power is turned on) is performed at the time of startup, among the storage contents of RAM 102, the information related to the special figure display result and the normal figure display result is retained, and other information is cleared. be done. A state in which a setting change operation is performed at startup and the setting value can be changed is also referred to as a change permission state. In addition, if the setting change operation is performed at startup, the information related to the display result is retained, but the information related to the game state and the reserved storage information are cleared. There is no difference in the degree of advantage for the player between and except for the set value. Thereby, a fair game can be provided. Although FIG. 13B shows a part of the information stored in the RAM 102, other information (various flags, determination results, etc.) may be changed if an initialization operation is performed at startup. is cleared and all information is retained when a power failure recovery operation is performed at startup. If a setting change operation is performed at startup, other information may be cleared, or arbitrary information may be retained.

13-3 to 13-6 are examples of the display operation of the information display device 109AK001 when the power is turned off while the pachinko game machine 1 is running and then turned on.

In FIG. 13-3 (A), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in operation (power ON), the first special symbol display device 109AK4A displays the lost symbols, and the first suspension display 109AK25A displays the first retention memory number. It is displayed that there are three. In addition, the normal pattern display device 109AK20 displays a normal pattern losing pattern, and the normal pattern reservation display device 109AK25C displays that the number of normal pattern reservation memory is one. And it is displayed that the game state is the time saving state by lighting the time saving state display 109AK012. Here, when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off, all the display portions of the information display device 109AK001 are turned off as shown in FIG. 13-3(B). After that, when a power failure recovery operation is performed when the power is turned on, all the memory contents of the RAM 102 are held, and the control for displaying the game-related information is executed again based on the memory contents. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-3(C), the information display device 109AK001 is restored to the display state before the power was turned off.

In FIG. 13-4(A), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in operation, the first special symbol display device 109AK4A displays a losing symbol, and the normal symbol display device 109AK20 displays a normal symbol losing symbol. Here, when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off, all the display parts of the information display device 109AK001 are turned off as shown in FIG. 13-4(B). After that, when a power failure recovery operation is performed when the power is turned on, all the memory contents of the RAM 102 are held, and the control for displaying the game-related information is executed again based on the memory contents. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-4(C), the information display device 109AK001 is restored to the display state before the power was turned off.

In FIG. 13-5(A), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in operation, the first special symbol display device 109AK4A displays a losing symbol, and the first suspension display device 109AK25A has three first suspension memories. is displayed. In addition, the normal pattern display device 109AK20 displays a normal pattern losing pattern, and the normal pattern reservation display device 109AK25C displays that the number of normal pattern reservation memory is one. And it is displayed that the game state is the time saving state by lighting the time saving state display 109AK012. Here, when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off, all the display portions of the information display device 109AK001 are turned off as shown in FIG. 13-5(B). After that, when the initialization operation is performed when the power is turned on, all the stored contents of the RAM 102 are erased. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-5(C), the information display device 109AK001 is in a completely extinguished state even after the power is turned on.

In FIG. 13-6(A), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in operation, the first special symbol display device 109AK4A displays a losing symbol, and the normal symbol display 109AK20 displays a normal symbol losing symbol. Here, when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off, all the display portions of the information display device 109AK001 are turned off as shown in FIG. 13-6(B). After that, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 13-6(C), all the display parts of the information display device 109AK001 are turned on during the setting change (in the change permitted state). . When the change permission state ends, the information about the special figure display result and the normal figure display result among the storage contents of the RAM 102 is held, and the control for displaying the game related information is executed again based on the storage contents. . Then, as shown in FIG. 13-6 (D), the first special symbol display device 109AK4A displays the losing design, the normal design display 109AK20 displays the normal design losing design, and the display before the power is turned off. same as the state.

As shown in FIG. 13-2, in this embodiment, when the setting change operation is performed at the time of power-on (starting), the information on the special figure display result and the normal figure display result is held. It has become. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 13-6 (D), even if the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the display result is displayed on the first special symbol display device 109AK4A and the normal symbol display device 109AK20 in the same way as before the power is turned off. can do. The display state of the information display device 109AK001 is the same as when the power failure restoration operation is executed, as shown in FIG. 13-4(C). Therefore, even if the player checks the information display device 109AK001 when the hall is opened, it becomes difficult to grasp whether the power failure restoration operation or the setting change operation has been executed. In addition, since it is not possible to know whether or not the setting has been changed by the display state of the information display device 109AK001 at the time of startup, if the setting of some of the game machines is changed, there is no need to initialize the rest of the game machines. It is possible to simplify the work for a person to activate a plurality of game machines.

In addition, it is preferable that the display of the image display device 5 at the time of activation be common regardless of the operation at the time of activation (for example, a screen indicating that the device has been activated). As a result, the display on the image display device 5 prevents the player from grasping which operation was performed at the time of activation. In addition, in order to enable confirmation by a hall worker or the like, the executed processing (initialization processing, recovery processing, setting change processing, etc.) may be displayed on the image display device 5 at startup.

It should be noted that, if the setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on (at the time of startup), the information other than the information related to the special figure display result and the general figure display result is cleared, so when the power is turned off, the first holding display 109AK25A, Even if the second hold indicator 109AK25B, normal figure hold indicator 109AK25C, round number indicator 109AK011, time saving state indicator 109AK012, probability variable state indicator 109AK013 are lit, information related to these displays is cleared when changing settings Therefore, after the setting change operation, these display portions are turned off.

(Modified example of characteristic portion 109AK)
This characteristic portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further characteristics may be added. Moreover, not all of the configurations described in the above embodiments are essential configurations, and some of them may be omitted. Also, this characteristic portion and another characteristic portion may be combined as appropriate. For example, the configuration of at least some of features 248F-250F may be incorporated into this feature.

In the above-described embodiment, when the initialization operation is performed at power-on, the information display device 109AK001 is set to the all-off state after power-on. The special symbol display device 109AK4A (or the second special symbol display device 109AK4B) and the normal symbol display device 109AK20 may display the most frequently appearing symbol (for example, a lost symbol). By doing so, even during the initialization operation, the display of the information display device 109AK001 at startup is the same as during the power failure recovery operation and setting change operation (for example, FIG. 13-3 (C) and FIG. 13-6 ( D)) is possible, and the display can be substantially common regardless of which operation is performed at startup. As a result, even if the information display device 109AK001 is checked, it becomes more difficult to grasp which operation has been executed.

In the above embodiment, when the setting change operation is performed at the time of start-up, the information related to the special figure display result and the normal figure display result among the storage contents of the RAM 102 is retained, and the other information is cleared. , some of the other information may be retained. Alternatively, all information may be cleared. In this case, when the setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on, the first special symbol display device 109AK4A (or the second special symbol display device 109AK4B) and the normal symbol display device 109AK20 have the most frequent symbols (for example, lost symbols). may be displayed. By doing so, even if the same RAM clear processing as that during the initialization operation is executed during the setting change operation, the display of the information display device 109AK001 at startup will be the same as during the power failure recovery operation and the setting change operation ( For example, FIG. 13-3(C) or FIG. 13-6(D)) can be used, and a substantially common display can be provided regardless of which operation is performed at startup.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 109AK)
As a pachinko game machine in which setting values can be set, for example, one described in JP-A-2010-200902 has been proposed. In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, stored contents other than set values are cleared when setting change processing is performed.
In such a game machine, there is room for improvement regarding the handling of information held when settings are changed.
The game machine related to the characteristic part 109AK has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and aims to provide a game machine that preferably retains information when settings are changed and makes it difficult to determine whether settings have been changed. and
(1) The game machine related to the characteristic part 109AK is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state, etc.) that is advantageous to a player by performing a game,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to 3) that has different advantages for the player. )and,
setting control means (e.g., CPU 103 that executes steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that allows the setting value to be changed by the setting means based on the setting change permission operation;
An information display means (for example, an information display device 109AK001) that displays a plurality of game-related information related to the game,
The information display means is
When a power failure recovery operation is performed, the control for displaying all the game-related information that was displayed before the power failure recovery operation is executed again (for example, FIGS. 13-3 and 13-4),
Control to display a part of the game-related information (of the information displayed before the change permission operation) after the change permission state is ended when the change permission state is controlled based on the setting change permission operation. (eg FIG. 13-6).
With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the setting has been changed.

In addition, as a game machine according to the characteristic part 109AK that solves the problem of the game machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902,
(A) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to play a game and be in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to 3) that has different advantages for the player. )and,
setting control means (e.g., CPU 103 that executes steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that allows the setting value to be changed by the setting means based on the setting change permission operation;
An information display means (for example, an information display device 109AK001) that displays a plurality of game-related information related to the game,
The information display means is
When a power failure recovery operation is performed, the control for displaying all the game-related information that was displayed before the power failure recovery operation is executed again (for example, FIGS. 13-3 and 13-4),
Control to display a part of the game-related information (of the information displayed before the change permission operation) after the change permission state is ended when the change permission state is controlled based on the setting change permission operation. (for example, Figure 13-6),
moreover,
A game value giving means (for example, A part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing shown in FIG. 10-7),
A game value totalizing means capable of totaling the given game value (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize ball number display process shown in FIGS. 10-14 to 10-17);
A tally game capable of displaying the tallyed tally game value, and updating the display of the tally game value with a predetermined operation display (for example, a first addition effect or a second addition effect) based on the occurrence of the specific event. Value display means (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the number of prize balls display processing shown in FIGS. 10-14 to 10-17),
with
After the total playing value reaches a predetermined value, the total playing value display means displays a predetermined action based on the occurrence of the specific event, but does not update the display of the total playing value (for example, FIG. 10). As shown in -21, even if the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter displayed on the image display device 5 have reached the total possible upper limit value , based on the fact that the game ball has entered one of the winning holes, the first addition effect and the second addition effect are executed, the value of the first prize ball counter is 141SG005A and the value of the second prize ball counter is 141SG005B. A gaming machine characterized by a portion where the value of does not change from the upper limit).
According to this feature, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the setting has been changed. In addition, it is possible to improve interest when the total game value reaches a predetermined value.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
A variable display means for executing variable display is provided,
The game-related information may include at least information about the number of variable displays that have been reserved (for example, the number of first reserved memories and the number of second reserved memories).
According to such a configuration, important information regarding games can be displayed.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
It is possible to execute initialization processing with a different initialization range of the storage area when the initialization operation is performed and when the change permission state is controlled based on the setting change permission operation (for example, FIG. 13- 2) You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute appropriate initialization processing according to the situation.

(4) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
The game-related information displayed after the change permission state ends may include at least display results of special symbols and normal symbols.
With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the setting has been changed.

(5) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
The degree of advantage of the gaming machine is the same when the initialization operation is performed and when the setting change permission state is terminated (the information regarding the game state is cleared as shown in FIG. 13-2). may
According to such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the difference in the degree of advantage for the player between the initialization operation and the setting change.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
a game control means for controlling the progress of a game;
a display control means for executing display control of the display means based on information from the game control means;
The display control means may execute the same display control when the initialization operation is performed and when the change permission state is terminated.
With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the setting has been changed.
The correspondence between (2) to (6) and (1) relating to the characteristic portion 109AK described above can be applied to the correspondence between (2) to (6) and (A).

(Description of Characteristic Portion 110AK)
Next, the characterizing portion 110AK of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 13-7 is a flow chart showing an example of the counting effect setting process related to the feature part 110AK. In the characteristic part 110AK, a counting effect can be executed in which a numerical value (for example, the numerical value of "3") is displayed on the image display device 5 and the numerical value is counted down. When it becomes "0"), a specific effect is executed to notify that the degree of expectation (reliability of big hit, etc.) of the variable display being executed is high. The counting effect setting process is a process for determining whether or not to execute the counting effect and the effect mode (count value) in the case of executing the counting effect. The counting effect setting process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 within the variable display start setting process in step S171 of FIG. 7, for example.

In the counting effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the counting effect (step 110AKS001). In this embodiment, whether or not to execute the counting effect is determined based on the display result specified from the variable display result notification command or the like transmitted from the main board 11 . Further, whether or not the counting effect is executed is determined at a different rate depending on which setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 is set.

FIG. 13-8 shows the determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the counting effect in step 110AKS001. Figure 13-8 (A) is the determination ratio when the setting value is 3 (percentage of execution of the counting effect), and Figure 13-8 (B) is the determination ratio when the setting value is 2 (counting effect Execution ratio), and FIG. 13-8(C) shows the determination ratio (execution ratio of the counting effect) when the set value is 1.

As shown in FIG. 13-8, when the display result is a big hit, the counting effect is more likely to be executed than when the display result is super reach loss or other (non-reach loss or normal reach loss). Also, when the display result is a super reach loss, the counting effect is more likely to be executed than in other cases (non-reach loss or normal reach loss). By doing so, when the counting performance is executed, the ratio of the big hit or the super ready-to-win is higher than when the counting performance is not executed, and the expectation of the player can be enhanced by the counting performance.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-8, in the characteristic portion 110AK, the execution ratio of the counting effect differs depending on the set value. Specifically, when the setting value 3 with the highest jackpot probability is set, the ratio of execution of the counting effect is the highest, and when the setting value is 1 with the lowest jackpot probability, the ratio of execution of the counting effect is the lowest. It's becoming Thus, the higher the set value, the easier it is determined to execute the counting effect. By doing so, it is possible to suggest a set value to the player according to the execution frequency of the counting effect. When it is suggested that the set value is high, the player can be encouraged to play for a long time, and the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved. In FIG. 13-8, the execution ratio of the counting effect when the display result is a big hit is constant (50%) regardless of the set value, but the execution ratio of the counting effect may be changed according to the set value.

After determining whether or not to execute the counting effect at step 110AKS001, it is determined whether or not it is determined to execute the counting effect (step 110AKS002). When it is determined not to execute the counting effect (step 110AKS002; No), the counting effect setting process is terminated.

If it is determined to execute the counting effect (step 110AKS002; Yes), the final count value (how far to count down from the initial value "3") in the counting effect is determined (step 110AKS003). In this embodiment, the final count value in the counting effect is determined based on the display result specified from the variable display result notification command or the like transmitted from the main board 11. FIG. Also, the final count value in the counting effect is determined at a different rate depending on which setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 is.

FIG. 13-9 shows the percentage determination of the final count value in step 110AKS003. The counting effect of the count value "3" in FIG. 13-9 is, as shown in FIG. 13-10, a counting effect in which the numerical value "3" is displayed and the numerical value is erased. The count effect of the count value "2" in Fig. 13-9 is, as shown in Fig. 13-10, the value "3" is displayed, and after changing from "3" to "2", the value is erased. It is a performance. The count effect of the count value "1" in FIG. 13-9 is, as shown in FIG. , It is a counting effect in which the numerical value is erased. The count effect of the count value "0" in FIG. 13-9 is shown in FIG. After changing to , the numerical value is erased, and then a specific effect for notifying that the expectation is high is executed.

As shown in Fig. 13-9, when the displayed result is a big hit, the count value is likely to be determined to be "0", and when the displayed result is other (non-reach loss or normal reach loss), the count value It is designed not to be determined as "0". By doing so, the numerical value is counted down (counted) to "0" by the counting effect, and the probability of a big hit (jackpot reliability) when the specific effect is executed can be increased, and the specific effect is executed. Since it becomes super reach loss at least when it is done, the expectation of the player can be raised by the counting effect and the specific effect.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 13-9, in the characteristic portion 110AK, the determination ratio of the final count value differs depending on the set value. Specifically, when the display result is Super Reach Loss, the higher the set value, the less likely it is determined to be a count value of "0", and the higher the set value, the more likely it is to be determined to be a large value. Also, when the display result is other, the higher the set value, the larger the value that is likely to be determined. That is, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the counting performance ends without execution of the specific performance, and the higher the probability that the counting performance ends at a stage (middle) when the countdown (counting) does not proceed. By doing so, although the counting effect is executed, the counting effect ends when the countdown (counting) does not progress, and the player is disappointed because the specific effect is not executed, and the set value is high. Since it can be suggested, the production effect of the counting production can be improved, and the amusement of the game can be improved. Also, when the set value is low, the countdown (counting) is likely to progress, and the count value becomes "0", making it easier to execute the specific effect. Therefore, when the set value is low, the player can expect that the numerical value will become the specific value and the specific effect will be executed, thereby improving the effect of the counting effect.

In addition, in the determination ratio shown in FIG. 13-9, when the count value ends with "3", the set value is 3, and when the count value ends with "2", the set value is 2. If the ratio is high and ends with a count value of "1", the ratio of the set value of 1 is high. Thus, ending with a count of "3" suggests a set value of 3, and ending with a count of "2" suggests a set value of 2, and a count of "1". , you can suggest that the set value is 1. In this way, the set value corresponding to the count value at the time when the counting effect ended in the middle is suggested, so it is possible to understand the suggested setting value when the counting effect ends in the middle. easier.

The determination ratios shown in FIGS. 13-8 and 13-9 are just an example. The higher the set value, the easier the count effect is executed, and the higher the set value, the larger the count value ends. In addition, the lower the set value, the easier the counting progresses and the easier it is for the count value to become "0", the execution ratio of the counting effect and the determination ratio of the count value may be arbitrary. In other words, the determination ratio may be arbitrary as long as the same effect as in the above embodiment can be achieved.

After determining the final count value in the counting effect at step 110AKS003, the effect control pattern corresponding to the determination result is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 110AKS004), and the counting effect setting process is finished. The effect control pattern set at step 110AKS004 is read in the effect process during variable display at step S172 of FIG. 7, and the counting effect corresponding to the determination result is executed.

FIGS. 13-11 and 13-12 are examples of the effect operation when the counting effect is executed. FIG. 13-11(A) shows that the decoration design showing the number 7 is stopped in the "left" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5R of the image display device 5 and is in the ready-to-win mode. ing. After that, when it develops into super reach, as shown in FIG. 13-11(B), an image indicating super reach is displayed on the image display device 5, and the decoration pattern is reduced and displayed in the upper left part. .

Here, in the counting effect setting process, if it is determined to execute the counting effect with the final count value as "0", as shown in FIG. , the numerical value "3" is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the lower right portion) of the image display device 5, and the numerical value is changed from "3" to "2" as shown in FIGS. → "1" → "0" changes step by step. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-11(G), a specific effect is executed in which the numerical value is erased and a character image of "Heat" is displayed.

Next, another example of effect operation will be described. FIG. 13-12(A) shows that the decoration pattern indicating the number 7 is stopped in the "left" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5 and is in the ready-to-win state. ing. After that, when it develops into super reach, as shown in FIG. 13-12(B), an image indicating super reach is displayed on the image display device 5, and the decoration pattern is reduced and displayed in the upper left part. .

Here, in the counting effect setting process, if it is determined to execute the counting effect with the final count value of "3", as shown in FIG. , the numerical value "3" is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the lower right portion) of the image display device 5. FIG. After that, the number does not count down, and the number is erased as shown in FIG. 13-12(D). Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 13-12(E), the decorative symbols of the losing combination are derived and displayed. In this way, when the numerical value of the counting effect ends at the stage of "3", the reliability of the big hit of the variable display is lowered, but the set value is suggested to be high, so the expectation of the player is maintained. can do.

In FIGS. 13-11 and 13-12, an example is shown in which the counting effect is executed after the reach is established, but the counting effect may be started before reaching the reach (before stopping the left and right symbols). .

(Modified example of characteristic portion 110AK)
This characteristic portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further characteristics may be added. Moreover, not all of the configurations described in the above embodiments are essential configurations, and some of them may be omitted. Also, this characteristic portion and another characteristic portion may be combined as appropriate. For example, the configuration of at least some of features 248F-250F may be incorporated into this feature.

In the above embodiment, the initial value of the numerical value in the counting effect was "3" and the specific value was "0", but other numerical values may be used. For example, the initial value may be one of a plurality of types. By doing so, the more the initial value of the numerical value is closer to the specific value, the more the numerical value can be expected to become the specific value, thereby improving the entertainment of the performance. Also, the numerical value in the counting effect is not limited to counting down, and may be counting up. In this case, the specific effect may be executed when the counted up value reaches a specific value. Also, the numerical values to be counted do not necessarily have to be counted continuously.

There may be multiple types of count effects (color of numbers, counting speed, font of numbers, initial values of numbers, display positions of numbers, etc.). In addition, it is also possible to change the effect mode (such as the color of the numerical value) in the middle of the counting effect. Then, the ratio of the specific value, the reliability of the big hit, the ratio of the super reach, and the like may differ according to the production mode of the counting production. Also, the setting value may be suggested by the effect mode of the counting effect. For example, red and white may be provided as the colors of numerical values so that red is more likely to reach a specific value (more likely to be a big hit) than white. Also, red may have a higher accuracy of the setting value suggested when the counting effect ends in the middle than white. Also, a plurality of counting speeds may be provided, and the rate at which a specific value is reached (a big hit) may be varied according to the counting speed. Further, the accuracy of the setting value suggested when the counting effect ends in the middle may be different according to the counting speed. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the counting effect.

Alternatively, a counting performance may be executed in which counting is temporarily interrupted and then restarted. For example, if other effects (notice effect, ready-to-win effect, etc.) are executed during the execution of the counting effect, the counting effect (counting) is interrupted during the execution period of the other effect, and the other effect The counting effect (counting) may be restarted after the end.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the counting effect was the effect indicating the degree of expectation of the variable display (the variable notice notice effect), but it is the effect indicating the degree of expectation of the variable display before execution (forecast notice effect). good too. Also, the counting effect may be executed over a plurality of variable displays. The counting effect may be executed in the jackpot game state.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the specific effect is the effect indicating that the reliability of the big hit is high (the effect suggesting that the big win will be achieved), but any effect that suggests the advantage to the player may be used. For example, an effect that suggests an advantageous jackpot type (an effect that suggests the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot and whether or not it is a variable probability jackpot), or that the game state is a variable probability state when the game state is not notified. It may be a production or the like that suggests. Further, when the counting effect is executed in the big win game state, the effect may be an effect suggesting the number of rounds of the big win or an effect indicating promotion to the variable probability big win. In a gaming machine that can be controlled to a variable probability state based on the entry of a game ball into a specific area in the big winning opening, the effect may be an effect indicating that the game ball has entered the specific area.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 110AK)
As a pachinko game machine in which setting values can be set, for example, one described in JP-A-2010-200902 has been proposed. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, an effect of suggesting setting values can be executed.
In such a game machine, there is room for improvement in the method of presentation.
The gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 110AK has been made in view of the above-described actual situation, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves the performance and enhances the interest of the game.
(1) The game machine related to the characteristic part 110AK is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state, etc.) that is advantageous to a player by performing a game,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to 3) that has different advantages for the player. )and,
Numerical value display means for changing and displaying numerical values (for example, production control CPU 120 for executing counting production),
When the numerical value displayed by the numerical value display means becomes a specific value (for example, "0"), a specific effect executing means (for example, an effect for executing a specific effect) that can execute a specific effect (for example, FIG. 13-11 (G)) Control CPU 120) and
The numerical display means is
When the display of the numerical value ends after changing the numerical value to the specific value (for example, FIG. 13-11), and when the display of the numerical value ends before changing the numerical value to the specific value (for example, FIG. 13-12) and there is
The more advantageous the set value is to the player, the higher the percentage of ending the display of the numerical value before changing the numerical value to the specific value (for example, the higher the set value in 110AKS003, the more the count value is "0"). are less likely to be determined by
According to such a configuration, the amusement of the game is improved.

In addition, as a game machine according to the characteristic part 110AK that solves the problem of the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902,
(A) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to play a game and be in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to 3) that has different advantages for the player. )and,
Numerical value display means for changing and displaying numerical values (for example, production control CPU 120 for executing counting production),
When the numerical value displayed by the numerical value display means becomes a specific value (for example, "0"), a specific effect executing means (for example, an effect for executing a specific effect) that can execute a specific effect (for example, FIG. 13-11 (G)) Control CPU 120) and
The numerical display means is
When the display of the numerical value ends after changing the numerical value to the specific value (for example, FIG. 13-11), and when the display of the numerical value ends before changing the numerical value to the specific value (for example, FIG. 13-12) and there is
The more advantageous the set value is to the player, the higher the ratio of ending the display of the numerical value before changing the numerical value to the specific value (for example, the higher the set value in 110AKS003, the higher the count value "0"). is less likely to be determined by
moreover,
A game value giving means (for example, A part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing shown in FIG. 10-7),
A game value totalizing means capable of totaling the given game value (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize ball number display process shown in FIGS. 10-14 to 10-17);
A tally game capable of displaying the tallyed tally game value, and updating the display of the tally game value with a predetermined operation display (for example, a first addition effect or a second addition effect) based on the occurrence of the specific event. Value display means (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the number of prize balls display processing shown in FIGS. 10-14 to 10-17),
with
After the total playing value reaches a predetermined value, the total playing value display means displays a predetermined action based on the occurrence of the specific event, but does not update the display of the total playing value (for example, FIG. 10). As shown in -21, even if the value 141SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 141SG005B of the second prize ball counter displayed on the image display device 5 have reached the total possible upper limit value , based on the fact that the game ball has entered one of the winning holes, the first addition effect and the second addition effect are executed, the value of the first prize ball counter is 141SG005A and the value of the second prize ball counter is 141SG005B. A gaming machine characterized by a portion where the value of does not change from the upper limit).
According to this feature, the amusement of the game is improved. In addition, it is possible to improve interest when the total game value reaches a predetermined value.

It should be noted that after the total game value reaches a predetermined value, the setting value may be suggested by the form of the action display performed based on the occurrence of the specific event. For example, when a set value is suggested by the aspect of the addition effect, the more advantageous the set value is to the player, the higher the ratio of the execution time of the addition effect to become longer. Alternatively, the more advantageous the set value is to the player, the greater the number of digits for which the addition effect is executed (for example, in the display of the number of digits as shown in FIGS. 2 digits, and in the case of an advantageous set value, 4 digits (addition performance is executed) ratio may be increased. In this way, setting values are suggested by the numerical value display means and total game value display means, and setting values are suggested by a plurality of elements, so that setting values are suggested by a single element. As compared with the case where the game is played, the chances of suggestion and mode of suggestion are abundant, and the interest of the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The more advantageous the set value is to the player, the easier it is for the numerical value display means to display the numerical value (for example, the higher the set value in 110AKS001, the more likely it is decided to execute the counting effect). You may do so.
According to such a configuration, the amusement of the game is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
When a numerical value is displayed by the numerical value display means, the more advantageous the set value is to the player, the higher the ratio of ending the display of the numerical value at a stage where there is little change (for example, the set value at 110AKS003 is more likely to be determined as a higher count value).
According to such a configuration, the amusement of the game is improved.

(4) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
There may be a plurality of display modes of numerical values by the numerical value display means.
According to such a configuration, the amusement of the game is improved.

(5) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
There may be a plurality of types of changing speeds of the numerical values displayed by the numerical value display means.
According to such a configuration, the amusement of the game is improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The numerical value display means may be capable of temporarily hiding the numerical value when changing and displaying the numerical value.
According to such a configuration, the amusement of the game is improved.
The correspondence between (2) to (6) and (1) in the characteristic portion 110AK described above can be applied to the correspondence between (2) to (6) and (A).

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 6A Winning ball device 6B Variable winning ball device 7 Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R Speaker 9 Game effect lamp 10 General prize winning port 11 Main board 12 Effect control board 13 Sound control board 14 Lamp control board 15 Relay board 20 Normal symbol display 21 Gate switches 22A, 22B Starting port switch 23 Count switch 30 Ball hitting operation handle 31A Stick controller 31B Push button 32 Movable body 100 Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ROM
102, 122 RAM
103 CPUs
104, 124 random number circuit 105, 125 I/O
120 Production control CPU
123 display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player by performing variable display of specific identification information and deriving a specific display result as a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
a game control means for controlling a game;
production control means;
display means;
a setting means capable of controlling a setting permission state for setting a setting value;
a plurality of light-emitting means controlled by the game control means and showing the display result of the variable display of the specific identification information according to the light-emitting mode;
a movable body;
and a movable body control means for controlling the movement of the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of controlling a confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally,
The plurality of light emitting means are
When the power failure is restored, the lighting mode becomes a display result of the variable display of the specific identification information that was shown before the power failure restoration,
In the setting permission state, it becomes a first light emission mode that is not used during a normal game,
After the end of the setting permission state, the plurality of light-emitting means becomes a light-emitting mode showing the same content as the display result of the variable display of the specific identification information shown after the restoration of the power failure, and the control of the confirming operation of the movable body is performed. done,
The game control means, when the backup of the set value is not normally performed in the setting permission state, the plurality of light emitting means in a light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode is used during the normal game Control in the second light emission mode without
The game control means is
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium enters the starting area,
Variable display of specific identification information,
Based on the result of the determination, any one of a first variation pattern, which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern, which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, is selected. decide and
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means is
The variable display of the decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed using the display means,
When receiving the first command, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state with a predetermined reach,
When receiving the second command, it is possible to notify that the predetermined reach is not controlled to the advantageous state,
When the first command is received, the title notification corresponding to the predetermined reach can be executed in either a normal mode or a variation mode with a higher degree of expectation than the normal mode, and the title notification corresponding to the predetermined reach can be executed. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation by changing the performance mode of the predetermined reach at a plurality of timings after the title notification is completed,
When the second command is received, the title notification corresponding to the predetermined reach can be executed in either a normal mode or a variation mode with a higher degree of expectation than the normal mode, and the notification corresponding to the predetermined reach can be performed. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation by changing the performance mode of the predetermined reach at a plurality of timings after the title notification is completed,
When the first command is received, it is possible to display the decoration identification information in a reach mode during execution of the predetermined reach,
When the second command is received, it is possible to display the decoration identification information in a reach mode during execution of the predetermined reach,
When receiving the first command,
displaying a character display in a predetermined area of the display means for indicating that the control is in the advantageous state;
After that, the decoration identification information is displayed in an area including the predetermined area of the display means in a predetermined size larger than that displayed in the reach mode and in a mode indicating that the information is controlled to the advantageous state. A gaming machine characterized by:

Images